Tds National Reports Itu Telecom World 2003 and Canton Ofgeneva Hosted by Therepublic

www.itu.int/itutelecom [email protected] E-mail: Tel.: +41227306161–Fax: +41227306444 Place desNations, CH-1211Geneva20,Switzerland Union Telecommunication International

TDS NATIONAL REPORTS ITU TELECOM WORLD 2003 AND CANTON OFGENEVA HOSTED BY THEREPUBLIC

TDS NATIONAL REPORTS

The Republic and Canton of Geneva sponsors of the Telecom Development Symposium (TDS)

Table of contents

Page Page

Albania ...... 1 Moldova...... 145

Angola ...... 5 Mongolia...... 147

Armenia...... 9 Myanmar ...... 155

Bangladesh ...... 11 Nepal ...... 159 Benin ...... 17 Nicaragua ...... 165 Bhutan...... 21 Pakistan...... 167 Bosnia and Herzegovina ...... 27 Papua New Guinea ...... 179 Burkina Faso ...... 31 Paraguay ...... 183 Burundi...... 41

Cambodia...... 43 Peru ...... 187

Cape Verde ...... 59 Philippines ...... 195

Chad ...... 69 Sierra Leone...... 215

Djibouti ...... 77 Somalia ...... 217

El Salvador ...... 81 Sri Lanka ...... 219 Eritrea...... 97 Sudan ...... 221 Ethiopia ...... 107 Swaziland ...... 225 Guyana...... 111 Tanzania...... 229 India ...... 121 Togo ...... 233 Indonesia...... 125

Vanuatu ...... 239 Kazakhstan ...... 129

Kenya ...... 133 Zambia ...... 243

Mauritius...... 139 Zimbabwe...... 245

iii

Albania

Telecommunications Status Report in Albania

Since the 1999 with the adoption of new – competition and choice for users; telecommunications policy by the Albanian Government, was paved the way to new – improved protection of consumers. reforms, which have significantly changed the telecommunications market structure Concerning liberalization, was followed and size. approach of phasing liberalisation, an ap- This policy paper identifies participation of proach successfully implemented in many the private capital in telecommunications Eastern Europeans countries. While the as the only alternative for a rapid and mobile market would be opened to compe- steady development. The engagement of tition, by licensing a second operator, private sector would be achieved through: immediately after the AMC privatisation, 1) privatisation of the state owned compa- the provision of telephone calls in urban nies, and 2) liberalisation of the market. areas, of national fixed calls, and operation Based on this policy paper, in 1999 the of international telephony gateways would telecommunications reform was oriented in be remain Albtelecom exclusivity. three directions: As it is explained in this policy paper, the – regulatory framework improvement, exclusivity period granted to Albtelecom, – gradually market liberalisation, and would allow it to have necessary time to – privatisation of state owned companies; adopt itself for operating in a competitive AMC mobile operator and Albtelecom environment, as well as to re-balance its fixed operator. tariffs for providing telephony services. In the beginning of July this year the Albanian The law No. 8618 dated 14.6.2000 “For Government decided to end up the telecommunications in the Republic of Albtelecom exclusivity in urban and na- Albania” as well as adoption of a couple tional fixed telephone calls, and to hold Government legal acts, improved notably over the Albtelecom exclusivity till the end the regulatory framework, therefore im- of 2004. proved the investment climate, which output was the interest expressed by If we give a look to the reform results private sector to invest and run telecom- during last 4 years, there is no doubt that munications activities. the approach followed, that is engagement The long-term objective in telecommuni- of the private sector, was the right way. cations is the harmonised development of the telecommunications infrastructure of While in 1999 there were in the market Albania and its gradual extension through- only two telephone operators, both state out the country, so as to ensure: owned, and a few Internet access provides, today are operating 80 companies; – access to basic telephone services at Albtelecom and 42 rural operators in fixed affordable prices; telephony, 2 operators, respectively AMC – the full range of modern services is and Vodafone Albania, in mobile telephony, accessible by all the population of 20 value added service providers, and Albania; 20 Internet access providers.

Albania - 1 1

Growth of mobile market

850 900

800

700

600

500 370 400 000 users 000 300

200 20.791 100 2.248 3.337 5.599 11

0 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002

In the mobile market, where reform was privatisation, is not achieved. As results of fully implemented, the results are very difficulties that are facing international impressive. While in 2000 this service was telecommunications market, privatisation of available in 20% of the whole territory, Albtelecom was not executed. Comparing where lives 42% of the whole population, to 1998 the number of Albtelecom and was used by only 20 thousand subscribers is doubled and has achieved to people, today this service, provided by 210 thousands, which corresponds a two companies AMC and Vodafone Albania penetration of 7%. However, the develop- based on GSM technology, is available in ment rate is still low for fulfilling fixed 65% of the country territory, to which telephony needs and for achieving Euro- corresponds 85% of total population. By pean levels. Furthermore, only 1% of the end of 2002, the number of mobile Albtelecom users live in rural areas. subscribers reached to 850 thousands, or Fixed telephony operators in rural areas a penetration of 28%. (all private owned), even in the beginning In contrast with mobile, reform in fixed of their activity, provide services to telephony, which was based on Albtelecom 10 thousands rural people.

Growth of telephony market

Total subs. 1,070,000

2002 220 850

115.8 Total subs. 121, 875 1998 6 9 times Growth 9 times Growth

0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 (in thousands)

Fixed telephones Mobile telephones

2 Albania - 2

Internet market is still in the initial phase; 7) Supporting Development of Locally there are only 15 thousand Internet Relevant Content and Applications; users. It is developing, but the growth 8) Creation of a competitive, liberalized rate does not assure overcoming this telecommunications sector; situation in a middle term period. Of course, cultural and economic factors 9) Development of inexpensive, fast and have their impact on this situation. secure ICT infrastructure throughout Nevertheless, Albanian Internet develop- Albania; ment to the European levels needs huge 10) Development of the ICT Sector as a financial resources, which cannot be Production Sector; provided without the foreign capital presence, as the mobile experience showed. 11) Supporting Electronic Business; The above telecommunications market 12) Active participation in SEE regional overview shows that a lot of work needs Initiatives; to do. Indicators show that only 1 in 13) Active participation in EU Initiatives. 5 households owns a fixed telephone line, and a big gap exists between urban and To this end, the Ministry of Transport and rural areas. The gap is bigger comparing Telecommunications have drafted an action to the European Union. plan; its main directions consist on: The evolution of ICT (Information and – To achieve by the end of 2005 about Communication Technology) last decade 450-500 thousands fixed working has spurred in the developed countries lines. Albtelecom have to be the the creation of the so-called information biggest contributor. society. The information society has shown the potential to render the econ- – To further escalate competition in omy more competitive, more efficient and mobile market, by issuing 3rd GSM productive, but also life more humane. license to Albtelecom. During 2004, ICT is in fact the essential tool to build licensing procedures for 3rd mobile the Information Society, and to reduce generations will be prepared. this gap between poorer and richer – To extend telecommunication infra- countries, called now digital divide. structure in rural areas. Besides contri- Being aware on the importance ICT have, bution of rural operators, Albtelecom this year Albanian Government approved has to install at least 30 lines in each “Albanian ICT development strategy”. commune centre. Moreover, by the This document sets 13 main goals: end of 2005 lines, 5% of its fixed subscribers should belong to rural 1) Pro-Active, Well-Coordinated National areas. Meanwhile, Albanian Posts has ICT Policies; to offer to the public Internet services 2) Creation of ICT-Supportive Legislative in its postal offices in rural areas. Environment; – To improve regulatory framework, to 3) More Effective, Transparent, Respon- fully comply it with EU directives, and sive Government and Public Services; to fully liberalize fixed telephony market. Focus will be on improving 4) Promoting Basic Computer Literacy; efficiency in managing scarce re- 5) Creating a Cadre of Advanced ICT sources, such as frequencies and Specialists; numbering, and their assignment through transparent and non-discrimi- 6) Supporting ICT in Health and Social natory procedures. Services;

Albania - 3 3

Mr Genci Pojani Mr Pirro Xhixho Head of Development Department General Director Ministry of Transport and Ministry of Transports and Telecommunication Telecommunications 42, “Myslym Shyri” Street Scanderbeg Square No. 2 AL-TIRANA AL-TIRANA Albania Albania Tel.: +355 42 32 320 Tel.: +355 4 22 7204 Fax: +355 42 337 72 Fax: +355 4 23 3772 E-mail: [email protected]

4 Albania - 4

Angola

Rapport national de l'Angola sur le développement des télécommunications

Présentation du secteur 2.3 Dans le domaine des télécommunications technique en Angola – Gère et controle le spectre de fré- quences radioélectriques; – Homologue les equipements et maté- 1 Encadrement riels de télécommunications; institutionnel – Etablit les plans fondamentaux, les L'Institut Angolais des Communications – normes et les particularités ou spéci- INACOM, crée par force du décret n° 12/99 ficités techniques pour le fonctionne- du 25 juin, est une Institution Publique, ment des systèmes de télécommuni- dotée d'une personnalité juridique et cations; possède une autonomie financière et patri- – Etablit encore les règles de base pour moniale. les accords d'interconnexion.

2 Attributions et 3 Politiques du secteur compétences des télécommunica- Ses attributions sont classées dans trois tions en Angola principaux niveaux Le livre blanc approuvé par le conseil de Ministres en juin 2001 constitue le plan 2.1 Assistance au directeur dans lequel est défini les politi- gouvernement ques pour le développement du secteur des telecommunications en Angola. De part Assiste le gouvernement dans la définition la publication de ce livre, l'objectif de politiques pour le développement des poursuivi par le gouvernement angolais est télécommunications dans le pays et de promouvoir le développement continu prepare le cadre légal du secteur. ou soutenu de télécommunications, mise à la portée du public, de façon à garantir un 2.2 Réglementation du accès universel aux citoyens et à la société secteur moyennant la définition de: – Formes de promotion et de participa- – Organise le secteur; tion de plusieurs intervenants dans le – Attribue et supervisionne les licences secteur, pour l'exploitation de services de télé- communications ouverts à la concur- – Règles pour l'encadrement de l'inter- rence, établit les prix et adopte des vention de l'Etat, mesures pour la défense de consom- – Un cadre légal, propice aux inves- mateur. tissements du secteur privé,

Angola - 1 5

– Formes et mécanismes pour la devront commencer leurs activités huit création et le developpement de capa- (8) mois après la date de la concession de cité humaine et tecnologie nationale, licence d'exploitation. – Rôle à assumer pour l'Angola dans le Dans le cadre de la coordination contexte des télécommunications aux régionale, l'INACOM reconnait la nécessité niveau régional, continental et global. de accroître et d'accélérer les actions de Dans le cadre des stratégies globales coordination et de l'intégration commu- tracées pour le secteur, l'INACOM est nautaire. entrain de travailler dans: A cet effet, il vient de replanier le spectre – L'octroi des licences aux nouveau opé- radioélectrique, elaborer simultanément rateurs; un diplôme légal sur cette matière, qui a déjà été approuvée par les instances – Le problématique ayant trait à l'inter- superieures du pays. connexion; – L'administration des plans fondamen- Outres les diplômes déjà approuvés, le taux; conseil des ministres devra encore se prononcer sur les diplômes suivants: – Le controle de prix et de la qualité des services. – Tarifaire radioélectrique, – Réglement pour l'autorisation techni- En ce qui concerne l'octroi des licences il que des stations de radiodiffusion, faudra retenir qu'en Janvier 2003, l'INACOM a concédé quatre (4) licences de – Réglement général d'interliaison, service fixe complémentaire pour une – Réglement de prix des services pu- période d'exploitation de 15 ans. Dans ce blics des télécommunications, contexte, il s'avère donc nécessaire l'adé- – Plan de numération. quation et le développement du plan de numération. Ce plan est au centre des attentions de 4 Le marché l'INACOM, compte tenu de la nouvelle Actuellement la structure du marché est conjoncture du marché, caractérisée par de la forme suivante: l'entrée de quatre nouveaux opérateurs, qui au terme des réglements du concours a) Service fixe

Operateurs Services proposés Angola Telecom Téléphonie Données Circuits de louage Postes publics Telex Mercury, SARL Téléphonie Données (IP, ISDN) Internet Circuits de louage Téléservice Mundo Startel, SARL Téléphonie Internet Postes publics Telesel, SARL Téléphonie Données/Internet Circuits de louage WEZACOM SARL Téléphonie Données/Internet Télécentres Cabines publiques

6 Angola - 2

Les quatre derniers sont les nouveaux b) Service cellulaire opérateurs du marché angolais des télé- communications.

Opérateurs Technologie Début d'exploitation Angola Telecom AMPS/CDMA 1992 § UNITEL § GSM Abril/2001

ICTs pour le points d'accès dans les bureaux de poste, accès dans des établissements développement: publics et les universités. accès public à l'Internet Les quatre nouveaux opérateurs licenciés Bien qu'il existe déjà l'accès direct à en janvier dernier par l'INACOM vont aussi l'internet par satéllite, le problème de exploiter le service de l'internet dans tout l'internet en Angola est primordial. le territoire national. Opérateur historique des réseaux de base, Les facteurs qui empêchent le déve- l'Angola Telecom n'est pas un ISP, dispose loppement des télécommunications en d'un backbone national et international Angola sont les suivants: qui sert de support aux services de l'internet. – Peu d'investissement, – Concentration des infrastructures de Il a à cet effet, instalé à Luanda un point télécommunications dans des zones national d'accès avec facilité de peering, urbaines, pour bien servir les ISP. – Tarifs encore élevés. Il existe plusieurs prestataires de service internet en Angola, mais les principaux D'efforts considérables ont été amorcés, sont: afin de permettre à l'INACOM de devenir un régulateur indépendant en régle- Ebonet, Netangola, SNET et Multitel. Les mentation, contrôle des normes et d'emis- quatre prestataires, exploitent leur sions, assurant ainsi l'amélioration du service à Luanda, capital du pays et dans système de planification, de gestion et de d'autres zones importantes du pays, vérification du spectre radioélectrique. possèdent environ 11 000 utilisateurs. Des mesures adoptées pour assurer Comment devenir un régulateur indé- l'accès du public à l'internet sont: la pendant? création des télécentres, cafés internet, Avec l'aide de l'UIT peut-être?

Mr Kumba Kiamvu Mr Isaac Antonio Da Silva Head Technician of Study International Relations Department Development & Information Department Angolan Institute of Communications Angolan Institute of Communications (INACOM) (INACOM) Avenue de Portugal N. 92, 7th Floor Avenue de Portugal N. 92, 7th Floor B.P. 1459 B.P. 1459 AO-LUANDA AO-LUANDA Angola Angola Tél.: +244 2 338 352 Tél.: +244 2 338 352 Fax: +244 2 339 356 Fax: +244 2 339 356 E-mail: [email protected]

Angola - 3 7

Armenia

Telecommunication Development Country Report for Armenia

1 Integrating – Focused monitoring and research/ Consumers into the surveying on the basis of received inputs, which may sometimes require Regulatory Process calling of special commissions and holding of cooperative efforts with an In accordance with legislation effective in operator and/or consumers, the Republic of Armenia, policy-making and regulatory area of the Armenian tele- – Requesting and receipt of additional communication is currently represented necessary information from operator by the Ministry of Transport and Commu- and/or consumers through the means nication of the Republic of Armenia. The of direct meetings, phone calls, Ministry is authorized by the Armenian traditional letter inquires, electronic Government to elaborate and implement mails. the policy of this area, as well as to – Follow-up information and feedback license and regulate telecommunication provision to consumers by the activity of operators available in the Ministry, featuring a regulatory effort market. Regulation of the nation-wide (reporting, issuance of government exclusive telecommunication operator of directive, enactment of law) being basic telephony, GSM and international initiated. access services (ArmenTel Company, a join venture with OTE Holding, Greece) Interaction with consumers in the policy- constitutes an enormous part of regula- making area of telecommunications is tory efforts within scope of the Ministry’s another platform upon which the Ministry activities. has been elaborating principles of telecommunications development. In pursuit of Interaction between the Ministry and consumer interests and on the Ministry’s consumers of telecom services serves as invitation, the Consumer Union (a non-for- an important channel through which profit organization) of the Republic of necessary inputs are received and Armenia has recently delegated its transformed into an information and then representatives to actively participate in a vision for further regulatory initiations: working commission regular sessions, monitoring, research and reporting, aimed at reforming and development of issuance of government directives, enact- Conception for Armenian Telecommuni- ment of laws. cation and Informatization Sectors Devel- opment. This commission has been The interaction process with consumers created by the call of the Ministry and has usually includes the following compo- invited responsible public organizations, nents: private operators and civil society participants of the ICT field, such as – Receipt and processing of consumer Consumer Union, Union of Internet Users complaints and inquires by a struc- (Internet Society) to express their needs tural unit of the Ministry, notably and conceptual visions for future Communication Department, development of ICT field in Armenia.

Armenia - 1 9

Opinions from consumer sector are ITU BDT can assist its member countries contributive in terms shaping a customer- with the task of integrating consumers oriented, socially responsible telecommuni- into the regulatory process by working cation environment, calling for a transpar- out a viable policy or mechanism of ent regulation, equitable approach to communication between state regulatory dispute resolution, multifactor QoS indica- structures and consumers/their unions and tors, direct and regular participation of associations. With respect to this, special consumers in the regulator’s decisions. working sessions may be convened with These are the needs and requirements the participation of ITU member regulators which have indeed been challenges for the and administrations, sectoral members, regulator as well as private operator in the consumer representing agencies and current monopolistic telecom environment institutions. The outcome of the work of Armenia. would be structured into a formal recommendation or a report to be For a developing country, competition in considered by member states. the telecommunications services on one side, and universal service provision on the other, can be the necessary policy levers Another option where ITU’s support can upon which a balanced business environ- be instrumental is guidelining in formula- ment would be created: consumer-oriented tion and definition of technical and for the population as well as equally business (multifactor) QoS indicators on favorable for all operators included. It basis of inputs and opinions from should be noted that fast-paced technologi- consumer perspective. These efforts may cal developments presently experiencing in result in recommended guidelines for ICT field allow to lessen the social burden shaping standard indicators that would be (for operators) of universal service provi- acceptable by the industry, consumers sion to the most possible extent. and regulator of an ITU member country.

Mr Gevorg Gevorgyan Mr Tigran Khachatryan Head of CommUnication Department Deputy Head of Information Dept. Ministry of Transport and Communication Chief of High-Tech Division Ministry of Transport and Communication 28, Nalbandyan Street AM-375010 YEREVAN 28, Nalbandyan Street Armenia AM-YEREVAN Armenia Tel.: +374 1 54 92 60 Fax: +374 1 52 88 10 Tel.: +374 1 52 66 30 E-mail: [email protected] Fax: +374 1 52 88 10 E-mail: [email protected]

10 Armenia - 2

Bangladesh

ICTs for development – Internet for all: Public Internet Access

1 Bangladesh: Country Profile

Geographical location Between latitude 20°34’ and 26°38’ North and between longitude 88°01’ and 92°41’ East, South Asia Boundary North: India West: India South: Bay of Bengal East: India and Myanmar Area 144,000 sq. km. Administrative unit Division: 6 District: 64 Upazilla: 496 Population 140 million Literacy rate 44.3% (15 yrs. and above) Climate Sub-tropical Temperature: Winter 11°C to 19°C Summer 21°C to 34°C Standard time GMT + 6 hours Language Bangla Currency Taka Land profile Flat terrain crisscrossed by 4 big rivers and their tributaries

GDP (2002-2003) Taka 3 004.85 million (USD 51.89 billion) GDP growth rate 5.33%

Per capita income 23 025 Taka (USD 386)

2 Introduction The Information and Communication Technology (ICT) is one of the driving forces for the socio-economic develop- Knowledge is the heritage of all human- ment of a country. With the advancement ity. It is an unlimited resource that of Information and Communication continuously grows and enriches as it is Technology, one can live in the global shared. Extending and protecting the village irrespective of distance or national information in the public domain is a and international boundaries. The term major way of bridging the digital divide Information and Communication Tech- within and between the countries. The nology (ICT) springs from the conver- main vehicle of transferring and sharing gence of telecommunication, computing the knowledge is Information and and broadcasting through the use of Communication Technology (ICT). digital information.

Bangladesh - 1 11

3 ICT Capabilities and and human resource development constitute the fundamental building blocks Digital Divide for any development in the ICT sector. Information and Communication Tech- The Least Developed Countries (LDCs) nology (ICT) can play a vital role in face the fast rate of technological change transforming the digital divide to digital and sector expansion, which puts tre- opportunites. ICT not only narrows the mendous pressure on the upgrading of gap between developed and developing skills. They have acute shortage of ICT countries but also works as a tool to specialists and needs assistance from the bridge between haves and haves not. international and regional organizations Though Internet may provide equal to use more ICT based tools. The manu- opportunities and democratic communi- facturers should come forward with cation, yet access is limited to those who appropriate technology for a low cost have Internet access either at home, at and high quality ICT terminal so that a work or at an educational institution. Two maximum number of the people can significant factors to Internet access are have access to it with affordable cost. income and education. Over and above, other factors such as age, gender, occupation and even geographical region 4 ICT Scenario in also affect the degree and nature of Bangladesh Internet use in a given country. Bangladesh stands far behind compared Four priority areas, namely participation to other regional and developed countries of government, infrastructure develop- in terms of ICT infrastructure. A ment, human resources development and significant number of new projects has enhancement of ICT literacy, draw par- been taken by Bangladesh Telegraph and ticular attention for ICT take-off in the Telephone Board (BTTB), only public tele- least developed countries. Above all, communication sector of the country, having recognized the crucial role of ICTs under the initiative of Ministry of Posts in the present as well as in future days to and Telecommunication in order to enhance ICT capabilities, political will is increase the tele-density as well as to mandatory. Infrastructure development enhance the ICT activities in the country.

Telecom Scenario Items June 1990 June 1995 June 2000 June 2002 June 2003 Fixed Telephones 245 824 320 734 580 000 715 000 920 993

Cellular Mobile Telephones 0 3 000 235 000 710 000 1 350 000

International Circuits 200 954 2 302 2 767 3 600 Digitalization of Switching 1.25% 25.12% 68% 90% 94% Tele-density 0.22 0.27 0.6 1 1.6

4.1 Fixed and Mobile In Bangladesh, the fixed telephone density Telephone is only about 0.65%, which is very low compared to the developed countries. The telecom sector was liberalized for private While considering the information investment in late 1980s. By this time only infrastructure of Bangladesh, one should 4 (four) private operators are providing consider the parameters like access to mobile telephone services. At present the telecommunication, fixed telephone pene- numbers of mobile telephones outnum- tration and mobile telephone penetration. bered the fixed telephone lines and mobile The state-owned organization BTTB tele-density is now about 0.95%. provides fixed telephone in urban as well as in rural areas whereas the other two private operators serve in some of the 4.2 Internet Services rural areas, for which they are able to Although not adequate, Internet and Data cover 26 000 subscribers only (2.8%). Communication facility in Bangladesh has

12 Bangladesh - 2

been greatly expanded. Long before Inter- expanded to 13 districts with a total of net Services and Data Communication 23 nodes till today. The DDN network is have been privatized. There are 114 Inter- able to provide high-speed point-to-point net Service Providers (ISPs) all over the leased data line from 64 kbps to country connection through VSAT. The 2 048 kbps using voice grade copper number of users is around 70 000. cables. Within a short time this service has become popular among the multi- First online Internet service has been national organizations, banks, software introduced in Bangladesh in 1996. BTTB compagnies and other organizations. started the Internet service in early 1999. Banks are using this service for their _ Two types of services are available now online banking service, operating Auto- Dial-Up and Leased Line Internet service. mated Teller Machines and credit card The present capacity of access port is 506 verifications, etc. The multinationals and and backone capacity is 10 Mbps con- other organizations are using high-speed nected via two routes – one Teleglobe link for data/file transfer and information (Canada) and C&W (USA). Initially the sharing among their different offices. The Internet service has been made available performance of this network is very much only to 6 major cities, but due to huge better than services through VSAT and demand BTTB has extended this service radio. to all the 64 districts’ headquarters. Now Internet service is also available at Upazilla levels/rural areas. Out of 4.4 Packet Switched Data 496 Upazilla headquarters and Growth Network (PSDN) centers only 144 have been covered. However, project has been taken to make Bangladesh Telegraph and Telephone the remaining Upazilla headquarters Board (BTTB) has installed Packet under digital switching which will be Switched Data Network having nodes at completed by June 2005. The unique the Dhaka multi-exchange area and 5 features of BTTB Internet service are (five) other cities. The network provides roaming facility and CallerID authentica- three types of services to the data tion (in addition to username and subscribers. These are X.25 leased, X.28 password authentication). leased and X.28 dial-up subscriber. Inter- node connectivity has been provided over Leased Internet connections (Broadband) DDN (Digital Data Network) and interna- are offered to the corporate users. The tional gateway connectivity has been service is being given over DDN links. obtained through Satellite Earth taking BTTB can provide this service to the areas one 64 kbps circuit with VSNL (Videsh where DDN nodes (23) are installed. Sanchar Nigam Limited), New Delhi. About 10 universities, software exporters and large organizations have been using BTTB leased Internet service. 5 Factors affecting the promotion of ICT All the infrastructures of BTTB are playing an immense role in the activities of the in Bangladesh ICT arena. Telephone connections, Micro- The digital gap is wider in Bangladesh wave links, Optical fibres, Digital Data compared to other developing countries. Network, Packet Switched Data Network, The lack of driving forces for the digital Internet Systems are supporting different divide: technological, economical, educa- organizations and people as a whole to tional, social and political and human move to an Information Society. resource are mainly responsible for this wider gap. 4.3 Digital Data Network – Techological factor: one of the main (DDN) reasons of digital divide in Bangladesh is the poor telecommunication infra- BTTB has established a Digital Data structure. Only about 6 persons out of Network in early 2000 with a total of 1 000 have access to fixed phones, 9 nodes covering 5 districts only. Under which is the cheapest media to access increasing demand, this network has been Internet. And also about 10 persons

Bangladesh - 3 13

out of 1 000 have mobile telephones. and sub-urban areas has been reduced to Internet access through mobile tele- promote more access to the information phone is very limited and expensive. and communication technology. – Economic factor: the economic factor is one of the vital issues for com- Installation of one million mobile phones puter use and Internet connectivity. covering the whole country through BTTB Usually, wealthy and educated as is under active consideration of the Gov- well as young and urban people have ernment. For both public sector and the Internet access which implies private sector participation in mobile that affordability plays an important communications, mobile telephone pene- role to inspire people to use Internet. tration will certainly increase to a satisfac- tory level. With the introduction of BTTB’s – Educational factor: illiteracy as well as mobile telephone service along with the language barrier are also evolved private operators, rural telecommunication from the educational factor. Due to infrastructure will also be developed and literacy problem, Bangladesh is facing the rural people will be able to get the an acute crisis of skilled computer facilities of ICT. user. Language problem is also an important problem for the local user Governement is playing a very positive of the Internet. role to expand Internet services through- – Social and political factor: male out the country. A project is on imple- groups of the society can avail the mentation to expand the Internet service web-access facility from commercial in the rural areas to allow the rural centers or outside the home but the people to get the access to ICT. local female community has limited access due to social and politial In an initiative to encourage the people to environment. Unfortunately, due to use more Internet, the Government has family obligations and services, they recently reduced the usage charge of cannot spare sufficient time for using BTTB’s Internet services for both dial-up the Internet. and leased line. BTTB is also encouraging – Human resource factor: as we are ap- private ISPs, universities and educational proaching the digital era, the demand and research institutions, software ex- for human resource development is porters and corporate offices to lease enormously increasing both for users Internet access at a very reasonable price. and professionals. Without educated Moreover, Bangladesh has signed the people, mere expansion of services consortium of SEA-ME-WE-4 to lay a will not be benefited. To provide ICT submarine cable in order to have connec- for all, it is necessary to increase the tivity with the Information Super Highway. penetration of ICT-related products This cable will provide Bangladesh with and services. To empower the people sufficient bandwidth for ICT expansion and in ICT, general literacy, ICT aware- software export/data transmission at a ness and training have no alterna- much cheaper rate. tives. The price of ICT equipment has been falling sharply due to ICT-friendly taxation 6 Government measures taken by the Government with a initiatives view to play positive impact for enhancing ICT capabilities of the country. To promote ICT in the country, all the districts and more than 144 Upazillas have In Bangladesh, Telecom Regulatory been brought under digital telephone Commission (BTRC) has been functioning network. Government has taken a policy since January 2002 and an updated to digitalize all the 496 Upazillas and some Telecommunication Act has been enacted. important growth centers to expand its It is expected that regulatory measures digital network by 2005. Moreover, the will help to create a conducive atmosphere installation charge of telephone connection for ICT investment and contribute to in the public sector particularly in the rural narrowing the Digital Divide.

14 Bangladesh - 4

7 Conclusion – Infrastructure: priority should be given to develop the domestic tele- To achieve the equitable universal access communication infrastructure with to Information and Communication access to the main backbone of the Technology (ICT) for promoting social, International Information Super High- economic and cultural development, to way in public sector as well as in share knowledge and information to all private sector in order to extend citizens of this planet and to alleviate socio-economic benefits of ICTs to all poverty, the United Nations have taken a segments of society. resolution to hold a World Summit on the – Human resource: human resource Information Society (WSIS). The first development is key to enabling the phase of the Summit will be held in people in the LDCs to benefit from the Geneva from 10-12 December 2003 and access to technology. Inclusion of ICT the second phase in Tunis in 2005. into the educational curriculum and Though Bangladesh is making progess in proper training in hardware and expanding access to communication software, appropriate to the needs of network, yet the rate is not fast enough to the times, is essential. provide most citizens with access to ICT. – Attention to marginalized groups and The basic telecommunication access is not areas: promoting easy and affordable enough to promote ICT, unless it is access to ICT, particularly to the rural affordable to the common people. Devel- and remote communities, by installing oped countries, international and regional ICT-based equipment and extending organizations should come forward with a the wired and wireless connectivity in helping hand to the Least Developed order to provide ICT-enabled services Countries on different issues in order to like e-education, e-business, e-medi- promote ICT. cine, etc. To promote Information and Commu- – Awareness: campaigning ICT aware- nication Technology in order to get ness through mass media and devel- universal and affordable Internet access oping web sites in local languages the following reommendations can be containing information which is more made: beneficial to the common people.

Mr Mohammed Fazlul Huq Mr Mohammed Moniruzzaman Khan Member of Telecom System Planning General Manager Bangladesh Telegraph & Telephone Transmission Board Bangladesh Telegraph & Telephone Board 37/E Eskaton Garden BD-DHAKA, Ramna 1000 37/E Eskaton Garden Bangladesh BD-DHAKA, Ramna 1000 Bangladesh Tel.: +880 2 831 25 25 Fax: +880 2 861 66 04 Tel.: +880 2 832 4141 Fax: +880 2 882 3492

Bangladesh - 5 15

Benin

Les défis de la planification des réseaux de télécommunications au Bénin

Introduction Cette situation perdure car à divers ni- La planification est déterminante dans la veaux de responsabilité la préoccupation gestion des réseaux des Télécommuni- majeure ne se trouve pas dans un recueil cations. De la conception des program- d'indicateurs liés aux tâches définies à mes à leur réalisation, de nombreuses partir des objectifs. L'insuffisance des étapes intermédiaires méritent une atten- analyses des indicateurs ne permet pas tion particulière pour la bonne maîtrise de de mettre en exergue les forces et les l'exploitation des équipements. Cepen- faiblesses et dans une certaine mesure dant de nombreux défis sont à relever d'améliorer ces dernières. pour que la planification puisse prendre sa place dans les programmes de dévelop- pement des réseaux de télécommunica- 1.2 Les budgets annuels de tions au Bénin. Les éléments à prendre en l'entreprise compte en ce qui concerne l'opérateur historique sont aussi bien endogènes L'absence de la comptabilité analytique ne qu'exogènes. permet pas de rattacher les charges et les projets aux centres de responsabilité. Des efforts sont faits pour préparer un budget 1 Contraintes liées à par Direction, mais il reste que certains l'entreprise éléments sont agrégés parfois par la Direction de l'Approvisionnement chargée 1.1 Le système de gestion de des acquisitions. Le cas le plus indicatif provient des budgets de fonctionnement l'information destinés à la maintenance. Les prévisions Le système de gestion en place dans des montants ne reposent pas sur des l'entreprise ne repose pas sur des indi- quantitatifs de chaque service et la som- cateurs fiables. Des informations essen- mation globale constitue le besoin sur la tielles comme le chiffre d'affaires, le taux période. Un autre exemple, c'est le maté- de recouvrement des factures à la clien- riel de bureau dont l'estimation n'est pas tèle, les indicateurs de performances des souvent maîtrisée par chaque service. équipements, les taux de dérangements, les montants de factures, les sommes Quant aux budgets d'investissements qui mises en recouvrement et les montants semblent recueillir l'essentiel de l'atten- recouvrés ne paraissent pas toujours tion, le financement n'est pas identifié et cohérents. même sa recherche ne constitue pas souvent un souci pour la Direction qui l'a Ces indicateurs connaissent des distor- prévue. Elle attend en toute évidence de sions de leur cueillette jusqu'à leur son collègue de la Direction Financière et transcription et leur utilisation dans le Comptable la mise à disposition des système d'information de l'entreprise. fonds.

Benin - 1 17

1.3 L'organisation du travail d'année budgétaire ne peut intervenir avant le 3e trimestre de l'année. Malgré la définition précise des postes dans l'organigramme, l'organisation effec- La Commission Nationale des Marchés tive du travail crée des confusions dans Publics autorise l'appel d'offres, participe les attributions. Il y a même une tendan- aux travaux d'évaluation, approuve le ce à voir plusieurs responsables s'attri- rapport d'évaluation et signe le marché. buer les mêmes prérogatives. C'est ainsi qu'à défaut d'évaluation relative aux pro- 2.2 Le régime fiscal cédures et expériences mises en œuvre, certaines activités sont prises d'assaut Le régime fiscal du Bénin n'exonère pas pour une raison ou pour une autre tandis automatiquement les investissements en que d'autres paraissent abandonnées. télécommunications. Ceci intervient dans le cadre des financements bilatéraux ou Le développement des ressources hu- multilatéraux avec les pays ou les insti- maines constitue la pierre angulaire des tutions internationales de financement. Il insuffisances observées çà et là. Les est alors spécifié que le prêteur ne prend programmes de formation à la tâche ont pas en charge les coûts liés à la fiscalité été détournés et interprétés comme des en vigueur en à venir. visas aux postes de responsabilités. C'est vrai qu'il y a eu une non concordance En dehors de ces cas, l'OPT dédouane entre le souci de former un agent pour normalement ses acquisitions au cordon améliorer son rendement à sa position douanier à hauteur de 40 à 50% du et l'obligation de promotion fortement prix CIF des fournitures. Ces facteurs recommandée par la convention collective doivent être pris en compte dans les outil de gestion des ressources humaines schémas d'investissement. Malheureuse- de l'entreprise. ment ce n'est pas souvent le cas, ce qui constitue une pression à l'arrivée des La planification n'est donc pas encore fournitures au cordon douanier sur la perçue comme un creuset où chaque trésorerie. responsable doit venir puiser sa force pour mieux atteindre ses objectifs. 2.3 L'organisation territoriale

Il est difficile d'identifier un critère simple et convaincant sur la base duquel le 2 L'environnement découpage administratif est fait. Ce qui est commun à toutes les zones c'est un national besoin très urgent d'accès aux équipe- ments de télécommunications pour satis- 2.1 Les procédures faire une soif de communiquer. d'acquisition Au niveau des villes et des villages, aucune politique d'occupation du territoire Depuis janvier 2001, il a été institué une n'est mise en œuvre. A un moment Commission Nationale des donné, l'OPT s'est même vu obligé de Marchés Publics qui doit autoriser et participer à un programme de numérota- signer les marchés publics dont le tion et de baptême des rues dans l'en- montant est: semble du pays aussi bien pour déployer son réseau de télécommunications que – supérieur ou égal à dix millions pour repérer les destinataires de courrier (10 000 000) de Francs CFA pour les et la distribution des factures de télé- acquisitions de fournitures et services. phone entre autres. – supérieur ou égal à trente millions Dans les campagnes, l'habitat est très (30 000 000) de Francs CFA pour les travaux. dispersé imposant de fait l'utilisation de la technologie sans fil car le réseau filaire se Le suivi rigoureux de cette procédure fait révèle techniquement inadéquat et finan- qu'une acquisition entamée en début cièrement onéreux.

18 Benin - 2

2.4 Le niveau de vie des limité à l'Ouest par le Togo, au Nord par populations le Niger, au Nord – Ouest par le Burkina Faso et à l'Est par le Nigeria. Le raccordement téléphonique pour un abonnement résidentiel se fait au coût de De la côte jusqu'à 400 Km vers le Nord et quatre vingt seize mille quatre cent sur 50 Km jusqu'à la frontière avec le quatre vingt douze (96.492) Francs CFA Niger, donc 450 en largeur le pays ne payable une fois et cent soixante dépasse pas 125 km. quinze mille six cent quatre vingt douze Sur le reste des 300 km, la distance (175.692) pour un abonnement commer- extrême atteint 300 km, zone dans cial payable une fois. Des frais d'entretien laquelle la densité de la population est la sont payables chaque mois en plus de la plus faible. consommation. Par ailleurs comme partout ailleurs en Le chiffre d'affaires moyen par abonné Afrique les frontières sont très poreuses est de cinquante quatre mille (54.000) favorisant de fait une migration relative- francs CFA l'an. ment facile des populations le long des Souvent à la date limite de paiement des frontières. factures «les queues» constituées par les clients sont longues devant les guichets de recouvrement. Malgré des délais de 3 Conclusion paiement raisonnables, les clients arrivent difficilement honorer leur dû. Parfois La rentabilité des investissements cons- même certains font recours appel à des titue un souci permanent de gestion qui prêts. Le besoin est donc évident mais la risque d'être désespérément espérée capacité financière pour payer le service dans les zones rurales où vit 70% de la rendu n'est pas toujours suffisante. population du pays. Les contraintes sus mentionnées loin 2.5 La position géographique d'être un handicap doivent être tournées en avantages afin que la planification Le Bénin est un pays allongé de l'Océan devienne une activité permanente quoti- Atlantique au fleuve Niger, sur 750 km et diennement prise en compte.

M. Isidore Degbelo M. Etienne Kossi Directeur des Télécommunications Directeur de la Planification et Internationales des Projets Direction Générale Office des postes et des Office des postes et des télécommunications (OPT) télécommunications B.P. 5959 B.P. 5959 BJ-COTONOU, 01 BJ-COTONOU, 01 Bénin Bénin Tél.: +229 31 39 59 Tél.: +229 31 58 98 Fax: +229 31 41 42 Fax: +229 31 27 07 E-mail: [email protected] E-mail: [email protected]

Benin - 3 19

Bhutan

ICT for Development vis-à-vis Gross National Happiness

1 Country background tified as the main pillars of GNH are economic growth and development, preser- The Kingdom of Bhutan lies in South Asia, vation and promotion of cultural heritage, in the Eastern Himalayas. It is landlocked, preservation and sustainable use of the between the Tibetan Autonomous Region environment, and good governance. of China to the north and India to the east, south and west; with a total surface Into the second year of the Ninth Five area of 46,500 square kilometers and a Year Plan, 9FYP (2002–2007) now, the population of about 700,000. The country basic infrastructures in the country have is almost entirely mountainous, with land been considerably improved. This in turn rising from about 160 meters above sea has allowed new economic activities such level in the south to the high Himalayas in as the sale of hydroelectric power and the north that rise to over 7,500 meters. construction to be developed. Indeed, the Administratively, Bhutan is divided into electricity sector provided almost 45% of 20 Dzongkhags (or districts), which are the national revenue in 2000–2001 and is further sub-divided into 201 Geogs1. increasingly pivotal to the country’s economic development. At the same time, Bhutan has only recently ended its self the government has sought to improve imposed isolation and joined the inter- the basic level of education and the effi- national community. The process of cacy of government. In late 1999, the planned modern development began with government released a report aimed at the First Five Year Plan (1961–1966). As facilitating good governance through en- it has gradually joined the international hancing efficiency, transparency and ac- community, Bhutan has adopted a unique countability that has subsequently been approach to development: Gross National acted upon. Happiness (GNH). Articulated by the fourth and present King Jigme Singye A vivid demonstration of Bhutan's willing- Wangchuck in the 1970s to underline that ness to embrace the international com- development has more dimensions than munity can be found in its membership of just those associated with Gross Domestic international organizations such as the Product (GDP), GNH has served to direct United Nations, World Bank, International change within Bhutan for the last two Civil Aviation Organization, International decades. It recognizes that there are Monetary Fund, G-77, Universal Postal many dimensions to development and Union, World Intellectual Property Organi- that economic goals alone are not zation, International Telecommunication sufficient. Development is understood as Union (ITU), Asia-Pacific Telecommunity a process that seeks to contribute to both (APT), Asian Development Bank, South the material and spiritual well-being of Asian Association for Regional Coop- the person. The four major areas iden- eration, etc. Through these organizations, ______Bhutan has begun to internationalize its decision-making processes. Bhutan has 1 A Geog is the smallest administrative block comprising a also applied to join the World Trade number of villages. A village population in Bhutan normally ranges from 50 to 300. Organization (WTO), with a working party

Bhutan - 1 21

having been established in 1999 to Present connectivity is limited to the examine its application.2 As of date, Dzongkhag headquarters, satellite towns, Bhutan has formal diplomatic ties with places with close proximity to motor 22 countries. roads and very few rural areas. Rural services have been extended using Very High Frequency (VHF) and Very Small 2 Information and Aperture Terminals (VSAT) technologies. communications High Frequency (HF) wireless communications still play a vital role in serving scenario isolated remote areas. National tele- Telecommunications (telecoms) and infor- density is about 3.25% but actual pene- mation technology (IT) in Bhutan are also tration in the rural areas is less than fairly recent affairs. The Royal Govern- 0.01% per 100 inhabitants. About 79% of ment of Bhutan (RGoB) initiated the first the Bhutanese population lives in rural telecoms network to support road con- areas. Only 76 of the 201 Geogs have struction services, in 1963; the system telephone connections at present. then consisted of three separate analogue Internet services were introduced in June networks. Modern telecoms development 1999 with the establishment of DrukNet, process began in the late 1980s; IT was the country’s first and only Internet formally launched in June 1999 with the Service Provider (ISP) so far. In its fourth introduction of the Internet, and cable year, DrukNet has about 1,750 dial-up television services provision regularized in and 26 leased line customers nationwide. November 1999. There are 16 IT-based firms, 18 computer An accelerated development of the training institutes and about 15 Internet telecoms sector in Bhutan started with Cafés, 7 of which are based in the capital the formulation of the National Telecom- Thimphu. At the most 5,000 people must munications Master Plan (the Master Plan) be accessing the Internet, which is less in 1989 by the then Department of than 1 per 100 inhabitants. Literacy, in Telecom (DoT). The Master Plan was general, is low, at 54%. ICT literacy is funded through external grant aid from very low. There are at present about 1991 onwards, and implemented in four 7,000 computers in the country, most of phases over a 7-year period. Bhutan now which are concentrated in the capital city has a reliable digital telecoms network and other urban centers. interconnecting all the 20 Dzongkhag The 77th Session of the National Assem- headquarters and major commercial bly passed the Bhutan Telecommunica- centers. The main transmission backbone tions Act 1999, paving the way forward network consists of 34 Mbps digital for sector reform. The Division of Infor- microwave routes connected to digital mation Technology (DIT) was created to switching systems at some of the promote IT development and Bhutan populous Dzongkhag centers and other Telecom Authority (BTA) to regulate the urban areas while the lesser traffic spur telecom sector, in January 2000. The routes consists of 8 Mbps microwave erstwhile DoT was transformed into a radios connected to Remote Line Units wholly government owned corporation, (RLUs). Digital Radio Multiple Access Bhutan Telecom (BT), in July 2000. Subscriber System (DRMASS) was also Bhutan Telecom is the monopoly provider deployed to extend services to some of of all telecommunications services in the the Dzongkhags and few other urban country till date. centers with smaller capacity requirements. BT has implemented a wireless Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) rural access pilot project in two geographically distinct areas, in 2002, with some valuable assis- ______tance from the ITU. The first phase of the 2 Bhutan applied to join the WTO on the 17th September project to introduce mobile cellular com- 1999, with a working party being established in October 1999. However, it was not until February 2003 that the munications in the country is well under- Director-General of the WTO welcomed the commence- way and should commence operations by ment of 'serious work' on its accession process with the end of 2003. BT is also negotiating with delivery of the Memorandum on the Foreign Trade Regime to the WTO. the Danish Government for funds to

22 Bhutan - 2

implement the Rural Telecommunications a knowledge-based society to succeed: Master Plan (the Rural Plan). widespread knowledge of English language; fairly good telecom network in The Dzongkha3 Development Commission much of the country; limited previous has developed the software needed to computerization, allowing the adoption of include Bhutan’s national language di- new (and open) standards; manageable rectly into the Windows Operating amount of data and information; and the System. Towards the end of 2003, users RGoB’s commitment to adopting ICT as around the world will be able to use an essential and a strategic development Dzongkha automatically in all Windows- tool. The Prime Minister submitted to the based programmes, without loading any ongoing 81st Session of the National plug-ins. This will make computers and Assembly that the focus in the ICT sector information more accessible to users who was to enhance awareness, encourage are Dzongkha literate, and help schools the use of ICT and to introduce computer teach Bhutan’s national language effec- literacy of the population from the school tively. level. Although the role of the private The erstwhile Ministry of Communications sector, for now, is limited to retailing has been bifurcated into two ministries in customer premises equipment, running June 2003 – Ministry of Works and public call offices, operating Internet Human Settlements, and Ministry of Cafés, facilitating IT training and since Information and Communications – taking November 1999, providing cable tele- into account the dual nature and distinct vision services, the Foreign Direct characteristics of the construction and ICT Investment (FDI) Policy approved in industries. The restructuring is also the December 2002 should boost local and result of the RGoB’s initiative to promote foreign investor confidence and provide good governance through enhancing ac- access to capital, markets and new countability, transparency and efficiency. technologies. Various measures are being The Ministry of Information and Commu- adopted to streamline and simplify licens- nications (MoIC) has already embarked ing and administrative procedures. The on the formulation of a draft ICT Policy entrepreneurship promotion centre would and a draft ICT Act under the auspices of provide credit guarantee schemes to the UNDP. The draft ICT Act will subsume encourage self-employment through small the Bhutan Telecom Act 1999 and and medium-sized enterprises (SMEs). integrate the Media Act, also in the works, Several incentives including tax holidays, to ultimately draw up a single converged tax exemptions and other concessions information and communications legisla- have been granted since 2002 to encour- tion for Bhutan. age private sector growth.

3 Ninth Five Year Plan The objective of the ICT sector during the (9FYP), 2002-2007 9FYP is to provide 10 telephones for each of Bhutan's 201 Geogs, to expand and Bhutan as a landlocked country, far from enhance communications facilities and regional markets, with no major indus- services, promote e-governance, generate tries, and few export products, has employment and foster private sector everything going against it in a traditional participation and development. These economic model. It is farther away from objectives are embedded into the five opportunities, knowledge and information overall goals of the 9FYP, viz.: than many other countries. Thus, the need for promotion and development of ICT is very large, as are the vast intrinsic • Improving quality of life and income potential benefits. level, especially of the poor; Against all odds, Bhutan is characterized by a unique environment that greatly • Ensuring good governance; improves the chances for development of

______• Promoting private sector growth and 3 Dzongkha is the national language of Bhutan. employment generation;

Bhutan - 3 23

• Preserving and promoting cultural While reliable and affordable ICT infra- heritage and environment conser- structure is the key to e-Bhutan, capacity vation; and building and development of appropriate • Achieving rapid economic growth and applications and local content are equally, transformation. if not more, important. ICT, as an instrument (a tool and an The RGoB recognizes the role that ICTs enabler) and as an industry, is funda- can play in transitioning Bhutan towards mental to achieving the 9FYP goals and an information and knowledge-based objectives. Affordable and usable ICT can economy, and that, in the new emerging indeed transform the way societies work, economic order, information and knowl- entertain, study, govern and live – at the edge is the fundamental basis for wealth individual, organizational, sector, voca- creation, for intellectual and spiritual tional and national levels. ICT cuts across growth, and for national prosperity. The all other sectors of the economy, and thus Government believes that ICT offers the can be used as an important tool for opportunity to leapfrog the key stages of accelerating sustainable socio-economic industrialization and transform the agra- development. As an industry, ICT repre- rian Bhutanese economy into an informa- sents a growing economic sector covering tion economy. hardware, software, telecommunication, The progressive achievement of Gross data communication and consulting ser- National Happiness, through ICT for vices. The implementation of the Rural development, is illustrated by the value Plan during the 9FYP is a national priority. chain model depicted below.

Reliable, sustainable, and affordable ICT networks

ICT Skills and capacity building – computer and ict literacy

Activities Enabling environment – policy, legal and regulatory

Appropriate applications and local content G N H and and Good use of cultural heritage heritage Economic Economic growth and sustainable governance governance environment environment Preservation Preservation Preservation development development promotion of

Main Pillars of GNH

Figure 1 – ICT for Development and GNH

4 The Road Ahead and well-being. ICT offers great potential for preserving our national identity and The right to communicate and the right rich cultural heritage, in promoting ac- to access information and knowledge are countability, transparency and efficiency fundamental human rights (ITU, 2003). through e-governance, and in enabling Information and communications are at e-education (and life-long learning), the core of human progress, endeavour e-health, e-business, e-employment, and e-environment.

24 Bhutan - 4

Information and communications in • Building confidence, trust and secu- Bhutan represents “a road less trav- rity in using ICTs; and elled”; “But I have promises to keep. • Enabling environment for local and And miles to go before I sleep”. The foreign investments to support SMEs Ministry of Information and Communi- and other businesses. cations is fully committed to facilitating and enabling access to ICT for all Bhutanese, and promoting its use to Without the widespread and innovative achieving Gross National Happiness. The use of ICT, the concept of GNH may not MoIC envisions “Information and Com- be fully realized and the UN Millennium munications for All Dzongkhags (dis- Development Goals may prove impos- tricts) and Geogs (blocks) by 2007”, sible to attain. through: • Building secure, reliable, sustainable and affordable ICT networks; The valuable assistance of international • Ensuring the adequate development organizations like the ITU through the of human capacity; and last two decades has gone a long way in transforming the Bhutanese communi- • Facilitating development of appro- cations landscape. The ITU assisted priate, user-friendly, accessible and Bhutan build its first digital national tele- affordable applications and local communications network during 1991– content. 1998. ITU also provided the expertise Strategies to meet these ICT vision necessary for implementing the rural include: access VoIP pilot project in 2002. It • Reinforcing political commitment and continues to facilitate human capacity seeking highest national priority; building and mobilization of financial resources for implementation of ICT pro- • Formulating a supportive and pre- jects in the country. The ITU Regional dictable policy, legal and regulatory Office in Bangkok has been and is no framework; less instrumental: a computerization of • Providing universal, ubiquitous, and schools project has been successfully affordable info-communication ser- implemented; a capacity building for new vices; technologies and management initiative • Conducting vigorous public aware- is in the works, and three ICT-related ness campaigns; project documents have been acknowl- edged for fund mobilization and imple- • Facilitating equitable access to infor- mentation coordination. The APT comple- mation, knowledge and ideas; ments the ITU initiatives through focus- • Fostering partnership among all ing on coordination of ICT activities, de- stakeholders; veloping human resources, and facili- • Coordinating ICT usage across all the tating expertise requirements, for and in other sectors of the economy; the Asia-Pacific region.

Mr Karma Jurme Mr K. Kezang General Manager Deputy Executive Engineer Bhutan Telecom Telecom Regulatory Authority Drophen Lam 2/28 Ministry of Communications P.B. 134 P.O. Box 1072 BT-THIMPHU BT-THIMPHU Bhutan Bhutan Tel.: +975 2 32 2678 Tel.: +975 2 321 506 Fax: +975 2 32 4312 Fax: +975 2 326 909 E-mail: [email protected] E-mail: [email protected]

Bhutan - 5 25

Bosnia and

Herzegovina

Integrating Consumers into the Regulatory Processes

1 Introduction to through two regional offices in Banja Luka and Mostar. Communications Regulatory Agency of The Agency has a governing body – the CRA Council. This is comprised of BiH 7 distinguished and expert international and national members. The Council The Communications Regulatory Agency guides the Agency on strategic issues of (CRA) is an independent State institution policy implementation. It consults with, regulating telecommunications and broad- and receives reports from the Agency and casting throughout Bosnia and adopts codes of practice, rules for Herzegovina. Established on 2 March broadcasting and telecommunications and 2001 by a Decision of the High Repre- internal rules. The Council also acts as an sentative, it combines the competencies appellate body for Decisions made by of the Independent Media Commission either the Agency or Enforcement Panel (IMC) and the Telecommunications (EP). Regulatory Agency (TRA), which were separately regulating their respective The EP has 6 members and, like the sectors. The obligations and respon- Council, comprises both national and sibilities of the CRA are clearly laid out in international members. It adjudicates the BiH Law on Communications, which violations of licensing conditions and became effective on October 2002. other rules of the Agency and imposes appropriate remedies and sanctions. The Telecommunications Sector Policy Document provides the roadmap for the 2 Inclusion of country’s future telecom policy and was adopted by the Council of Ministers in consumers into a March 2002. The CRA implements this Public Rule Making policy. Process

The Agency is responsible for regulating Following the practice of other European the three principle fields of convergent regulatory authorities, Communications communications: telecommunications, Regulatory Agency (CRA) announces on broadcasting and the radio frequency August 16, 2002 the introduction of a spectrum. There are three respective Public Rule Making Process. operational divisions for each sector. Supporting these Divisions, there is From time to time the CRA, either on its a Communications Division, comprising of own volition or directed by policy makers, Public Affairs and Research Departments. issues Rules, Guidelines, Licences and Legal, Administration and Finance Depart- other formal notifications which have a ments complete the composition of the direct impact on the operations of its executive arm of the Sarajevo-based licensees in both telecommunications and Agency. A regional presence is reinforced broadcasting sectors in BiH This is also in

Bosnia and Herzegovina - 1 27

accordance with Article 37 of the CRA continues to consider input from the aforementioned Law on Communications: public, public organisations as well as the “Duties of the Agency”, which stipulates regulated industries a crucial part of the that: Pursuant to the provisions of this CRA rulemaking process. Law the duties of the Agency shall be: a) To promulgate rules on broadcasting and telecommunications, and ensure 3 Since 2000, CRA adherence thereto; creating media The CRA Public Rule Making Procedure landscape through envisages four stages: public compliant – Firstly, a proposal is sent to the processes relevant parties such as: CRA Council, Representatives of Policy maker at On April 04, 2003 CRA reminded citizens State level, Broadcasters and/or of BiH how to make complaint about radio Telecom Operators and others as and TV programmes (leaflet: “How to appropriate, depending on the busi- make a complaint” can be found on the ness sector. Twenty (20) working CRA web-site www.cra.ba). days is allowed for comments. The CRA strongly believes that the At this stage, a proposal is published on general public can do much more to help the CRA web-site, a press release is shape and improve the quality of Radio issued notifying the public of this fact, and TV programmes, and do so by forging and all interested parties can also obtain a dialogue between themselves and it by contacting the CRA Public Affairs broadcast media. It is the right of every Dept. individual or organization to raise a voice – At the next stage, a draft is offered to regarding content and quality not only of the public for comments. Thirty (30) political broadcasts, but also of educa- working days is allowed for com- tional, cultural, religious and entertain- ments, plus five (5) working days for ment programmes. When this procedure internal review. was introduced in 2000, most of the cases at the time were commenced by the At this stage, the CRA usually also regulator. However, today vast majority organises the Regional Advisory Panels of cases have been initiated by the public. (RAP), which are taking place in at least four different cities throughout the All citizens wishing to lodge a complaint country, where it invites all interested should first contact the relevant broad- parties and the public to offer their caster, and then formalize the complaint comments to offered proposals. Together by writing a letter. If they are unhappy with the invitations to the meetings, the with the response, they can complain CRA also sends copies of offered directly to CRA. It is important to remem- proposals. RAP meetings have proven to ber to write down the name of the be an excellent source of direct commu- television or radio station and the nication with all parties. Comments programme in question; the date and the received during these meetings are time of the broadcast; the exact nature of recorded, transcripted and in full the complaint, comment or enquiry; or in presented to the CRA Council. the case of an advertisement, the name of the product advertised. – Taking into consideration all comments, a Second draft is produced and sent to those that have previ- Complaints must reach the CRA within ously commented. Fifteen (15) work- 14 days of the broadcast. If the complaint ing days is allowed for comments, arrives later, CRA and the respective plus five (5) working days for internal station may not be able to respond fully. review. Upon receipt of the complaint, CRA will investigate the case and undertake appro- – Lastly, a final draft is produced which priate action if concluded that there was a is offered to CRA Council for adoption. breach of Broadcasting Code of Practice.

28 Bosnia and Herzegovina - 2

In the first two years of operations, many addressing grievances used to a great cases of alleged breaches of the Rules extend by the citizens. The future will, and Regulations by the broadcasters have hopefully, see even fewer situations that been opened either on ex officio bases or would require ex officio opening of cases by complaints from related institutions. of alleged breaches of the Rules (for However, this has tremendously changed detailed statistical data, please refer to in the last two years of the CRA opera- the CRA Reports: “Case Analysis 1999- tions, where it is noted that the complaint 2001”, and “Case Analysis 2002”, which driven procedure for opening cases is can be obtained at the CRA web-site). widely recognized and this avenue of

Mr Fikret Kasumagic Mr Sinisa Petrović Director of Telecommunications Sector Manager of Information Infrastructure Communications Regulatory Agency Communications Regulatory Agency (CRA) (CRA) Vilsonovo Setaliste, 10 Vilsonovo Setaliste, 10 BA-71000 SARAJEVO BA-71000 Sarajevo Bosnia and Herzegovina Bosnia and Herzegovina

Tel.: +387 33 250 600 Tel.: +387 33 250 600 Fax: +387 33 713 080 Fax: +387 33 713 080 E-mail: [email protected] E-mail: [email protected]

Bosnia and Herzegovina - 3 29

Burkina Faso

Rapport national du Burkina Faso sur le développement des télécommunications

A Integration du consommateur dans le processus de régulation

1 Cas du Burkina Faso Les principales étapes de la reforme sont: – l'adoption d'une vision nationale à travers un document de politique sec- 1.1 La réforme du secteur des torielle, qui fige les objectifs poursui- télécommunications au vis et les stratégies pour y parvenir; Burkina Faso – la mise en place d'un cadre légal et réglementaire; – la mise en place d'un organe de Depuis 1991, le Burkina Faso s'est en- Régulation; gagé dans un processus de libéralisation progressive de l'économie, qui se traduit – la libéralisation du secteur; par un désengagement de l'Etat d'un – enfin, la privatisation de l'opérateur certain nombre de secteurs économiques historique. pouvant être promus par le secteur privé. La réforme des télécommunications enta- a) La vision nationale mée depuis 1998, s'inscrit dans cette dynamique des réformes économiques. La Elle a été adoptée par le Gouvernement participation du secteur privé dans les en juillet 1999, à travers la déclaration de activités des entreprises publiques sup- politique sectorielle. Ce document a fixé pose une révision du cadre légal et régle- une dizaine d'objectifs et trois stratégies mentaire. Cette participation nécessite pour y parvenir à savoir: surtout le développement de la capacité – la mise en place de l'organe de régu- de l'Autorité publique à réguler les opé- lation; rateurs du secteur, afin que les objectifs – la libéralisation de certains segments sociaux essentiels qu'elle s'est fixés soient du marché; atteints. – l'ouverture du capital de l'opérateur

national. Le processus de réforme du secteur de télécommunications a débuté par l'adoption b) La mise en place d'un cadre de la loi No 051/98/AN du 04 décembre légal et réglementaire 1998 portant réforme du secteur des L'adoption de la loi No 051/98/AN du 04 télécommunications au Burkina Faso. décembre 1998 constitue le cadre légal,

Burkina Faso - 1 31

dans lequel les télécommunications doi- e) La privatisation de l'opérateur vent évoluer. historique

La mise en place du cadre réglementaire Ce processus qui est en cours, a traversé est survenue dans la période d'août 1999 les étapes suivantes: à mars 2000. Le cadre réglementaire – le choix d'un auditeur international pour adopté par le Gouvernement est composé l'audit des comptes de l'ONATEL; des textes suivants: – le choix de la Banque d'affaires. – le décret portant modalités d'établis- D'ici fin 2003, un partenaire stratégique sement et de contrôle des tarifs; sera retenu.

– le décret portant conditions générales d'interconnexion des réseaux et services; 1.2 Besoins et attentes du consommateur en TIC – le décret portant modalités de mise au Burkina Faso et les en place d'un accès au service universel des télécommunications; principaux problèmes

– le décret portant approbation du Plan a) Les besoins et attentes que les national d'attribution des fréquences télécommunications peuvent radioélectriques; contribuer à satisfaire

– le décret portant institutions de droits Le Gouvernement a pris la résolution et redevances au profit de l'ARTEL; d'insérer le Burkina Faso dans la société mondiale de l'information, en élaborant – l'Arrêté conjoint du Ministre de la un plan de développement de l'infrastruc- Communication et du Ministre des ture et de la communication dont les Finances fixant les tarifs d'usage des objectifs stratégiques sont les suivants: fréquences radioélectriques; etc. – le désenclavement global du pays; – la bonne gouvernance; c) La mise en place de l'organe de régulation – le développement durable des ressources humaines L'Autorité Nationale de Régulation créée Les actions prioritaires identifiées pour par la loi No 051/98/AN a vu ses statuts atteindre ces objectifs sont: adoptés par le décret 99-419/PRES/ PM/MC du 15 novembre 1999. Mais elle – le développement de l'infrastructure n'a pris corps qu'à partir de mars 2000, de base; après la nomination de son Directeur – la modernisation de l'administration; Général et la mise en place de son Conseil – l'appui à l'éducation et la recherche; d'Administration en juillet 2000. L'autorité a réellement commencé ses activités que – le développement des centres d'infor- pour compter du mois de septembre mations communautaires; 2000, après son premier Conseil d'Admi- – la facilitation du commerce. nistration. Pour les quatre derniers points, cela né- cessitera la mise en place d'intranets d) La libéralisation du secteur sécurisés ouverts sur l'Internet.

Parallèlement à l'élaboration du cadre ré- b) Les principaux problèmes glementaire, le Gouvernement a procédé auxquels le Burkina Faso est au recrutement d'un deuxième consultant confronté pour l'élaboration d'un dossier d'appel d'offres pour l'attribution de deux autor- – le financement du service universel; isations d'établissement et d'exploitation – le financement du plan de formation de réseaux mobiles cellulaires de type de l'organe de régulation, de l'opéra- GSM. A ce jour, 3 opérateurs exploitent le teur et du département des politiques mobile et quant au réseau fixe, il sera et de la réglementation du Ministère ouvert à la concurrence en 2006. chargé des télécommunications;

32 Burkina Faso - 2

– le contrôle des performances des opé- secteur, afin que les objectifs sociaux rateurs et de leurs cahiers des essentiels fixés soient atteints. charges; Avec le retrait progressif du monopôle – la formation du personnel chargé de d'Etat, la libéralisation entraîne des pro- la gestion et du contrôle des fré- blèmes de régulation complexes et multi- quences; formes. Pour assurer une concurrence – l'équipement des services de la ges- loyale entre les différents intervenants, tion et du contrôle du spectre. les gouvernements se doivent de décider la séparation des fonctions d'exploitation 1.3 Perspectives de celle de régulation, en optant pour la mise en place d'un organe de régulation • Dans le but de clarifier les missions doté d'une personnalité juridique propre assignées à l'ARTEL et au CSI en ma- et d'une autonomie financière. tière de gestion des fréquences des médias, il est proposé la révision de la Pour assumer l'efficacité de cet organe, loi 51/AN du 4 décembre 1998 sur la les outils indispensables sont: reforme du secteur des télécommu- – la mise en place d'un cadre régle- nications. mentaire efficace et transparent; • Pour plus d'autonomie, un projet de transformation du statut de l'ARTEL – le financement de l'organe. qui est un établissement public à ca- ractère administratif en une société d'état est en cours. a) Le cadre légal et réglementaire

2 Les outils pour la mise Afin d'assurer une gestion saine et sur pied des instances efficace du secteur, l'organe de régulation devrait pouvoir s'appuyer sur un texte de de réglementation loi, et l'ensemble des textes d'application efficaces qui créent l'environnement propice à une concurrence loyale. Les principaux La problématique de la restructuration du éléments du cadre réglementaire sont secteur des télécommunications est deve- dans le cas du Burkina Faso: nue une question stratégique à l'heure de la mondialisation de l'économie. Comme – le décret sur les tarifs, tous les autres secteurs de l'économie, le – le décret sur l'interconnexion du ré- secteur des télécommunications est seaux et services, frappé de plein fouet par le vent du libé- ralisme qui souffle sur le monde entier. – le décret sur le service universel,

La libéralisation est synonyme d'ouverture – le décret sur le plan national d'attri- à la concurrence. Elle est une option de bution des fréquences, stratégie macro-économique et de déve- – le décret adoptant les statuts de l'or- loppement. Elle correspond pour le télé- gane de régulation, communications, à la suppression progressive de l'exclusivité de la fourniture – le décret instituant les droits et rede- des services de télécommunications par vances au profit de l'organe de régu- un seul opérateur. Elle induit donc l'idée lation. de concurrence entre plusieurs opéra- teurs, qui sont tous du privé ou à partici- 1) Le décret sur les tarifs pation minoritaire de l'Etat. L'adoption d'un tel décret est indispen- La participation du secteur privé dans les sable en l'absence d'un scénario de concur- activités des entreprises publiques, suite rence pure et parfaite où les tarifs sont au processus de privatisation, suppose établis par la loi de l'offre et de la de- une révision du cadre réglementaire. mande. En l'absence d'une concurrence, il Cette participation nécessite le dévelop- est nécessaire d'adopter un régime tari- pement de la capacité de l'autorité publi- faire dans lequel les opérateurs proposent que à réguler les opérateurs dans le des tarifs qui sont soumis au contrôle de

Burkina Faso - 3 33

l'organe de régulation. Ce régime est utile universel. L'organe de régulation doit dans le cas où l'opérateur principal dis- jouer un rôle primordial au niveau de ce pose d'un monopole ou d'une exclusivité texte. sur certains réseaux ou services.

4) La gestion des fréquences 2) Le décret sur l'interconnexion Cette ressource naturelle limitée doit être C'est l'une des questions les plus ardues gérée dans un cadre bien établi et trans- auxquelles les régulateurs sont confron- parent pour tous les acteurs du secteur tés. (l'Etat, le régulateur et les opérateurs).

Un tel décret doit déterminer les conditions générales d'interconnexion des ré- b) Le décret instituant les droits seaux et services. En plus des modalités et redevances au profit de techniques, ce décret doit traiter de l'offre l'organe de régulation d'interconnexion, des conventions qui seront L'indépendance financière de l'organe de signées entre les opérateurs, des tarifs régulation est l'un des outils pouvant as- d'interconnexion, du traitement des litiges surer son indépendance vis à vis des opé- par le régulateur et les opérateurs, des rateurs. Cette indépendance financière sanctions administratives et des compen- est de nature à lui assurer un personnel sations. de haut niveau pour assurer une gestion

saine et transparente du secteur. 3) Le décret sur le service universel En conclusion, la gestion du secteur par le Avec le retrait progressif de l'Etat du régulateur nécessite au préalable l'élabo- secteur, l'on prend le risque d'assister à ration d'un cadre réglementaire efficace, un abandon des zones rurales et isolés souple, complet et transparent. par les opérateurs, au profit des zones ur Le financement de l'organe de régulation baines plus rentables. D'où la nécessité doit être assumé par d'autres sources que de l'adoption d'un texte qui établit un les subsides de l'Etat, afin de lui garantir mécanisme de financement du service une indépendance réelle.

B Technologie de l'information et de la communication pour le développement:

Accès à Internet public L'offre Internet de l'ONATEL se présente comme suit: 1 La situation de Des accès RTC sont disponibles à Ouaga- l'Internet au dougou et à Bobo Dioulasso. Le serveur Burkina Faso de Bobo est relié à celui de Ouagadougou par une liaison spécialisée de 2 Mb/s. Les autres localités se connectent en passant L'ONATEL (Office National des Télécom- par Ouagadougou ou Bobo Dioulasso. munications, opérateur historique) a mis en place en début 1997 un service d'accès à l'Internet dénommé Fasonet. Le point Des connexions permanentes TCP/IP de d'accès initialement à 64 Kbps, est passé LAN distants sont possibles pour des à 256 Kbps puis à 1 Mb/s et est à 2 Mbps débits allant de 32 Kbps à 128 Kbps. Les depuis février 2001. La liaison d'accès réseaux distants installés au profit des international est établie avec Téléglobe fournisseurs de services et d'accès privés, (opérateur canadien). La Configuration de certains organismes et des structures mise en place offre une solution évolutive de l'Etat, sont directement connectés au pouvant s'adapter à la croissance du nœud national de l'ONATEL par des marché. liaisons LS.

34 Burkina Faso - 4

L'accès RTC à l'Internet est théorique- un numéro spécial. La situation quantita- ment possible à partir de n'importe quelle tive et évolutive de Fasonet se présente ligne téléphonique du Burkina à un coût comme suit: de communication locale en composant

Année 1997 1998 1999 2000 Juin 2001

Abonnés 1 250 1 500 2 300 3 200 3 320

Sites WEB 3 – – 30 50

ISP 1 2 3 5 6

LS 2 5 9 15 17

Le nombre de cybercentres, installés dans – redevance mensuelle: 6 136 frs CFA les principales villes du pays, est non – minute de connexion: 18 frs CFA fourni. La situation quantitative des abon- nés des autres Fournisseurs de Services et d'Accès Internet est non fournie. • formule forfait mensuel pour 10 heures Ce sont: CENATRIN, LIPTINFOR, DELGI, de connexion:

NETACCESS, ZCP, etc. – création: 10 030 frs CFA

Néanmoins le nombre total de personnes – redevance: 10 030 frs CFA ayant un compte d'accès à l'Internet peut être estimé à 7000. – minute de connexion supplémen- taire: 12 frs CFA 1.1 Les tarifs • formule de connexion sans limite de 1.1.1 Abonnements RTC avec une temps: boîte e-mail: – création: 17 700 frs CFA • formule à la durée: – redevance: 17 700 frs CFA – création: 10 030 frs CFA

Table 1 – Tarifs TTC des LS pour les Fournisseurs de Services Internet privés (avril 2001)

LS locale LS nationale (interurbaine)

Débit liaison Frais de Redevances Frais de Redevances raccordement mensuelles raccordement mensuelles

32 Kb/s 200 000 FCFA 150 000 FCFA 300 000 FCFA 150 000 FCFA

48 Kb/s 200 000 FCFA 200 000 FCFA 300 000 FCFA 200 000 FCFA

56 Kb/s 200 000 FCFA 300 000 FCFA 300 000 FCFA 300 000 FCFA

64 Kb/s 200 000 FCFA 350 000 FCFA 300 000 FCFA 350 000 FCFA

112 Kb/s 200 000 FCFA 500 000 FCFA 300 000 FCFA 500 000 FCFA

128 Kb/s 200 000 FCFA 600 000 FCFA 300 000 FCFA 600 000 FCFA

256 Kb/s 600 000 FCFA 1 500 000 FCFA 700 000 FCFA 1 500 000 FCFA

512 Kb/s 600 000 FCFA 2 000 000 FCFA 700 000 FCFA 2 000 000 FCFA

1024 Kb/s 600 000 FCFA 2 500 000 FCFA 700 000 FCFA 2 500 000 FCFA

2048 Kb/s 600 000 FCFA 3 000 000 FCFA 700 000 FCFA 3 000 000 FCFA

Burkina Faso - 5 35

1.2 Projets dans le secteur de Presse l'Internet www.tnb.bf Création d'une cité virtuelle des sciences (Site de la Télévision Nationale du et techniques avec comme promoteurs Burkina) l'Université de Ouagadougou et le CONAGES. L'ONATEL envisage l'installation de cyber- www.sidwaya.bf centres publics dans ses bureaux et agen- (Site des Editions SIDWAYA) ces commerciales. Projet IIA (Initiative www.zedcom.bf Internet pour l'Afrique) qui vise à ren- (Site l'agence de communication Zénith forcer la capacité des équipements et à Edition Communication) décentraliser les points d'accès à Internet. Au Burkina ce projet a permis d'installer www.aib.bf le centre d‘accès régional de Bobo (Site de l'agence d'information du Dioulasso, un centre de formation sur les Burkina) nouvelles technologies à Ouagadougou et l'extension de la liaison internationale. La www.fasonet.bf/hebdo suite du projet permettra d'installer (Site de l'hebdomadaire du Burkina) 4 autres centres régionaux d'accès dans les provinces. Entreprises et Associations

1.3 Sites WEB classés par www.fasonet.bf/pr-prao catégories (Site du projet de la Société des Fibres et Textiles (SOFITEX) Administration www.onatel.bf www.primature.gov.bf (Site de l'ONATEL) (Site officiel du Gouvernement) www.fasonet.bf www.finances.gov.bf (Site clientèle Internet de l'ONATEL) (Site du Ministère de l'économie et des finances) www.cenatrin.bf www.mairie-ouaga.bf (Site de l'ISP CENATRIN) (Site de la Mairie de Ouagadougou) www.cenatrin.bf/sogetel www.delgi.gov.bf (Site de la socité d'électricité (Site de la Délégation générale à l'in- SOGETEL) formatique) www.legiburkina.bf www.sonatur.bf (Site sur la législation du BURKINA (Site de la Société Nationale d'Amé- FASO) nagement des Terrains Urbains)

www.ambf.bf www.liptinfor.bf (Site de l'association des maires du (Site de l'ISP LIPTINFOR) Burkina) www.zcp.bf Education et Recherche (Site de l'ISP ZCP) www.univ-ouaga.bf (Site de l'Université de Ouagadougou) www.aceca.bf (Site du Cabinet d'Expertise Compta- www.ird.bf ble ACECA) (Site de l'IRD ex ORSTOM) www.k-lala.bf Art et Culture (Site de la société K-LALA) www.fespaco.bf www.fasonet.bf/apa (Site du Festival Panafricain de Ciné- (Site de l'Association Pénitentiaire ma de Ouagadougou (FESPACO) Africaine) www.siao.bf (Site du Salon International de l'Arti- www.fasonet.bf/riod-ao sanat de Ouagadougou (SIAO)) (Site du réseau des ONG)

36 Burkina Faso - 6

Economie et Commerce www.adf-rda.com www.tradepoint.bf (Site du parti politique ADF-RDA) (Site du Trade Point du BURKINA FASO) 2 Problématique du www.ccia.bf (Site de la Chambre de Commerce, de développement de l'Industrie et de l'Artisanat du Burkina l'Internet en Afrique Faso (CCIA)) Pour caractériser le développement de www.cenatrin.bf/ezdf l'Internet en Afrique, on peut prendre (Site de l'Etablissement d'Import- comme indicateurs les rapports: Export Zoungrana Denis et Frères) – nombre d'internautes / population totale www.cenatrin.bf/cofama – coût mensuel de l'accès / PIB par (Site de la Compagnie Maritime du habitant, ou coût mensuel de l'accès / Faso (COFAMA)) revenu mensuel par habitant.

Organismes et Institutions www.francophonie.gov.bf En considérant qu'il y a en Afrique environ (Site de la Francophonie) trois internautes derrière chaque abonné (hypothèse de l'UIT), le Burkina Faso www.ceni.bf compterait: (Site de la Commission Electorale Na- tionale Indépendante du Burkina Faso – 20 000 internautes pour une popu- (CENI)) lation totale de 12 millions d'habitants, contre Autres – 137 millions d'internautes pour 303 millions www.crs.bf d'habitants en Amérique du Nord (en 1999) (Site du CATHWELL) – 83 millions d'internautes pour 728 millions www.france-burkina.bf d'habitants en Europe (en 1999) et (Site de l'Ambassade de France au – 2,5 millions (dont la moitié en Afrique du Burkina Faso) Sud) d'internautes pour 771 millions d'habi- www.cdp.bf tants en Afrique (1999). (Site du parti politique le Congrès Quant aux coûts d'accès, les chiffres pour la Démocratie et le Progrès) suivants ont été relevés en 1999:

Zone Charges mensuelles/abonné Pourcentage du PIB/habitant (USD) (USD) USA 29 1,2% Afrique 60 – Burkina Faso 40 16%

Les comparaisons ci-dessus montrent une qui est maintenant unanimement reconnu insuffisance effective de la pénétration de comme étant un outil de développement l'Internet en Afrique, due en partie à des d'usage populaire? coûts d'accès élevés, comparativement au reste du monde. 2.1 Les facteurs de coûts Quelles solutions peut-on alors mettre en place pour réduire les coûts d'accès et Les facteurs qui grèvent les coûts d'accès permettre à une franche importante de la à l'Internet en Afrique ont été identifiés à population africaine d'accéder à l'Internet plusieurs reprises et sont maintenant bien

Burkina Faso - 7 37

connus. Ces facteurs sont la cause de l'éducation des populations analphabètes coûts d'investissement relativement éle- n'ayant pas accès aux structures classi- vés par rapport aux moyens financiers ques d'éducation. dont disposent les ISP pour déployer leurs solutions d'accès. Ce sont: ••• Les coûts de branchement au réseau international ••• L'insuffisance de l'infrastructure de base Les ISP africains supportent entièrement les coûts d'établissement des liaisons in- L'Internet a pris son envol au milieu des ternationales avec les pays développés et années 90, au moment où les pays déve- les répercutent sur les tarifs proposés aux loppés avaient fini de déployer leurs abonnés. réseaux de télécommunications depuis longtemps déjà et disposaient d'infras- Cette situation d'injustice qui vise à faire tructures nationales de base solides sur supporter aux seuls internautes des pays lesquelles ils ont pu construire l'Internet. en voie de développement les coûts des liaisons internationales alors que toutes Ceci n'a pas été le cas en Afrique, et ne les parties connectées bénéficient de la l'est toujours pas. Il y a encore d'énormes liaison une fois qu'elle est établie, devrait investissements à faire en Afrique pour trouver une solution dans le cadre de soutenir le développement de l'infras- l'APEC. tructure de base du réseau de télécom- munications (liaisons interurbaines en ••• fibre optique, réseaux d'accès, RNIS, Les coûts de l'équipement ATM, SDH, ADSL …). Les fournisseurs de informatique services et d'accès Internet africains ne Malgré une baisse sensible des taxes disposent pas des facilités de leurs homo- d'importation, les coûts d'acquisition des logues européens ou américains et équipements informatiques nécessaires à doivent supporter les coûts d'extension et la mise en œuvre d'une solution d'accès à de fiabilisation de l'infrastructure de base. l'Internet restent élevés. Par ailleurs, la faible densité téléphonique en Afrique concourt à faire du téléphone 2.2 Le financement de un outil encore difficilement accessible et cette situation contribue à augmenter les l'Internet pour le coûts des accès RTC proposés à développement l'utilisateur final. Les facteurs de coûts ci-dessus évoqués montrent clairement que le problème de ••• L'apparente étroitesse du la réduction des coûts d'accès à l'Internet marché africain de l'Internet en Afrique pose celui du coût des investis- Les taux élevés d'analphabétisme et sements, et donc la problématique du fi- d'ignorance en informatique de la popul- nancement du développement de l'Inter- ation restreint le marché de l'Internet et net en Afrique. des Nouvelles Technologies de l'Infor- mation et de la Communication (NTIC) en 2.2.1 Le scénario du statu quo Afrique. La clientèle potentielle se compte souvent en milliers seulement, dans les Il convient de remarquer que la question meilleurs des cas en quelques centaines de savoir qui devrait payer la facture peut de milliers (Afrique du Sud, Egypte). paraître surprenante de prime abord. Cette clientèle restreinte doit à elle seule garantir et supporter le retour sur inves- En effet pourquoi faudrait-il une approche tissement des ISP qui n'ont d'autre choix particulière du financement de l'Internet que de se concentrer sur les capitales et en Afrique alors que de nombreux autres les principales villes du pays, délaissant besoins élémentaires des populations afri- les zones rurales. caines ne sont pas satisfaits? Des secteurs aussi vitaux que l'eau, l'énergie, Mais cet argument perd de son poids dès l'agriculture, les transports, la santé, lors que l'on considère l'Internet comme l'éducation et le téléphone lui-même, sont un instrument qui peut être utilisé pour encore à un stade de développement peu

38 Burkina Faso - 8

avancé, et d'énormes ressources finan- a) Application des politiques et cières sont encore nécessaires pour pro- stratégies nationales des NTIC mouvoir ces besoins de base qui paraissent prioritaires à l'Internet. La plupart des pays africains ont défini des politiques et des stratégies nationales de développement des NTIC qui contien- Dans cette vision, l'Internet serait alors nent déjà des solutions permettant de considéré dans le meilleur des cas comme réduire les coûts d'accès à ces NTIC et de un service ordinaire, et dans le pire des vulgariser leur utilisation. On peut noter: cas comme un service de luxe réservé à quelques privilégiés initiés à l'informa- • tique; dans tous les cas l'Internet devra La création de fonds nationaux pour le se développer suivant un schéma clas- développement des NTIC sique, en suivant sa courbe de vie natu- Ces fonds peuvent être alimentés de relle toute tracée par la loi de l'offre et de diverses manières: la demande. – taxes, – prélèvements, Sur cette base, le développement de – aides. l'Internet en Afrique dépendra fortement du niveau de développement des popu- La gestion de ces fonds peut se faire lations qui devront payer de leurs poches à l'image des fonds prévus pour le les coûts d'accès. Dans ce cas de figure, service universel. Il s'agit là d'assi- la promotion de l'Internet est d'abord miler l'Internet et les NTIC à un assurée par les ISP, qui vont investir dans service universel. le développement du réseau et répercuter ces investissements sur les coûts d'accès La création de fonds de soutien au dé- à payer par les utilisateurs. C'est le scé- veloppement de l'Internet constitue nario du statu quo. l'une des meilleures solutions au pro- blème de la réduction des coûts pour l'usager. La question de savoir qui devrait payer la facture ne se pose plus: c'est l'utilisateur • final. La conséquence immédiate de cette La subvention par l'Etat approche est que l'Internet se dévelop- Cette approche, qui a fait ses preuves pera au rythme du développement de dans certains pays développés, est l'Afrique, c'est-à-dire lentement. aussi envisageable en Afrique. L'Etat, à l'aide des fonds créés pour le déve- loppement de l'Internet et d'autres ressources, accorde des subventions aux opérateurs et aux ISP pour mener 2.2.2 L'Internet comme un outil de des projets visant à étendre l'accès de développement à la base l'Internet à une population géné- ralisée. L'autre approche, qui semble recueillir aujourd'hui la meilleure opinion, est de • La promotion des NTIC par l'Etat considérer l'Internet comme un outil de développement à la base, un support au L'Etat, pour sponsoriser le dévelop- développement des autres secteurs vitaux pement des NTIC et de l'Internet, tels que l'éducation, la santé, l'agri- accorde un certain nombre de facilités culture, etc. C'est dans ce cas de figure visant à réduire les coûts pour les qu'il faut rechercher des solutions per- utilisateurs et les ISP: suppression ou mettant à un large éventail de la popu- réduction des taxes douanières et lation (particuliers, ONG, services publi- taxes à valeur ajoutée sur le matériel ques, entreprises privées, associations, et les services Internet, baisse de communes, structures villageoises …) de l'impôt, réalisation de programmes bénéficier de coûts d'accès réduits à spéciaux d'accès gratuit à l'Internet l'Internet. pour le public ou des groupes cibles, etc.

Burkina Faso - 9 39

b) Donner la préférence aux accès d) Le développement d'un communautaires contenu attrayant et payant A l'image de ce qui a été fait pour le télé- Si la publicité sur le Net semble apporter phone, la mise en place de télécentres peu de ressources, le développement d'un communautaires d'accès à l'Internet (cy- contenu riche, attrayant et payant peut bercafés, cybercentres) contribuera sûre- constituer une alternative. De nom- ment à ramener le coût d'accès à l'Inter- breuses informations présentant un vif net à la hauteur du portefeuille du client à intérêt pour les africains eux-mêmes et revenu modeste. pour le reste du monde (statistiques, indicateurs de développement, informations d'ordre général, tourisme) restent encore c) Le financement par la publicité à porter sur web. et l'accès prépayé A l'image de ce qui se fait dans les pays développés, la publicité sur le Net peut- 3 Conclusion elle constituer une alternative pour le financement du développement de l'Inter- Si les obstacles liés aux coûts des accès à net en Afrique? Cette approche semble l'Internet en Afrique sont connus, il est en peu probable au regard de la faiblesse de revanche plus difficile de mettre en place l'activité économique sur le continent. Les des solutions. L'interdépendance des pro- ressources de la publicité sur le Net ne blèmes en Afrique ne permet pas de seront qu'une contribution légère. trouver le coup de frein nécessaire pour s'éjecter du cercle vicieux de la pauvreté. L'Etat africain, au moment où il est appelé Le système, si populaire, du mobile pré- de plus en plus à se désengager de nom- payé peut-il être appliqué à l'Internet? breux secteurs économiques dans un Certainement. Mais sa popularité ne sera contexte de mondialisation et de libéra- pas forcément garantie car le principe du lisation tout azimut, est curieusement prépaiement ne fera baisser ni les coûts rappelé ici pour soutenir le développe- d'accès ni les coûts des équipements. ment de l'Internet.

M. Emile Bonkoungou M. Dieudonné Wema Conseiller Technique du Ministre Chef des Relations Internationales des P&T ONATEL Ministère des P&T Avenue de la Nation B.P. 5175 B.P. 10 000 BF-OUAGADOUGOU, 01 BF-OUAGADOUGOU, 01 Burkina Faso Burkina Faso Tél.: +226 33 73 85 Tél.: +226 31 88 02 Fax: +226 33 73 87 Fax: +226 33 37 09 E-mail: [email protected] E-mail: [email protected]

40 Burkina Faso - 10

Burundi

Les TIC pour le développement: Internet pour tous

Dans sa politique sectorielle des télécom- Le contenu du site, composé et enrichi munications pour la période 2002-2004, sur base de données fournies par les le Gouvernement du Burundi s'est fixé entités et services concernés, sera géré entre autres objectifs de «favoriser le par une équipe ad hoc. développement de la transmission de données, de l'Internet et des services Contrairement aux cyber-cafés dont l'af- associés». fluence est composée essentiellement de jeunes gens, le site du Gouvernement du Dans l'optique d'informer le public Burundi sera consulté par un public diver- national et international, le Gouverne- sifié: fonctionnaires, employés d'entre- ment du Burundi a lancé en février 2003 prises publiques et privées, fonctionnaires son site Web sous la dénomination d'organisations internationales, hommes http://www.burundi.gov.bi d'affaires, ... en quête d'informarions sur Le contenu du site officiel du Gouver- le Burundi. nement du Burundi est présenté dans les sections ci-après: L'utilisation de l'Internet au Burundi est handicapé par plusieurs facteurs: 1. Institutions: – Présidence – le coût prohibitif d'un PC multimédia; – Gouvernement – les coûts élevés d'accès aux services – Parlement des ISP; – Commissions Nationales – les coûts de télécommunications via le – Cours réseau de l'opérateur public.

2. Administrations: Compte tenu du ptojet d'installation d'un – Ministères nœud d'accès Internet et de l'Intranet par l'opérateur public ONATEL, la concurence – Organismes publics pourra jouer en faveur de la réduction des – Annuaires des services administratifs tarifs par les deux opérateurs ISP (CNI, USAN); – Guide de procédure

3. Météo – Températures Conclusion – Précipitations La création du site officiel du Gouver- 4. Institutions financières nement du Burundi constitue un pas en avant dans la sensibilisation du public à – Banque Mondiale l'utilisation de l'Internet dans la vie – Autres quotidienne.

Burundi - 1 41

La pauvreté reste un handicap majeur qui – nécessité de la réforme scolaire face empêche la population de bénéficier des au développement des TIC avantages de l'Internet. – le transfert des technologies TIC: voie Le développement étant un processus plausible à la réduction de la fracture long et continu, il y a lieu d'espérer voir numérique. croître le degré de pénétration de l'Internet à travers le pays. Le site officiel du Gouvernement du Burundi deviendra ainsi une source d'informations pour un M. Sabin Nikoyagize nombre croissant de la population burun- Conseiller en télécommunications daise. Ministère des transports, postes et télécommunications Thèmes d'intérêt général P.O. Box 2000 BI-BUJUMBURA – le partenariat Nord-Sud et le dévelop- Burundi pement des TIC dans les PMA Tel.: +257 22 67 31 – les tarifs d'accès Internet: frein au Fax: +257 22 69 00 téléenseignement E-mail: [email protected]

42 Burundi - 2

Cambodia

Telecommunication Development Country Report for Cambodia

11 –– COUNTRY: COUNTRY: CAMBODIACAMBODIA 22 –– ORGANIZATION: ORGANIZATION: MPTCMPTC 33 –– PARTICIPANT: PARTICIPANT: RIELRIEL BAREYBAREY

Cambodia - 1 43

44 Cambodia - 2

The Kingdom of Cambodia Provinces / Municipality 24 Districts 183 Communes 1,621 Villages 13,406 Areas 181,035 km2 Pop 12,3 million (July 2000)

- : Existing FO Cable - : On going Project - : Planning Project

Kingdom of Cambodia Laos

Oddar Meanchey (Samrong) Preah Vihear Banteay Rattana Kiri Thailand Meanchey (Choam Khsan) (Sisophon) (Banlung) Siem Reap Stung Treng

Krong Battambang Pailin Kampong Thom Mondul Kiri Kratie (Sen Monorom) Pursat

Kampong Kampong Cham Chhnang

Phnom Penh Krong Koh Kong Kandal Kampong Prey Veng The Kingdom of Cambodia (Taumau) Provinces / Municipality 24 Speu Svay Rieng Districts 183 Vietnam Communes 1,621 Takeo Villages 13,406 Kampot Areas 181,035 Km2 Pop 12,3million (July 2000) Kampong Som Krong (Sihanoukville) Kep

Cambodia - 3 45

A – Geographic Feature Name of country: Kingdom of Cambodia Capital: Phnom Penh Provinces: 24 provinces/municipality Territory: 181,035 km² Location: In the southwestern corner of Indochina by Thailand to the west, Laos to the north, Vietnam to the east and Gulf of Thailand to the South Climate: Part of monsoon Asia and tropical zone, with pronounced wet and dry seasons: - dry season from November-April - rain falls mainly in May-October

Population: More than 12 million

Religion: Buddhism (90% of Population), others are Catholic, Protestant, Islamic.

Language: Khmer is the national language, French was used as official language about 1970. Recently, English prevalent. Other languages, Vietnamese, Chinese and Thai are also spoken.

46 Cambodia - 4

B – Ministry of Post and Telecommunication 1. MPTC Staff

There are total of 1960 staffs as of 2002 made up as follows:

- Number of employees classified by the Central 1309 Male 836 Female 473

- Number of employees classified by the Provinces 651 Male 496 Female 155

- Working hour Monday-Friday AM 07:00-11:00 / PM 14:00-17:00

4. Organization Chart of MPTC MINISTER

InspectorInspector BureauBureau CabinetCabinet BureauBureau

SECRETARYSECRETARY OFOF STATESTATE SECRETARYSECRETARY OFOF STATESTATE

UNDERUNDER UNDERUNDER UNDERUNDER UNDERUNDER UNDERUNDER SECRETARYSECRETARY OFOF SECRETARYSECRETARY OFOF SECRETARYSECRETARY OFOF SECRETARYSECRETARY OFOF SECRETARYSECRETARY OFOF STATESTATE STATESTATE STATESTATE STATESTATE STATESTATE

Domestic Frequency International PostalPostal TelecomTelecom PolicyPolicy PlanningPlanning Domestic Frequency International Regulation & Inter. AccountingAccounting && TelecommunicationTelecommunication ManagementManagement TelecommunicationTelecommunication Department Regulation & Inter. Department RelationshipRelationship Dep’t.Dep’t. FinanceFinance DepartmentDepartment DepartmentDepartment DepartmentDepartment DepartmentDepartment

AdministrationAdministration AdministrationAdministration AdministrationAdministration AdministrationAdministration AdministrationAdministration AdministrationAdministration StampStamp PolicyPolicy StatisticStatistic FETEXFETEX ExchangeExchange LicenseLicense NCCNCC ExploitationExploitation RegulationRegulation SystemSystem NetworkNetwork planningplanning E-10E-10 ExchangeExchange FrequencyFrequency ITMCITMC PlanningPlanning && StandardStandard && Inter.Inter. AccountingAccounting NEAX-61NEAX-61 ExchangeExchange ManagementManagement ISMCISMC (( GateGate way)way) Account.Account. Relations.Relations. FinancingFinancing AXE-105AXE-105 ExchangeExchange FrequencyFrequency SESSES CenterCenter Transmi.Transmi. OfOf MailMail InformationInformation CenterCenter BillingBilling TRANSMISSIONTRANSMISSION MeasurementMeasurement PowerPower PlantPlant CounterCounter (( CamnetCamnet ISP)ISP) OSPOSP EngineeringEngineering Inter.Inter. Operator.Operator. ArrivalArrival MaterialMaterial && StoreStore OSPOSP Inter.Inter. RelationsRelations ParcelParcel ConstructionConstruction Installation,Installation, DevelopmentDevelopment EMSEMS Repair& Magazine Repair& TCOMTCOM CenterCenter UPU & Inter. Magazine UPU & Inter. Maintenance.Maintenance. CoastCoast StationStation Relation. Relation. CustomerCustomer ServiceService CustomerCustomer ServiceService DRMASSDRMASS && PHSPHS TelegraphTelegraph && TelexTelex

Cambodia - 5 47

OrganizationOrganization ChartChart ofof TransmissionTransmission CenterCenter

CHIEF OF CENTER

VICE CHIEF OF CENTER

TMN & ADM Optical Fiber Microwave Division Cable Division Division

O & M PDH & SDH O & M F. O Cable O & M Microwave Transmission Equipment Civil work Design Microwave Network routing Marking Post & GPS system Store Design F.O Cable Plant Installation Microwave Installation F.O Cable Equipment

OrganizationOrganization ChartChart ofof OSPOSP CenterCenter

CHIEF OF CENTER

VICE CHIEF VICE CHIEF VICE CHIEF OF CENTER OF CENTER OF CENTER

Admin OSP Network CCC Underground Overhead Development Section Cable Division Cable Division

Team I, II, III Team I, II, III Team I, II, III

CCC: Cross Connection Cabinet

48 Cambodia - 6

5. Present Status Cambodia regulates still telecommunication services through Government monopoly of the ownership of facilities. Regulation is highly centralised and coordinated through the Cabinet for approval of principle recommendation regarding telecommunication policy. The Government has also increased the opportunities for private sector participation in construction and operation of telecommunication facilities in the form of Joint Venture or BCC.

A.A. TelephoneTelephone ServiceService

1. Telephone density The telephone density in Cambodia including mobile telephone is 2.66 per 100 populations: 23.36 in Phnom Penh 0.27 for fixed line 2.39 for mobile telephone All fixed network in the country is handled by own MPTC and the JV “Camintel”. Mobile services provided by operators.

Cambodia - 7 49

2. The nationwide network structure

Gate way 1 Gate way 2 (001) (007)

National National Transit 1 Transit 2

Local Local Switch Switch

RSUs RSUs

3. Transmission hierarchy Transmission network has three types: PDH, SDH Optical fiber cable transmission Satellite communication transmission Digital microwave transmission Recently the SDH transmission network are widely used in Cambodia with CEPT standard type of Transmission hierarchy. 4. ISDN Services Not applicable 5. Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) Services Not yet introduce in Cambodia

50 Cambodia - 8

6. Cellular Services In Cambodia there are four operators, which provide the mobile telephone service. Coverage areas less then 50% of total land area. Along the main national road are mostly covered as service area and the people can receive telecommunication service. 1) CAMTEL (Cambodia Mobile Telephone Co. Ltd)

Established since 1992 which MPTC/CP group Thailand, using the system AMPS and the frequency band of 800 MHz and coverage in Phnom Penh Capital only.

2) CASACOM (Cambodia Samart Comm. Co. Ltd)

MPTC/Samart for provision for Cellular service with NMT system with the frequency band of 900 MHz and also GSM 1800 system.

3) CAMSHIN (Cambodia Shinawatra Comm.Co.Ltd)

MPTC/Shinawatra International Public Company Limited, Thailand. This Operator provided mobile service with GSM system and WLL using the frequency band of 450 MHz.

Cambodia - 9 51

4) CAMGSM (Cambodia GSM or Mobitel)

Since 1997, the Royal Government of Cambodia made the Agreement with Royal Millicom Co, Ltd, composed of local company Royal Groupe and a foreign company Milllicom from Sweden to established a mobile operator using GSM 900 technology. At present there are biggest subscribers.

7. Other telecom. services

a) ISP (Internet service Provider) There are four ISPs in Cambodia: One owned by MPTC ( called CAMNET) and the other by companies such as Bigpond, Camintel and Telesuft. All ISPs possession leased lines for access to international network at 512 kbps and 1Mbps and provides to customers two types of service, E-mail and Internet full service through accesses by dialup leased circuits and wireless broadband. There are already about 10,000 subscribers and 50 Internet cafés opened in Phnom Penh and some major city.

52 Cambodia - 10

512 Kbps Full Duplex 1 Mbps Full Duplex

To Australia To Sigapore

Satellite Earth Station in Cambodia

1 Mbps Full Duplex 512 Kbps Full Duplex

ISPs

b) IT Introduction Activity

The Cambodia Government is installed National Info-Communications Technology Development Authority ( called NiDA) in 1999 under direct control of Prime Minster to promote the development and introduction of IT. At present the fist stage of E-Government infrastructure under implementing in Phnom Penh.

Cambodia - 11 53

B.B. FutureFuture ProgramProgram 1. Executive Project MPTC has completed some of major telecom project in last few years with assistance from donors such as France, Japan and Germany: The Project for improvement of the telecommunication network in Phnom Penh (Phase -I, Phase II) with JICA Japan’s Grant Aid; The DTTC (Digital Transmission Trunk line Cambodia) Project: the first long distance Fiber Optic Cable along NR.5 & NR.1 cross the Country from Thai border to Vietnamese border with length 620 km using SDH system ( STM-1) has completed under Grant Aid from Germany; The Project for improvement of The telecommunication network in Siem Reap Angkor (Installation outside Plant and Switching facilities) under Government’ budged; DTTSS Project ( Digital Transmission Trunk line Sisophon -Siem Reap) : Construction of a STM-1 ( 1+1) Optical fiber Transmission Network connecting the Tourism City to the Capital through existing optical fiber transmission network.

2. On-going Project

There are some major projects on going on in the country:

a) Rehabilitation Projects in OSP is in progress in all parts of the Phnom Penh. This covers the replacement of all types of old cable damaged.

b) E-Government Project: This project under implementation with funding of Korea. The outside plant facilities and equipment is completed, commission and testing going on nowadays. The network will be provided computer network to connect all Ministry and communes in Phnom Penh capital to promote and safeguard foundation of administration.

54 Cambodia - 12

b) E-Government Project

This project under implementation with funding of Korea. The outside plant facilities and equipment is completed, commission and testing going on nowadays. The network will be provided computer network to connect all Ministry and communes in Phnom Penh capital to promote and safeguard foundation of administration.

3. Planned Project

MPTC has setup some major strategic directions which can be summarized as follow:

1) Present STM-1 system of optical fiber cable from Thai border to Vietnamese border will be enhanced to higher level system

2) Construction optical fiber cable from Siem Reap to Phnom Penh put in ring configuration to ensure security and alternative system to increase network flexibility

3) Trunk Transmission system in Central Region which links from Kampong Cham through Phnom Penh to Sihanouk vill is built, and telecommunication network is expanded to major cities in the Region

Cambodia - 13 55

4) Expansion of capacity of existing telephone centers with their outside plant

5) Construction of national backbone network using optical fiber cable or digital microwave system

6) Interconnection of networks with neighboring countries through optical fiber cable

7) Setting up of the ring system in optical fiber network in Phnom Penh to ensure higher services grade

C.C. TelecommunicationTelecommunication problems,problems, difficultiesdifficulties and possible solutions

MPTC is facing the problems as followed:

1) Congestion problems

As a chronic problem which can’t be solved in near future soon. Occur at certain trunks in the network especially during the busy hours due to not enough number of circuits in the route. To increase the circuit we need approval form Ministry of Economy and Finance. Recently, a recursive problem occurs from usage of internet because internet has become very poplar. To access the internet we have to go to the telephone network which caused congestion to the network.

56 Cambodia - 14

2) Standardization problem

Since we no have action center for standardization yet, the cooperation between all parties concerning with standard matters are very rare. All parties implement the way which is best for their own practice. This is prone to the areas of non-standard specification. This situation puts us on a very risky place to rational decide what technologies will be one that is widely accepted in future.

3) Human resources

Not having the required skilled employees for attending the maintenance and development work.

Mr Barey Riel Mr Nareth Sok Deputy Director Manager Engineer Standards Telecom Regulation and International Ministry of Posts and Relations Department Telecommunications Ministry of Posts and Streets 13 and 102 – Wat Phnom Telecommunications KH-PHNOM PENH Streets 13 and 102 – Wat Phnom Khan Cambodia Daun Penih Tel.: +855 23 722 401 KH-PHNOM PENH Fax: +855 23 428 986 Cambodia E-mail: [email protected] Tel.: +855 23 72 54 14 Fax: +855 23 42 89 86 E-mail: [email protected]

Cambodia - 15 57

Cape Verde

Rapport national: Cap Vert

Introduction garantir les fondements de l’efficacité et de la compétitivité globale de notre pays S’il s’agit la d’un enjeu commun à toutes dans cette nouvelle ère, qui permit de les pays, dans la nécessite de renforcer construire «la route unique virtuel» pour la dynamique de développement des facilité les communications entre les îles. TICs, l’insertion dans la société de l’information et du savoir doit passer par Dans cette perspective les Grandes la généralisation de l’usage des TICs et Options du Plan du Gouvernement la banalisation de leurs outils dans le (2002-2005) soulignent l’importance du regard public, l’économie et la société, développement des technologies, notam- administration et collectivités locales, ment les technologies de l’information et entreprise et commerce, éducation et la communication, comme une condition formation, recherche, système scien- indispensable pour atteindre le dévelop- tifique et technologique, culture, santé et pement économique durable. Ainsi, pour secteur sociaux, loisirs, etc. le Gouvernement, il est important et urgent de définir une politique active et Le Cap Vert, en tant que pays à forte dynamique de formation dans les do- insularité et discontinuité territoriale et maines des TICs, incluant des mesures désireux de l’intégration de la diaspora à pour diminuer le coût d’accès, ceci étant son développement doit entreprendre une condition sine qua non pour des mesures pour adopter les TICs convertir les TICs en facteur de comme des priorités nationales. développement vers une Société d’Infor- mation pour tous. La généralisation de C’est une nécessité incontournable pour l’informatique dans tout le tissu bâtir les bases de la société de l’infor- économique et social doit être un réel mation et du savoir au Cap-Vert, et pour défi.

Cape Verde - 1 59

1 Profil du Pays 2 Secteur des La République du Cap Vert est un archipel télécommunications de 4.033 km2 et avec une Zone Econo- Le Cap-Vert a fait des gains enviables sur mique Exclusive (ZEE) qui s’étend à plus le marché des télécommunications depuis de 730 km2. l’indépendance à ce jour, en 1995 les Il est situé à peu près à 450 km à l’Ouest postes et télécommunications ont été du Sénégal, entre 17º 12’ et 14º 48’ de divisées en 2 entreprises, Correios de latitude Nord et 22º 44’ 25º 22’ de Cabo Verde SARL et Cabo Verde Telecom longitude Ouest. SARL.

Il est composé de dix îles d’origine vol- La Direction Générale des Commu- canique et avec une identité géophysique nications est l’organe chargé de la diversifiée allant de montagnes extrê- régulation du secteur de télécom- mement accidentées à des vallées pro- munications. fondes et ramifiées. Cabo Verde Telecom est l’opérateur historique, avec un monopole de 25 ans, parmi les premières privatisations d’Afrique, fournis des services comme téléphone fixe, le GSM et l’Internet.

Les services de valeurs ajoutes et les services de valeurs complémentaires (comme services Mobile et Internet) sont libéralisés. À cause de inexistence d’un cadre réglementaire plus efficace, de taille du marché très réduit et un faible pouvoir d’achat, ces services sont fournis uni- quement par l’opérateur historique.

Actuellement le Gouvernement est en phase de préparation de mettre en place une effective concurrence dans ces Les îles sont distribuées dans deux services. Des diverses mesures sont groupes: celles Contre le vent (Barla- prises, comme: vento) au Nord comprenant les îles de Santo Antão (754 km2), S. Vicente – création et la mise en place de (228 km2), dont la capitale est la ville de l’organe de réglementation efficace;

Mindelo, S. Nicolau (342 km2), Boavista – nouveau Plan National de Numé- (622 km2), Sal (215 km2) et Santa Luzia rotage; qui n’est pas habitée et celles Sur le vent (Sotavento) au sud, comprenant les îles – portabilité des numéros; de Maio (267 km2), Santiago (992 km2) où se trouve la ville de Praia, la capi- – lois d’interconnexion; tale du Pays, Fogo (447 km2) et Brava 2 – rééquilibrage des tarifs; (65 km ). – et autres. Selon un recensement national effectué en 2000, la population était alors de 43 4812 habitants. La population est jeune puisque 42% des Capverdiens ont 2.1 Réseau Fixe moins de 14 ans et 6% seulement plus de Le réseau de téléphone du Cap Vert a une 64, la moyenne d’âge étant à peine capacité de 71,9 mille lignes. Au mois de supérieur à 17 ans. décembre de 2002 le nombre total de Et dispose d’une diaspora importante en lignes connectées était de 70187, provo- Europe et aux Etats-Unis d’environ cant une densité téléphonique de 15,1 par 700 mille Capverdiens cent habitants.

60 Cape Verde - 2

Commutation optique et cuivre. La sécurité de la transmission nationale est garantie par Le centre international se trouve dans la deux stations type F3 liées au réseau ville de Praia et est une centrale de type Intelsat et localisées à Praia et Mindelo. Siemens EWSD. Il existe deux centres de Commutation primaires localisés à Praia et à Mindelo, qui sont aussi des centrales 2.2 Réseau Mobile Cellulaire de type Siemens EWSD avec 43 réseaux La Cap Vert Telecom opère en réseau locaux formés par des secteurs de cellulaire GSM numérique. Le service est référence (Direct Line Units) et des garanti par deux «Base Station»: la centrales digitales de type SPX (Equitel – première est localisé à Praia et servi par Brésil). 27 «Base Transceiving Stations» (BTS) avec 45 cellules, couvrant les îles du Sal, Transmission Boavista, Maio, Santiago, Fogo et Brava Les liaisons internationales sont assurées et la deuxième localisé à Mindelo, servi à travers le réseau Intelsat, par une par 16 BTS composé par 16 cellules station Standard B localisée à Praia et couvrant les îles du Santo Antão, São par le câble sous-marin international de Vicente et São Niculão. Dû à l’orographie fibre optique Atlantis 2, qui lie le Cap du pays, il existe encore plusieurs zones Vert à l’Afrique, l’Amérique Latine et sombres dans quelques îles. Le nombre l’Europe. Les liaisons nationales sont d’abonnés de téléphones cellulaires por- réalisées par le câble sous-marin inter- tables est de 451011). îles de fibre optique, par plusieurs faisceaux digitales et par des liaisons terrestres utilisant des câbles de fibre 1) Donnée juillet 2003

Le Réseau National en fibre optique

Cape Verde - 3 61

2.3 Réseau d’Internet une liaison de largeur de bande 8 Mbps, il permet l’accès complet (full Internet Aperçu général access) à 4566 clients. Les services offerts englobent le «dial up PPP», accès L’Internet au Cap-Vert c’est développé de ligne, et «dial up». Il offre le service à d’une manière différente d’autres pays travers un numéro, le seul qui permet du monde. Dans la majorité des pays, l’accès au niveau national et avec tarif l’Internet a commencé avec l’initiative de local. la communauté académique ou un projet d’appui au développement. SITA - Société Internationale des Té- lécommunications Aéronautique opère Au Cap-Vert, en 1996 la CVTelecom aussi en tant que fournisseur de service, l’introduit pour la première fois avec un ses services étant destinés à des clients réseau expérimental d’une capacité de spécifiques. 64 kbps à travers du Telepac au Portugal. Il existe aussi un autre réseau d’accès a l`Internet, le réseau du Gouvernement Sa commercialisation a commencé une (RAFE-Réforme Administrative du Sec- année après, environ de 500 utilisateurs. teur Financier de l’Etat) – un projet L’Institut Supérieur de Génie et Sciences financé par la Banque Mondiale sur la de la Mer est l’administrateur du reforme du secteur public. Ce projet a domaine .cv. déjà connecté tous les Ministères, quelques écoles secondaires et Muni- A partir de 2000 la CVTelecom a cipalités qui permet à 2500 utilisateurs augmente la largeur de bande jusqu’à d’accéder à l’Internet. 4 Mbps, avec une large extension aux autres îles; A la fin de 2002, on estimait à 15000 les utilisateurs de l’Internet au Cap-Vert un Aujourd’hui la CVTelecom est le principal taux de pénétration bas par rapport au fournisseur du Service d’Internet, avec pays développés

Internet Hosts 1

Usagers de l’Internet (estimation) 15000

Usagers de l’Internet par 100 habitants 3.3

Tarifs

De 0 a 15 heures 17 USD/mois

De 15 a 20 heures 21 USD/mois

De 20 a 30 heures 27 USD/mois

62 Cape Verde - 4

2.4 Remarques L’accès universel aux télécommuni- cations est très étendu. En 2000, la La CVTelecom a soutenu la croissance CVTelcom a fournie au moins un télé- initiale du secteur des télécommu- phone dans chacune des 241 com- nications dans lequel elle fait de gros munautés dans la populations dépassait investissements correspondant en 200 habitants. En outre, la couverture du moyenne à 45% de ces recettes au cours réseau cellulaire mobile s’étend à 90% des 5 dernières années. Le pays atteint de la population. la plus forte densité téléphonique de tous les PMA en 1996. Il dispose également C’est-à-dire la disponibilité d’un télé- d’une infrastructure de télécommuni- phone au sein des ménages a progressé cation moderne, y compris des centres régulièrement avec un pourcentage de locaux entièrement numérisés des liai- 15 en 1992 à 60 en 2002, ce qui place le sons nationales et internationales à fibre Cap-Vert à la troisième place en Afrique optique et un réseau cellulaire mobile (après la Réunion et Maurice). GSM numérique.

Taux de pénétration, données Juillet 2003

1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 Jul/2003

Tel. Fixe 21513 25232 33241 39985 46865 55829 64132 70187 69971

GSM 1020 8068 19729 31507 42949 45101

Internet 474 1139 1654 2456* 2974* 3935* 4566*

Tel./100 5.9 6.8 8.8 10.8 12.8 17.4 21.9 24.4 24.5 habit (F+M)

* Utilisateurs de C.V.T

3 État des TICs au Cap a conduit à des problèmes de gestion rationnelle, aujourd’hui grâce à ce projet Vert le problème est réduit.

Pendent les 4 derniers années, malgré RAFE est vite devenue un des principaux l’absence d’une politique et du plan moteurs de la révolution des TICs dans précis dans le domaine des TICs, le Cap- l´Administration Publique. Les services Vert n'est pas resté indifférent à ce qui et la formation qu’elle assure auprès des se passe dans le monde, ses avancées pouvoirs publics, comme, construction dans ce domaine sont considérables. des cites web, élaboration et dévelop- pement des divers logicielles pour la 3.1 Administration Publique gestion en différent domaine, etc., l’ont amenée à accroître son organisme. RAFE – Reforme Administrative du Secteur Financier de l’Etat, un projet RAFE espère rendre l’administration plus financé par le Banque Mondiale dont transparente et plus «conviviale» grâce à l’objectif était d’informatiser le système son projet de cybergouvernement dont financier, est aujourd’hui concrètement l’objet est de donner l’accès à l’internet à un réseau informatique du gouver- tous. nement qui a déjà connecté tous les Ministères, quelques écoles secondaires et Municipalités. 3.2 Education

Si bien avant, pour l´Administration Un autre projet, aussi financé par le Publique capverdienne, la circulation du Banque Mondiale, est le PROMEF – papier constitue le support matériel de Project de Consolidation et Modernisation toute information administrative, ce qui de l’Education et Formation dont

Cape Verde - 5 63

l’objectif d’introduction et dévelop- 3.5 Secteur Bancaire et pement des TICs dans le système Commerce électronique éducatif. Grâce à la modernisation des infrastruc- Sa réalisation plus important en matière tures et à l'évolution des commu- des TICs est le développement d’un nications, principalement après l'intro- Système de Gestion d’information sup- duction de la fibre optique et des porté par différent base de données sur centraux complètement numérisés, les le secteur éducationnelle comme: statis- banques ont eu la possibilité d'intégrer tique basique de chacun des écoles, dans le système "on-line" des agences données pour évaluer et accompagner le localisées dans le pays. travaille des élèves, budget, ressource Parallèlement, avec l'évolution des TICs, humaine, données des étudiants bour- le marché bancaire c'est penché sur la siers au pays et à l’étranger, information possibilité de mettre en œuvre l'usage d’évolution de chacun élève, etc. des cartes de crédits et des transactions électroniques. Dans le domaine de E-Formation, il existe un projet en cours de formation Pour relever ce défi, il a été créé la des étudiants universitaires en ligne Société Interbancaire et des Systèmes (Internet), financée par l’UIT et CISCO. de Paiement (SISP) avec la co- participation de la Banque Centrale, de 3.3 Santé l’entreprise des télécommunications et des banques commerciales.

Cependant, le secteur de la santé a Aujourd’hui le client peut procéder à des démarré très récemment avec l’intro- retraits d'argents, consulter les soldes, duction des TICs dans l’amélioration de les extraits et les réquisitions de la qualité de ces services médicales, chèques, etc. pour l’utilisation des services, le gouvernement a opte premièrement l’infor- Le premier projet réalisé a été la matisation de tous les infrastructures de création d'un réseau de cabines ban- ce secteur. caires automatiques (distributeurs) où ce service fonctionne depuis décembre Concrètement au tele-santé il y à un 1999. projet en phase d’exécution qui permet lier deux hôpitaux centraux à l’autre en Existe des postes de paiement Lisbonne (Portugal), pour le changement automatiques distribués par diverses des informations entre les médecins. entreprises et services publics pour permettre le paiement d'achats, de dépenses effectuées, reçus, impôts, etc. 3.4 Media Avec la collaboration de l’UIT, En ce qui concerne les masses media récemment a était approuvée une comme, Radio, Télévision, et la Presse, il ensemble des lois sur le Commerce- existe environ 12 radio, transmettent sur électronique, la signature électronique, Web sites, la radio éducative assure la les transitions électroniques, les contrats tele-education en générale, il y a 3 électroniques, etc. chaînes pour la Télévision une national et deux internationaux. 3.6 Société et généralisation Actuellement existe 6 journaux, pos- des TICs sèdent des web site, cela permit aux internautes national et la diaspora, qui Néanmoins le Cap Vert est doté est en masse importante de suivre aujourd’hui des infrastructures des télé- l’actualité du pays. communications modernes, l’accès géné- ralisé aux TICs reste comme un enjeu Ces medias se présentent comme étant pour tous par conséquence de coûts le meilleur moyen pour atteindre la élevés des ordinateurs et des tarifs population. d’accès

64 Cape Verde - 6

Pour rendre les TICs à la disposition de vernement électronique et de la société tous les Telecentres/Cyberespace et d’information, avec une coordination qui Telecentre Communautaire jouent un sert comme un centre opérationnelle, rôle vital dans la mobilisation des pour mettre en place ce plan du ressources et la fourniture au grand programme du gouvernement, jouent un public d’un large accès au TICs, de plus rôle très important pour la généralisation aussi ils peuvent permettre l’accès a la des TICs. formation au développement et renforcement des capacités. Cette commission a des compétences suivantes: Une enquête sur les points d´accès (télécentres/Cyberespace) à été menée à a) proposer de forme organise les l´échelle national recensée dans les stratégies de développement intègre environs de 80 télécentres, à montrée pour les novations de la société des résultas importantes comme: d’information et le gouvernement – une croissance très rapide des points électronique; d’accès au niveau du pays; b) promouvoir la nécessite d’articulation – une fréquentation massive de la entres les initiatives pour les nova- jeunesse à (82%); tions de la société d’information; – un genre presque équilibre; c) Approuver la stratégie et le program- – un niveau de connaissance raison- me du gouvernement électronique; nable; – des cybers bien équipés; d) Approuver la responsabilité des – les tarifs mensuels à payer différentes ministères et organisme l’opérateur (ISP) sont très élevés et public dans le cadre de programme par conséquence les tarifs d’accès de gouvernement électronique. sont aussi élevés. Entre temps il existe un centre 4 La stratégie nationale communautaire, un projet pilot financé par l’UIT, Cabo Verde Telecom, OMCV Le Cap-Vert est parmi certains pays (organisation des femmes capver- d’Afrique qui dispose d’un Plan National diennes) et Gouvernement du Cap-Vert, des Développement d’Infrastructures des dans le but de stimuler surtout les Technologies d’Information et de la femmes et les jeunes à l’accès aux TICs. Communication. Ce centre est géré par les femmes, il est prévu dans la 2e étape, sera introduit la Mais le Pays envisage d’élaborer un Plan formation, le e-com, tele-education, National Stratégique pour les TICs, avec telemedicine.Dans le cadre de la une vaste participation du gouver- généralisation et l’insertion des TICs, le nement, du secteur prive et de la société gouvernement a crée des «CAJ», des civile permettrait définir des buts centres des jeunes, une initiative pour réalistes pour le Cap-Vert, au moyen et intègre la masse juvénile dans le le long terme, de designer les plans à développement social et culturel, mettre en œuvre pour atteindre les buts formation, information, appui et définis (tenant compte les besoins de orientation pour utilisation des TICs, qui formation de techniciens, les besoins sont mis a la disposition sans distinction d’investissements, le cadre réglemen- pour tous. Ces centres sont équipé par taire, etc.) et désigner des politiques des accès important aux TICs, implante pour favoriser la massification de dans tous les villages. l’utilisation des TICs dans ces différents secteurs. D’autre initiative importante aussi du gouvernement, d’avoir crée une Com- Disposer d’un Plan d’action Stratégique mission Interministérielle présidé par pourrait aider à coordonner et ratio- le Premier Ministre qui a comme but naliser tous les efforts de façon à assurer principal le développement de gou- les différentes initiatives dans le domaine

Cape Verde - 7 65

des TICs en cours et une utilisation – Soutenir le processus de formation efficiente de fonds disponibles et faciliter institutionnelle, éducationnelle et de l’apport de fonds pour sa mise en œuvre. l’instruction et scolaire; La Stratégie National doit être fondée sur le développement des usages des TICs – Apporter des contributions au déve- et se décline en des actions et mesures à loppement du parc technologique travers particulièrement des grands axes national, régional et communautaire; et objectives. – Apporter des contributions au 4.1 Objectifs Généraux: développement de programmes/ – Soutenir les mécanismes de transfert projets de formation éducationnelle et diffusion des TICs; et d’instruction et scolaire dans les domaines de la formation géné- – Promouvoir le développement et rale/professionnelle, l’alphabétisation continuer encourager la culture tech- d’adultes, à travers la formation nologique visant l’implantation des débutante/continue et/ou à distance; TICs au Cap Vert; – Promouvoir la modernisation du Cap Vert visant le développement de la – Contribuer au développement de Société d’Information; programmes de télétravail visant la création de possibilités d’emplois – Soutenir la création d’Infrastructures pour certains groupes-cible, nommé- du pays dans les domaines des TICs; ment, les handicapés, les femmes – Soutenir les initiatives des insti- enceintes et/ou en congés prolongés tutions, secteurs et acteurs (publics/ de l’après accouchement; privés) qui développent des projets d’innovation moyennant l’utilisation des TICs; – Contribuer à l’éducation et l’inté- gration en visant des solutions des – Promouvoir le développement socio- problèmes socio-communautaires; économique et culturel du pays à travers l’utilisation des TICs dans la promotion de l’éducation, l’instruc- – Soutenir l’effort national dans la lutte tion et/ou formation, de la culture et contre la pauvreté et le chômage, à de la lutte contre la pauvreté; travers l’exploitation de nouveaux – Soutenir la croissance et le dévelop- services des TICs par les privés ou pement socio-économique du pays à des groupes communautaires/ coo- travers l’utilisation des TICs; pératives, régional et national; – Promouvoir le développement démo- cratique en cours dans le pays, – Contribuer pour le développement et créant à travers la mise en œuvre la promotion de la langue et la des TICs, des mécanismes/espaces culture capverdienne, à travers son qui favorisent le dialogue, la utilisation dans les différents médias concertation et la participation. et supports de communication;

4.2 Objectifs Spécifiques – Contribuer à l’intégration écono- mique nationale, à travers de ré- Le Plan d’action Stratégique doit consi- seaux/systèmes de banques de dère comme objectifs spécifiques, les données; suivants: – Soutenir le processus de dissé- mination et vulgarisation des TICs; – Contribuer à l’intégration écono- mique internationale et, particu- – Suivi de la stratégie globale de la lièrement, régional, à travers de modernisation du pays dans les réseaux/systèmes de banques de chantiers fondamentaux comme données de production, échanges cyber gouvernement, l’éducation, commerciaux, produits, commerce santé, commerce électronique, etc; électronique, etc.;

66 Cape Verde - 8

– Contribuer au développement de la 5 Conclusion société d’information, à travers la création d’un système national En conclusion est constaté que: d’information; 1) Cap Vert est doté aujourd’hui des

infrastructures des télécommunica- – Contribuer au développement de la tions modernes, mais l’accès généra- société d’information, à travers l’in- lisé aux TICs reste comme un enjeu tégration du Cap Vert dans les autres pour tous par conséquence de coûts systèmes/réseaux existants au ni- élevés des ordinateurs et des tarifs veau régional et ibero-luso, brési- d’accès; liens, castellannais nommément; 2) Les numéros d’accès aux TICs sont – Soutenir des programmes d’éduca- bas cela à cause du coût élevé tion et d’information pour l’environ- d’acquisition et d’usage, l’absence de nement, l’éducation sanitaire et la la concurrence, de la taille du santé communautaire; marché petite et faible pouvoir – Soutenir des programmes de d’achat; développement et la valorisation 3) Il y a dans les différents secteurs de féminine, de la famille, de l’enfant, la société des diverses initiatives de la jeunesse et du troisième age; dans les domaines des TICs, mais

elles sont développées d’une manière – Contribuer à des programmes qui volontaire de chaque secteur, sans peuvent promouvoir le développe- une vision coordonnée;4) Pour ment des droits humains et de la cela il est nécessaire de disposer culture démocratique et participa- d’un Plan d’action Stratégique qui tive; pourrait aider à coordonner et – Promouvoir des mécanismes de rationaliser tous les efforts de façon liaison qui peuvent faciliter l’échange à assurer ces différentes initiatives et l’approfondissement des rapports dans le domaine des TICs en cours entre les capverdiens résidents et les et une utilisation efficiente de fonds communautés émigrées (Diaspora); disponibles et faciliter l’apport de

fonds pour sa mise en œuvre; – Soutenir le développement du tourisme virtuel, à travers l’Internet 5) En fin les TICS devient une infra- et moyennant l’offre des «sites» à structure vitale pour un pays l’effet, visant la disponibilité et insulaire comme le Cap-Vert pour marketing des services touristiques, construire des routes virtuelles pour de la part des opérateurs nationaux. faciliter la liaison entre les îles.

Mr Ahmed Boukerrou Mr David Gomes Technician Director Geral Direction Générales des Communications Direcção Geral das Comunicações Ministère des infrastructures et transports P.O. Box 07 B.P. 07 CV-PRAIA CV-PRAIA Cape Verde Cape Verde

Tel.: +238 615779/80 Tel.: +238 61 57 79 Fax: +238 613069 Fax: +238 61 30 69 E-mail: [email protected] E-mail: [email protected]

Cape Verde - 9 67

Chad

Le développement de NTIC au Tchad

Figure 1 – République du Tchad

Chad - 1 69

1 Presentation Le PIB est constitué à hauteur de 38% par l'agriculture et l'élevage, de 15% par générale du Tchad le secteur secondaire et de 47% par le Situé en plein cœur de l'Afrique, le terri- secteur tertiaire. toire de la République du Tchad occupe 2 une superficie de 1 284 000 Km . Le D'une manière générale, l'économie du Tchad est limité au Nord par la Libye, à Tchad est très marquée par le secteur l'Est par le Soudan, au Sud par la informel représentant environ 70 % de la République Centrafricaine et à l'Ouest valeur ajoutée totale. par le Cameroun, le Nigeria et le Niger.

Le Tchad dispose d'une potentialité de 2 Cadre géographique développement très importante :

Le territoire du Tchad est une cuvette encerclée par une demie couronne de Plus de 20 000 000 hectares des terres montagnes et de plateau. arables et 5 600 000 hectares des terres irrigables. Le point le plus haut est le massif volca- nique «Tibesti» dont le point culminant D'importantes ressources minières et pé- est le pic Emi-Koussi (3 415 m). trolières évaluées à plus de 900 000 000 de barils. Le climat du Tchad est de type tropical caractérisé par deux saisons: une saison des pluies et une saison sèche. D'importantes ressources en sel, natron, uranium, étain, fer, tungstène, or, et diamant. Il existe également le calcaire, 3 Situation le kaolin, les marbres, les diato- démographique mites, etc.

Selon les données du dernier recensement effectué en 1993, la population De 2001 à 2002, le produit intérieur brut réel a connu une croissance de 12,3%. du Tchad est estimée à 6 279 931 habitants (voir le tableau de la page 6), 2 soit une densité 4,89 habitants au km . Quant au PIB réel par habitant, celui-ci Le taux de croissance moyen de la popu- a connu une croissance de 9,5% pendant lation tourne autour de 2,5 % par an. la même période.

4 Tchad économie En 2002, le PIB par habitant est de l'ordre de 158 400 F CFA (212 USD). L'économie du Tchad est fortement dé- pendante du secteur primaire. Le secteur Avec ces indicateurs, le Tchad reste un secondaire est naissant et le réseau des pays les moins avancés de la d'infrastructures peu développé. planète.

70 Chad - 2

Figure 2 – Société des télécommunications du Tchad (SOTEL TCHAD)

5 Secteur des autorité administrative chargée de la régulation, de l'application et de la mise télécommunications en œuvre de la Loi et Textes régle- Doté d'un nouveau cadre réglementaire, mentaires du secteur des télécommu- le Tchad compte aujourd'hui trois nications. (3) grands opérateurs des télécommuni- cations: – SOTEL TCHAD, opérateur historique; 6 Société des télécom- – Libertis, opérateur cellulaire GSM; munications du Tchad – Celtel, opérateur cellulaire GSM. (SOTEL Tchad) Ces trois opérateurs totalisent environ La Société des Télécommunications du 50 000 abonnés dont 13 000 pour le Tchad (SOTEL TCHAD), détenue à 100 % réseau RTCP. par l'Etat, est issue des activités de la La majorité du parc se trouve concentrée Société des Télécommunications Interna- à N'Djaména (95%) où on dénombre tionales du Tchad (TIT) et des acti- seulement 600 000 habitants. vités des télécommunications de l'Office National des Postes et Télécommunica- Le nouveau cadre réglementaire a tions (ONPT). Elle est principalement permis également la création et la mise chargée de l'exploitation de télécommu- en place de l'Office Tchadien de Régu- nications de base et de tout ce qui s'y lation des Télécommunications (OTRT), rattache.

Chad - 3 71

7 Réseau de la SOTEL En fin d'année 2002, la pénétration des télécentres était de 0,033 pour Tchad 1 000 habitants.

De configuration étoilée, le réseau des télécommunications de la SOTEL TCHAD NB: En 1998, la pénétration de l'Afrique compte 11 835 lignes principales dont Sub-saharienne était de 0,20 pour 80 % se trouvent à N'Djamena. Ce parc 1 000 habitants. représente une pénétration de 0,15 lignes principales pour 100 habitants, bien en dessous de la moyenne des pays de l'Afrique Sub-Saharienne de l'année 2000 (3,5 lignes principales pour 100 habitants). 8 Le réseau Internet Ouvert depuis le 19 Novembre 1997, le réseau Internet du Tchad dénommé TCHADNET est constitué d'un routeur CISCO 5300 situé à N'Djaména (Goudji) relié par satellite, au site de France 14000 Télécoms à Bagnole (Paris). 11835 12000 y = 823.65x + 2646.4 10261 Les abonnés des villes provinciales 10000 10689 8600 9740 accèdent au réseau TCHADNET sans dis- 8000 crimination, par le biais du Réseau Télé- l 7471 6000 phonique Commuté Public (RTCP). 4705 6004 4200 5395 4000 4571 A l'introduction de l'Internet au Tchad, la Lignes Principales Lignes 2000 SOTEL TCHAD ne dispose que d'une passerelle de 64 kbits/s de bande passante 0 et de 43 abonnés au 31 décembre 1997. 4 6 2 92 9 9 98 00 0 9 9 0 19 1 1 19 20 2 Années A la date du 30 Juin 2002, le réseau Parc LP Linear (Parc LP) Internet du Tchad «TCHADNET» compte 1 802 abonnés pour une bande passante de 512 kbits/s full duplex.

Figure 3 – Historique du Parc des lignes principales de la SOTEL Tchad Tableau 2 – Historique de l'Internet au 30 juin 2002

Trafique en Tableau 1 – Situation des Abonnés minutes télécentres au 30 juin 2002 1997 43 213 850 Cabines Cabines 1998 317 1 576 518 publiques privées (SOTEL TCHAD) 1999 635 3 158 000 N'Djamena 133 46 2000 999 5 075 507 Moundou 18 9 2001 1 517 8 246 775 Sarh 16 11 2002 1 800 8 656 375 Abéché 05 11 Autres 07 10 En fin d'année 2002, la pénétration villes Internet était de 0,228 pour TOTAL 179 87 1000 habitants.

72 Chad - 4

9 Le réseau Internet du matérielles, dans le domaine des Nou- velles Technologies de l'Information et Tchad de Communication (NTIC) et particuliè- Le réseau Internet du Tchad rement Internet, un Protocole d'Entente «TCHADNET» offre plusieurs services à a été signé en Avril 1998 entre le PNUD travers le réseau téléphonique commuté. et le Gouvernement. Ces services se présentent comme suit: Par cet Acte, le Gouvernement a accepté • Le courrier électronique (e-mail). les conditions à remplir pour bénéficier des services du Projet africain «IIA» dont • La consultation des pages WEB. l'UNOPS constitue l'agent d'exécution. • L'hébergement des pages WEB. Les Bénéficiaires directs de ce projet • L'émission et la réception des fax sont: (Viafax). • la Présidence de la République; • Le transfert des fichiers (FTP). • la SOTEL TCHAD; • Le forum de discussion et la télé- • conférence. le Centre National d'Appui à la Recherche (CNAR) et les chercheurs • La Viaphonie. qui s'y rattachent; • la Direction Nationale de l'Infor- 10 Développement de matique; l'Internet et de NTIC • l'Université de N'Djaména; au Tchad • les autres régions; • la Presse (ATP, RNT, TVT); L'accès à l'information est une condition préalable à toute prise de décision • les Fournisseurs des Services Inter- rationnelle dans l'établissement du déve- net. loppement humain durable. Le projet permettra au Gouvernement de Dans ce cadre, il a été mis en place le mettre en place une politique nationale projet «Initiative Internet pour l'Afrique» de développement de l'Internet qui dans le but d'implanter les services encourage la participation du secteur Internet et améliorer ceux qui existent privé dans l'offre Internet aux consom- déjà dans 12 pays africains dont le mateurs. Tchad. A cet effet, une cellule de coordination, Au Tchad, ce projet a consisté à: supervisée par un Comité de Pilotage, • renforcer le nœud Internet à la est mise en place. SOTEL TCHAD; La cellule est chargée: • créer et renforcer le nœud fédérateur • national; du suivi de l'ensemble des activités; • • renforcer le rôle du secteur privé en de la sensibilisation; tant que Fournisseurs de Service • de la formation; Internet (SFI); • de la communication avec les diffé- • renforcer les capacités nationales rents intervenants. (formation des usagers et des tech- Décision du Gouvernement, assure la niciens, développement des conte- participation de tous les partenaires dans nus, etc). la gestion du projet à travers les axes d'orientations suivants: 11 Stratégie de dévelop- • création d'un environnement incitatif pement de l'Internet aux FSI; et de NTIC au Tchad • création d'un environnement incitatif aux utilisateurs et consommateurs des produits et services Internet; Dans le but d'aider le Tchad à renforcer ses capacités humaines, techniques et • commercialisation de l'Internet;

Chad - 5 73

• vulgarisation de l'Internet (encoura- • création des télécentres communau- gement et mise en place des cyber taires; espaces); • développement des contenus tcha- • extension du réseau TCHADNET; diens WEB.

Stratégie de développement de l'Internet et de NTIC au Tchad

Activités identifiées Objectifs Observations 1. Renforcement de la capacité 1.1 Extension du nœud national à 1.1 Exécuté technique et de gestion de 512 kbits/s la SOTEL TCHAD 1.2 Création des nœuds 1.2 Exécution partielle secondaires (Moundou, Sarh et Abéché) par LS à 64 kbits /s 2. Formation des Ingénieurs, 2.1 Formation des formateurs 2.1 Exécution partielle Administrateurs, chefs de (10 Ingénieurs, et projets Internet et 5 Chefs de projet) opérateurs 3. Création d'un environne- 3.1 Analyse des textes en vigueur 3.1 Exécution partielle ment favorable au dévelop- en vue d'élaboration des textes pement de l'Internet visant à réduire les taxes et droits des douanes sur les équipements NTIC et à conso- lider la politique de libre concurrence et la facilité d'accès dans le domaine de NTIC. 4. Emergence du secteur privé 4.1 Définition d'une stratégie 4.1 Exécution en cours pour fournir les services adapté au marché NTIC du Internet au TCHAD Tchad (business plan) 4.2 Elaboration de Cahier des 4.2 Exécution en cours Charges fixant les critères techniques et de gestion auxquels les FSI doivent répondre pour être prestataires des services Internet 4.3 Elaboration d'une procédure 4.3 Exécution en cours rapide d'agréments et d'homologation des équipements et des infrastructures NTIC 4.4 Elaboration d'une procédure 4.4 Exécution en cours raisonnable pour le raccordement LS des FSI 4.5 Elargissement de l'éventail des 4.5 Exécution en cours SFI dans un futur proche en rapport avec le business plan

74 Chad - 6

Stratégie de développement de l'Internet et de NTIC au Tchad

Activités identifiées Objectifs Observations 5. Formation des utilisateurs 5.1 Production d'un plan de 5.1 Exécuté et des techniciens sur formation et identification des l'exploitation de l'Internet personnes à former et des serveurs. 5.2 500 utilisateurs à former sur 5.2 Exécution partielle l'exploitation de l'Internet 5.3 30 techniciens à former sur 5.3 Exécution partielle l'exploitation et la maintenance des serveurs 5.4 20 techniciens à former sur le 5.4 Exécution partielle logiciel Linux 6. Campagne de sensibilisation 6.1 Réalisation d'une campagne de 6.1 Exécution partielle sectorielle. sensibilisation (privé, public, universités) 6.2 Journées nationales Portes 6.2 Exécution partielle Ouvertes pour l'information du public 6.3 Organisation des ateliers 6.3 Exécution partielle d'information et démonstration de l'outil Internet 7. Développement des 7.1 Création des sites WEB dans 7.1 Exécuté contenus Internet au Tchad les secteurs prioritaires au développement 7.2 Inventaire des informations 7.2 Exécution partielle pertinentes à publier sur Internet pour appuyer les actions de développement prioritaires 8. WEB nationaux sur le développement durable

A terme: A court terme:

• Augmentation de la largeur de bande • Réalisation du réseau national à de la passerelle, passant de Fibre Optique et introduction du sys- 512 kbits/s à 2 048 kbits/s. tème de commutation et de transmission par paquet. • Renforcement de la sécurisation du nœud national et des nœuds secon- • Implantation des systèmes de daires. desserte à haut débit: le Digital Subcriber Line (DSL) et le Wireless • Augmentation de la capacité de la Local Loop-IP (Boucle Locale liaison RTCP passant de 4 MIC à Radio IP). 12 MIC. • Développement de la téléphonie IP • Augmentation de la capacité de rac- et de la plupart des services associés cordement des SFI en liaisons spé- au protocole IP (télé-éducation, télé- cialisées. santé, e-commerce, visioconférence).

• Création de nouveaux nœuds secon- • Développement des Télécentres Com- daires. munautaires Multiservices.

Chad - 7 75

12 Conlusions étroitement les Nouvelles Technologies de l'Information et de la Communication L'enclavement du pays, l'étendue du (NTIC). territoire, la faiblesse des infrastructures, constituent des contraintes réelles au Le développement des infrastructures développement et à l'accès à l'infor- des télécommunications constitue donc mation. un défi majeur pour réduire la fracture numérique et permettre au Tchad L'accès à l'information est une nécessité d'entre dans de la Société de l'Infor- dans l'établissement du développement mation. humain durable. Afin de relever ce défi, l'apport des par- Les entraves auxquelles le Tchad doit tenaires au développement (publics, faire face en matière d'accès à des infor- privés) et des Institutions Internatio- mations pertinentes, exactes et à jour nales (PNUD, UIT,BM) est sollicitée, tant pour orienter les décideurs et autres en assistance technique, que dans le acteurs de développement sont multiples domaine de mobilisation des ressources par lesquelles les infrastructures de télé- financières et du développement des communications de base dont dépendent ressources humaines.

M. Barounga Abba Goni M. Peurnai Sarous Ngardinga Chef Directeur Général Adjoint Service Etudes et Planification Société des Télécommunications du Société des Télécommunications du Tchad (SOTEL TCHAD) Tchad (SOTEL TCHAD) TD-1132 N'DJAMÉNA TD-1132 N'DJAMÉNA Tchad Tchad Tél.: +235 521210 Tél.: +235 521533 Fax: +235 521210 Fax: +235 521442 E-mail: [email protected] E-mail: [email protected]

76 Chad - 8

Djibouti

Activités pour le développement du secteur des technologies de l'information et de la communication (TICs)

Conscient de l'importance des techno- document de stratégie et du plan d'ac- logies de l'information et de la commu- tions au Président de la République par nication (TICs) dans le processus de les membres du comité national. développement économique et social du pays, Le Ministère de la Communication, de la Culture chargé des Postes et des 1 Contexte Télécommunications, a entrepris une La République de Djibouti se caractérise large consultation nationale impliquant par l'existence d'un seul opérateur des toutes les composantes de la société télécommunications (opérateur histori- djiboutienne (secteur public et privé et que) qui a le monopole sur tous les ser- société civile) afin de proposer un projet vices de télécommunications (téléphone de réforme du secteur des technologies fixe, téléphonie mobile et Internet). de l'information et de la communication (TICs) et créer une initiative djiboutienne Il n'existe pas de régulateur indépendant de la société de l'information. du secteur des télécommunications. C'est le Ministère des Télécommunications qui joue ce rôle. La consultation nationale a débuté le 11 mai 2002 et a pris fin au mois Ce contexte a conduit à la situation d'avril 2003 par la remise officielle du suivante:

Tableau 1 – données recueillies au mois de septembre 2002

Djibouti Afrique Densité téléphonique pour le téléphone fixe 1,54 2,62 Densité téléphonique pour le téléphone mobile 0,47 2,95 Utilisateur Internet pour 10.000 habitants 51,32 84,89 Nombre de serveurs Internet pour 10.000 habitants 0,13 3,38 Nombre de PC pour 100 habitants 1,09 1,06

Trois directions de travail ont été tarification pour Djibouti Telecom et enfin retenues: La réglementation du secteur la conception d'une stratégie d'exploi- des TICs, la définition d'une nouvelle tation des TICs.

Djibouti - 1 77

2 Réglementation du reconnue d'intérêt public par l'Etat et comptera dans ses rangs des repré- secteur des TICs sentants du secteur public, du secteur privé et de la société civile. Cette phase a révélé la nécessité de la création d'une agence de régulation des TICs en charge des télécommunications, de l'informatique et de l'audiovisuelle. 5 Les succès En mars 2003, un projet de loi de base sur les TICs a été élaboré ainsi qu'un 1) Réduction des coûts des services et décret portant création de l'agence de produits commercialisés par Djibouti régulation. Ce projet de loi est actuel- Telecom, unique opérateur des télé- lement en discussion au sein du gouver- communications à Djibouti. La der- nement. nière révision tarifaire remontait à l'année 1985.

2) Elaboration de la stratégie nationale d'exploitation des TICs par une appro- 3 Nouvelle tarification che participative incluant toutes les pour l'opérateur composantes de la communauté nationale Djibouti Télécom 3) Elaboration d'un cadre réglementaire Les différents participants aux consul- (loi de base sur les TICs et création tations ont recommandé à l'opérateur des d'une agence de régulation) télécommunications Djibouti Telecom et à 4) Création prochaine d'une agence son ministère de tutelle de proposer une d'exécution des TICs. Association à nouvelle tarification afin de permettre le but non lucratif reconnue d'utilité développement des TICs. publique par le gouvernement, ayant ses membres issus de toutes les Depuis le 1er mars 2003, cette nouvelle composantes de la société djibou- tarification est en vigueur. Elle concerne tienne (public, privé et société civile), aussi bien Internet (plus de 60% de cette agence aura pour mission de réduction), le réseau cellulaire (plus de conduire à la réalisation de la société 40% de réduction), le téléphone fixe local djiboutienne de l'information et du (réduction de 40% en moyenne) et les savoir. communications internationales (entre 20 et 40% de réduction suivant les pays). 5) Lors de sa parution, la stratégie e-Djibouti a fait la «Une» du site web du PNUD (www.undp.org) 6) Présentation de la stratégie lors de la 4 Développement de conférence arabe de développement des Telecom à Beyrouth au Liban l'exploitation des TICs (28 au 31 mai 2003).

Une stratégie nationale d'exploitation des TICs pour le développement de la Répu- blique de Djibouti et son plan d'actions ont été élaborés. Elle constitue une vision 6 Les problèmes d'avenir s'étalant sur les 10 prochaines rencontrés années. Cette stratégie a été adoptée dans le courant du mois d'avril 2003. Elle 1) Insuffisance des fonds disponibles lors est disponible sur le site Web du Ministère de l'élaboration de la stratégie à l'adresse www.mccpt.dj. e-Djibouti. Ainsi certains travaux ont dû être annulés pour insuffisance de Une agence d'exécution de la stratégie va financement. être créée et mise en place très bientôt. Cette agence sera une association à but 2) Difficulté de trouver des financements non lucratif (régie par la loi 1901), pour l'exécution de la stratégie.

78 Djibouti - 2

M. Ibrahim Ahmed Aden M. Anwar Ali Ismael Directeur des Etudes et de la Planification Cadre au Département GSM/Multimédia Ministère de la Communication, de Djibouti Telecom S.A. la Culture, des Postes et des Boulevard Georges Pompidou Telecommunications B.P. 2105 DJ-DJIBOUTI, B.P. 32 DJ-DJIBOUTI, B.P. 32 Djibouti Djibouti Tél.: +253 810 023 Tél.: +253 811 873 Fax: +253 356 163 Fax: +253 353 957 E-mail: [email protected] E-mail: [email protected]

Djibouti - 3 79

El Salvador

TIC’s para el desarrollo Internet para todos: acceso público de Internet

1 Actividades para el tivo en todos sus niveles; y, d) Uso racional y eficiente del espectro radioeléc- desarrollo de las trico. telecomunicaciones en El Salvador

Todavía en 1996 en El Salvador, los 2 Fomento del acceso a servicios de telecomunicaciones eran brindados y supervisados en forma de las telecomunicaciones monopolio estatal, la Institución responsa- para todos los sectores ble de ello fue la Administración Nacional de la población de Telecomunicaciones-ANTEL. Ese año fue el punto de partida para modificar el Para el logro de este objetivo, la marco de regulación, el cual incluía la Superintendencia, mediante su marco de creación de la Superintendencia General regulación estableció condiciones y de Electricidad y Telecomunicaciones- requerimientos mínimos para obtener los SIGET, la Ley de Telecomunicaciones, los permisos, autorizaciones, Licencias y correspondientes Reglamentos a cada una Concesiones para que los inversionistas de ellas y para cubrir los aspectos sociales nacionales y extranjeros pudieran de forma se creo el Fondo de Inversión Nacional en fácil, acceder a brindar servicios de teleco- Electricidad y Telecomunicaciones (FINET), municaciones. En el caso de los servicios entidad encargada, de incrementar la públicos de telefonía la Concesión se infraestructura de telefonía para desarro- otorga en promedio dentro de un mes de llar servicios de telefonía en las áreas haber presentado la aplicación, con una rurales. Todo el proceso quedo vigente vigencia de 30 años, sin costo, incluye desde 1998. Fundamentalmente la cobertura a nivel nacional, quedando decisión del gobierno fue abrir el mercado facultado el titular para brindar todo tipo de Telecomunicaciones, minimizar la de servicios, siendo la única restricción la regulación y permitir que actuaran las que obliga a iniciar operaciones en el fuerzas del mercado. Los fines estableci- término de dos años, caso contrario se dos en la Ley de Telecomunicaciones pierde la Concesión. En consecuencia, los incluyen: a) Fomento del acceso a las inversionistas llegaron e iniciaron la insta- telecomunicaciones para todos los lación de infraestructura de telecomuni- sectores de la población; b) Protección de caciones, en su mayoría buscando los los derechos de los usuarios y de los servicios de tráfico internacional, pero operadores proveedores de servicios de algunos crearon redes de acceso para telecomunicaciones; c) Desarrollo de un servicios móviles y fijos. mercado de telecomunicaciones competi-

El Salvador - 1 81

3 Protección de los cionales. De esa forma se fomentaría la competencia entre redes que ofrecerían los derechos de mismos servicios sin ventaja para las los usuarios y de partes, estableciendo la competencia en precios, calidad, cobertura y nuevos los operadores servicios. Se puede afirmar que con los proveedores de nuevos operadores de servicios móviles y servicios de la reducción de las tarifas en los servicios del tráfico internacional, este objetivo se telecomunicaciones está cumpliendo exactamente como lo esperado. Bajo el nuevo entorno, los usuarios y la población en general se encontrarían con más proveedores de servicios, quienes en 5 Uso racional y la procura de captar más abonados crearían condiciones que posteriormente eficiente del espectro serían fuentes de reclamos, principal- radioeléctrico mente por cobros indebidos, contratos inexistentes y abusos de poder. La Supe- Uno de los recursos naturales más rintendencia previendo esta situación valiosos con que cuentan los países es el estableció un procedimiento de reclamos espectro radioeléctrico, lamentablemente que permite paso a paso iniciar el reclamo es limitado por lo que el uso y costo ante el proveedor del servicio, participa- depende del desarrollo tecnológico de los ción técnica del Regulador y finalmente la servicios que se pueden explotar comer- resolución final emitida por la Dirección cialmente. Tradicionalmente este recurso competente en asuntos de protección al ha sido administrado en forma desorde- consumidor. Este procedimiento incluye nada y con mucha discrecionalidad. En El las etapas de Audiencia, Pruebas e Salvador, la Ley de Telecomunicaciones Informes técnicos hasta la Resolución incluyó un proceso de ordenamiento y final que se emite para cada proceso. asignación por medio de subastas obli- SIGET también logra mediante un pro- gatorias para las frecuencias en operación cedimiento de acceso a recursos en las que el derecho de explotación no esenciales evitar posiciones dominantes pudo ser demostrado, brindando con ello, que entorpecen el ingreso de un nuevo la oportunidad de normalizar el derecho actor al sector de telecomunicaciones. de uso. La clasificación del espectro incluye las de uso oficial, libre y regulado, siendo estas últimas las que tienen la 4 Desarrollo de obligación de pagar una tasa anual por la un mercado de Administración, Gestión y Vigilancia. En el nuevo procedimiento de asignación se telecomunicaciones elimina completamente la discrecionali- competitivo en todos dad, ya que éste inicia con la publicación sus niveles de la solicitud de la porción de interés, la cual es publicada en medios escritos Si la obtención de los permisos se tornó nacionales e internacionales con el sumamente fácil para los nuevos ope- propósito de llamar la atención en el radores, todo lo contrario se preveía para sentido que haya interés o si alguien se poder obtener la Interconexión e integrarse ve afectado podría informar por medio de a la red de telecomunicaciones existente, una oposición a lo solicitado. En el caso por ello en la Ley de Telecomunicaciones de no existir inconveniente y de no haber quedó previsto que durante dos años a otro interesado se asigna a quien solicitó partir de la vigencia de la Ley, los previo un pago del precio base, el que se operadores podrían negociar libremente las calcula mediante un instructivo. La condiciones de los acuerdos en los subasta por la porción del espectro aplica aspectos Técnicos, Legales y Comerciales solamente en los casos de que haya salvo en los Cargos de Interconexión, en muestra de más interesados, para ello se los que la Ley definió específicamente cual han desarrollado dos procedimientos sería el valor para los servicios de las 1) una sola presentación en sobre cerrado llamadas locales, nacionales e interna- y 2) Rondas Simultaneas y Sucesivas.

82 El Salvador - 2

6 Otros servicios de gobierno deben participar en los nuevos desafíos e integrarse con los Conforme a lo esperado, la apertura del nuevos procesos, utilizando herramientas sector telecomunicaciones, provocó el informáticas en donde las tecnologías de aparecimiento de nuevos proveedores de la información y comunicación están servicios, incluyendo pero no limitándose desplazando rápidamente los procesos a Internet, servicios de valor agregado en analógicos y de mucho control personal redes móviles y fijas, usuarios que implantados en nuestras administraciones utilizan los números 800’s y 900’s para desde hace mucho tiempo. Los países brindar un abanico de servicios de desarrollados que ya cuentan con aplica- diversión, información, entretenimiento, ciones de TIC’s partieron de un plan bien etc. De todos los servicios que se pueden fundado, creando, desarrollando e implan- mencionar, el que esta proliferando más tando ordenadamente estas herramientas. es el acceso a Internet, en este servicio En El Salvador, se ha iniciado con un los operadores luchan por capturar proyecto que busca establecer un diagnós- usuarios, a tal grado que con el propósito tico de nuestra realidad en cuanto a TIC’s, de generar tráfico local procedente de para ello el gobierno esta recibiendo otras redes de acceso ofrecen el uso del asistencia técnica del Japón. El estudio en Internet en forma gratuita en la ejecución se encuentra en la fase de modalidad de acceso conmutado, obteni- investigación, el cual una vez realizado endo beneficios en las liquidaciones por la determinará cuales deben ser la políticas a terminación de tráfico en sus servidores seguir y establecerá nuestro punto de proveedores de Internet. Centros de partida. Información y Centros de llamadas han logrado desarrollarse conforme los 7.1 Internet en El Salvador proveedores de servicios les brindan las facilidades técnicas para implantarse, de En El Salvador, en los últimos años se ha esa forma los restaurantes de comida incrementado y modernizado la capacidad rápida pueden ofrecer servicios de instalada con la que los proveedores de entrega en un tiempo máximo de treinta conectividad y servicios de Internet minutos, so pena de dar gratis el servicio cuentan, motivados por la creciente si no se cumple con ese tiempo. En los demanda. Se estima que dicho crecimiento sitios de acceso público, principalmente es de un 20% anual, por lo que, para en la urbe se puede apreciar locutorios mantenerse activos en el mercado, todas con servicio de Internet a bajo costo y las empresas desarrollan planes de con precios reducidos para los estudiantes expansión programados en el tiempo, los o para los que utilizan el ordenador por cuales son celosamente guardados. tiempos prolongados.

Los equipos de acceso a Internet con 7.2 Cobertura vocación exclusiva de VoIP han surgido, La cobertura del servicio provista, se halla pero el uso se ha visto restringido, concentrada principalmente en San principalmente porque para proveer públi- Salvador, y probablemente en algunas camente el servicio de telefonía deben otras localidades específicas del interior del respetarse las disposiciones legales país. Las únicas empresas que ofrecen existentes, esto obliga a una interco- cobertura en casi todo el territorio nexión, lo cual hace que se pierda el salvadoreño son las Sociedades CTE, S.A. atractivo comercial que estas terminales de C.V., y Telefónica Multiservicios, S.A. de con desarrollos tecnológicos recientes C.V. permiten.

7.3 Tipos de servicios ofreci- 7 TIC’S en El Salvador dos

Ya se ha descrito lo que esta ocurriendo El servicio de Internet por medio del en el sector telecomunicaciones en El acceso conmutado, es ofrecido en forma Salvador, la innovación tecnológica esta gratuita por varios proveedores, quienes llegando como producto de la iniciativa generan beneficios a partir del cobro de privada, evidentemente las instituciones impulsos telefónicos y por medio de la

El Salvador - 3 83

venta de publicidad. También se presenta Con las ofertas de Internet gratis, la la modalidad de cobro por acceso conmu- inclusión de los impulsos en la tarifa de tado, normalmente sin límite de uso, en Internet y con las ofertas de servicios de tarifas mensuales de USD 4 a USD 5. parte de las empresas de cable, el Internet conmutado prácticamente desaparece. Se Algunas de las tasas que emplean los perfila que a futuro, los servicios de proveedores locales de acceso conmutado Internet serán ofrecidos por las empresas son de 6 líneas telefónicas por módem y que cuentan con una red de acceso 25 a 45 usuarios por módem. grande, y que el resto de empresas se quedarán trabajando en los enlaces También hay enlaces «peer to peer» en dedicados. forma bilateral entre algunos de los proveedores, para intercambiar el tráfico que A diferencia de la telefonía, la provisión de fluye entre ambos, con anchos de banda servicios relacionados con Internet, no que van desde los 64 hasta 1024 Kbps, requieren de una autorización por parte de dependiendo del tráfico observado. la Superintendencia General de Electricidad y Telecomunicaciones (SIGET). Esto ha Estos arreglos bilaterales, si bien propiciado que aún empresas pequeñas, solucionan el problema del intercambio de hayan visualizado éste como un negocio tráfico entre proveedores involucrados, productivo, y se hallen decididos a sin utilizar el ancho de banda internacio- perseverar y obtener una cuota importante nal contratado, resultan una alternativa de un mercado en continuo crecimiento, ineficiente a largo plazo. De ser extendido tanto en El Salvador como en el resto del este esquema, cada proveedor debería mundo. Es así como actualmente se cuenta contar con un enlace dedicado a cada uno con 24 proveedores del servicio de de los demás proveedores, lo que haría Internet. esta operación incosteable. De aquí que la mejor alternativa sea la instalación de un NAP, a lo que prácticamente la totalidad 7.4 Equipos utilizados y costo de proveedores se encuentra anuente. del servicio

Algunos de los servicios ofrecidos por las Algunos de los equipos utilizados por las empresas consideradas Proveedores de empresas dedicadas a la provisión del Servicios de Internet (ISP’s) en el país son: servicio de Internet comprenden: – Accesos Conmutados, – Enrutadores Cisco 2500, 3600, 3640, 7206, para conexiones hacia provee- – Accesos Dedicados, dores y backbones, – Alojamiento de sitios Web (Web – Equipos de enrutamiento Cisco1720, Hosting), para clientes dedicados, – Web TV, – Equipos de acceso Cisco AS5300, con capacidad de 4 E1’s cada uno, – Videoconferencia a través de IP, – Servidores Compaq para Mail Server, – Diseño de páginas Web, Web Server, Hosting, y Monitoreo, – Servicios de soporte a servidores de – Equipos con plataformas Solaris, Linux Internet, y AIX. – Diseño, instalación y configuración de En cuanto a enlaces y anchos de banda, redes LAN y WAN, tanto hacia el exterior como los ofrecidos a clientes locales: – Asesoría en adquisición de sistemas de comunicación de datos, – Varios accesos a Internet, normalmente con redundancia entre enlaces – Capacitación a empresas, satelitales y enlaces de fibra óptica. – Desarrollo de aplicaciones orientadas o – Si bien los anchos de banda hacia el basadas en tecnología Internet, tales exterior son variables, de acuerdo al como Intranet y sistemas bancarios, tamaño del proveedor, iniciando en – Telefonía computarizada, 512 Kbps, a manera de ejemplo para una salida de 6 Mbps, el tráfico – Servicios de acceso satelital. mensual promedio es de 4350 Kbps.

84 El Salvador - 4

– Los anchos de banda ofrecidos a En el área de la informática, es obvio el clientes dedicados son, en su mayo- incremento de equipos como: computado- ría, de 128 Kbps, pero también se ras personales y residenciales, servidores, proveen anchos de banda de encaminadores, módems digitales, acce- 256 Kbps, 512 Kbps y más, siempre sorios para Redes de Área Local (LAN). en múltiplos de 64 Kbps. Se utilizan Los operadores locales proveen facili- como transporte enlaces de fibra dades de financiamiento a sus usuarios óptica, cobre y microondas. para la adquisición de computadoras – Los precios de estos servicios oscilan personales, con el objeto de extender sus entre USD 350 a USD 700 mensuales servicios a los consumidores en el campo por un enlace de 128 Kbps, depen- del acceso a Internet, como una medida diendo del proveedor. de popularizar dicha herramienta para lograr su completa difusión. – El precio de instalación depende de la factibilidad técnica de cada cliente.

8 Tendencia del mercado de 9 Planes de desarrollo las telecomunicaciones Dentro del marco de apertura del sector Durante los últimos cuatro años, las telecomunicaciones, existen planes de importaciones de equipos de telecomuni- desarrollo para la región centroamericana. caciones, diferentes tipos de hardware y Dichos planes contemplan entre otros software se han incrementado rápida- proyectos el desarrollo de una red de fibra mente, debido principalmente, a los óptica en Centro América, que se contem- competidores en el mercado de la telefonía pla en un proyecto llamado «PPP» (PLAN celular, lo que incluye la entrada a nuestro PUEBLA PANAMÁ). Esta es una iniciativa de país de especialistas en la construcción y el los Gobiernos de la región, y cuya desarrollo de centrales telefónicas, redes responsabilidad está bajo el Gobierno de El de fibra óptica, sistemas de microondas, Salvador, aunque deberá ser desarrollado torres y antenas para servicio celular, lo con fondos de inversión privada. El que también incluye laboratorios para proyecto interconectará a los siguientes reparar teléfonos celulares, todo esto con países: México (Puebla), Guatemala, la intención de brindar toda clase de Belice, El Salvador, Honduras, Nicaragua, servicios utilizando las nuevas aplicaciones Costa Rica y Panamá. Sin embargo, es del mercado, que den una solución necesario y fundamental adecuar la integral, rápida y confiable a sus regulación en cada uno de los países antes demandas. de establecer dicha red.

Hacia USA

Cancún

Belice

Puerto Cortés Tapachula Puerto Barrios Trujillo San Pedro Sula Puerto Lempira

Guatemala Puerto San Salvador Tegucigalpa Cabezas Puerto San José

Bluefield

Managua

Cable Maya Hacia Colombia Cable Arcos Hacia Perú Puerto Limón Colón Cable SAM-Emergia San José Fibra Óptica Faltante Panamá Agua Dulce Fibra Óptica Existente Red Regional de Microondas Fibra Óptica posible

El Salvador - 5 85

Indicadores de telecomunicaciones

667 699 625 785 649 879 700 000

600 000 495 340

500 000 386 659

400 000

300 000

200 000

100 000

- 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002

Figura 1 – Crecimiento en El Salvador de la cantidad de líneas fijas por año

1998

1999

2000 Año

2001

2002

- 100 000 200 000 300 000 400 000 500 000 600 000 700 000 800 000 900 000

Figura 2 – Crecimiento histórico en líneas móviles en El Salvador

86 El Salvador - 6

100%

95%

90%

85%

80%

75% 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002

Figura 3 – Porcentajes de líneas principales conectadas a centrales digitales

3 363 163 3 500 000

3 000 000

2 500 000

2 000 000

1 500 000

1 000 000

500 000

2002

Figura 4 – Número total de conexiones en el año 2002

El Salvador - 7 87

13 689 100 000 80 000 60 000 81 177 40 000 20 000 - Acceso a Internet Número de abonados registrados con acceso a Internet dedicado Número de abonados registrados con acceso a Internet conmutado

Figura 5 – Cantidad de conexiones a Internet para el año 2002

2 433 2 500

2 000

1 500

923 1 000

500

105 30 - - 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002

Figura 6 – Abonados a la RDSI por año

88 El Salvador - 8

2 131 2 031 1 865

500

1998 1999 2000 2001 2002

Figura 7 – Abonados a redes públicas de datos por año

255 000

250 644 250 000

245 000

240 000 234 073

235 000

230 000

225 000

2001

2002

Figura 8 – Cantidad de averías del servicio telefónico, reportadas por los usuarios

El Salvador - 9 89

200 000

180 000 174 163

160 000

140 000

120 000

103 617 100 000

80 000 72 566 60 000 37 991 40 000 35 243

20 000

- 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002

Figura 9 – Solicitudes no atendidas de líneas telefónicas residenciales por año

4 000 000 000 3 500 000 000 3 000 000 000 2 500 000 000 2 000 000 000 1 500 000 000 1 000 000 000

500 000 000 2002 2001 - 2000 1999 1998

Figura 10 – Evolución del tráfico telefónico local en El Salvador

90 El Salvador - 10

90% 82% 80%

70% 62%

60%

50%

40%

30%

20%

10%

2001

2002

Figura 11 – Porcentaje de reclamos resueltos a favor del usuario

900 000 000

800 000 000

700 000 000

600 000 000

500 000 000

400 000 000

300 000 000

200 000 000 2002

100 000 000 2001

2000 - 1999 Tráfico Internacional Tráfico 1998 Entrante Internacional Saliente

Figura 12 – Evolución del tráfico internacional en El Salvador

El Salvador - 11 91

900 000 000

800 000 000

700 000 000

600 000 000

500 000 000

400 000 000

300 000 000 2002 200 000 000 2001 100 000 000 2000 - 1999 1998

Figura 13 – Evolución del tráfico telefónico nacional en El Salvador

$ 0.0450

$ 0.0400

$ 0.0350

$ 0.0300

$ 0.0250

$ 0.0200

$ 0.0150

$ 0.0100

$ 0.0050

$ - Minut o nacional 19 9 8 19 9 9 2000 Minut o local 2001 2002

Figura 14 – Costo por minuto local y nacional en El Salvador

92 El Salvador - 12

$ 16.00 $ 400.00

$ 14.00 $ 350.00

$ 12.00 $ 300.00

$ 10.00 $ 250.00

$ 8.00 $ 200.00

$ 6.00 $ 150.00 Cuota Básica Cuota

$ 4.00 $ 100.00 de InstalaciónCargo

$ 2.00 $ 50.00

$ - $ - 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002

Cargo Básico mensual comercial Cargo Básico mensual residencial Cargo por la instalación del servicio telefónico

Figura 15 – Cargo de instalación, cuota básica residencial y comercial

$ 0.80 $ 0.80

$ 0 .70

$ 0.60

$ 0.48

$ 0 .50

$ 0.40

$ 0.25 $ 0.25 $ 0.25 $ 0.30

$ 0.20

$ 0.10

$ - 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002

Figura 16 – Costo promedio por minuto en horario pleno hacia Estados Unidos desde El Salvador

El Salvador - 13 93

$ 0.2300 $ 0.2299 $ 0.2300 $ 0.2300 $ 0.2500

$ 0.2000

$ 0.1500

$ 0.1000

2002 $ 0.0500 $ 0.0194 2001

2000

1999 $ -

CPP 1998

Figura 17 – Cargo por llamadas de fijo a móvil en El Salvador

$ 700 000 000.00

$ 600 000 000.00

$ 500 000 000.00

$ 400 000 000.00

$ 300 000 000.00 2002

$ 200 000 000.00 2001

2000 $ 100 000 000.00 1999

$ - 1998 Ingresos Gastos

Figura 18 – Ingresos y gastos de las empresas de telecomunicaciones en El Salvador

94 El Salvador - 14

5 000 100% 4 000 80% 3 000 60% 2 000 40%

Empleados 1 000 20% - 0% Porcentaje de mujeres Personal1998 total 1999 a tiempo 2000 completo 2001 en 2002 servicios de telecomunicaciones Porcentaje del personal de sexo femenino

Figura 19 – Personal en las empresas del sector telecomunicaciones en El Salvador

Sr Victor Manuel Artiga Sr Oscar Atilio Estada Valle Gerente de Telecomunicaciones Jefe Superintendencia General de Electricidad Departamento Recursos Humanos y Telecomunicaciones – SIGET Superintendencia General de Electricidad y Telecomunicaciones – SIGET Sexta Décima Calle Poniente y 37 Avenida Sur N°. 2001, 6a/10a Calle Poniente y Colonia Flor Blanca 37 Avenida Sur N°. 2001, SV-SAN SALVADOR Colonia Flor Blanca El Salvador SV-SAN SALVADOR El Salvador Tel.: +503 257 4446 Fax: +503 257 4495 Tel.: +503 257 4438 E-mail: [email protected] Fax: +503 257 4495 E-mail: [email protected]

El Salvador - 15 95

Eritrea

Telecommunication Development Country Report for Eritrea

1 Background Each zone has its own Local government and assembly which is responsible to the Eritrea lies 1000 km along the Red Sea central government. The style of govern- coast. It is situated in the northeastern ment in Eritrea is presidential where the part of Africa between 12° and 18° north president acts as the head of state and latitude and between 36° and 43° east the chief of the armed forces. longitude. Eritrea is bordered by the Red Sea in the east, Sudan to the West, Ethiopia to the South and Republic of Djibouti in the southeast. In addition Country Basic Data several islands such as the Dahlak islands Capital City Asmara belong to Eritrea. The country has rugged geography with an altitude range of Area 125,000 square kilometers minus 100 meters (in Dallol depression south of Massawa) to 4000 meters. Population 3,800,000 Population growth 3% per annum The climatic conditions are determined GDP USD 190 mainly by altitude. The high plateau has a Main Telephone Lines 36 500 temperate climate throughout the year. The main climatic divisions are the “Dega” Telephone Density 0.81% (or the temperate plateau) with a mean temperature of 18° C and the “Kola” (or the lowlands) with mean temperature of 35° C. 2 Telecommunication Changes in climatic patterns have rendered sector in Eritrea large parts of the country vulnerable to drought. Extensive projects are underway to improve the ecological balance and 2.1 Regulatory framework afforestation and soil conservation pro- From 1991 up to 1996 the telecommuni- grammes. cation sector was under the Eritrean Post Administratively, Eritrea is divided into six and Telecom Authority. In 1996 the Post zones. They are: and Telecom were separated having the communication Sector divided into a – Zoba Maekel regulatory body under the name of – Zoba Anseba Communication Department and the telecom operator the Telecommuni- – Zoba Gash-Barka cation Service of Eritrea. The Eritrean – Zoba Debub Postal Services, the Communication Department and the Telecommunication – Zoba Debub-Keih-Bahri Service of Eritrea are responsible to the – Zoba Semien-Keih-Bahri (see map of Ministry of Transport and Communi- Eritrea next page) cations.

Eritrea - 1 97

The Communication Department holds the The main objectives of the Communica- responsibility of sector regulation. The Tele- tion Department are defined in the procla- communication Proclamation No. 102/98 is mation No. 102/98 as follows: the primary law governing the sector and – Create a regulatory environment for granted the government an exclusive the supply of communication network power to establish and provide all telecom- and services; munication services and products including: Promote fair competition and efficient – Supervision and promotion of provi- market practice in the communication sion of communication services in sector; Eritrea, and – Facilitate the entry into market for – The authority to issue, renew, revoke communications services for persons or transfer permits, equipment approv- wishing to supply such networks and als certificates, assignments of fre- services; quency and other regulatory documents in the communications sector on – Ensure that operators, suppliers and behalf of the Government of Eritrea. installers meet their commercial

98 Eritrea - 2

obligations and such other obligations The investment policy is attractive, favour- specified under the Proclamation in able and has the full government guarantee manner which promotes cooperation against nationalization or confiscation. and fairness; Foreign currency remittance is allowed. – Promote operators, suppliers and installers and the public from unfair As a result of this foreign investors have conduct of other operators, suppliers shown interest and have started to invest and installers regarding the quality of in mining, fisheries, oil exploration and service and payment of the tariffs; services, etc. In addition to the above hotels and other institutions are being – Ensure that operators, suppliers and sold to local and foreign investors. installers achieve the highest possible level of accountability and responsive- ness to customers and community The government is confident for the needs; realization of its objectives as it possesses highly motivated and disciplined people – Ensure that standard telecommuni- who have a strong aspiration and commit- cations, broadcasting and postal ser- ment to bring it about. vices are supplied as efficiently and economically as possible and at such The telecommunication sector being part of performance standards which reasona- the infrastructure for development is slated bly meet the social, industrial and for private participation and would-be commercial needs of the community; partners have shown interest for invest- – Promote the development to other ment in the sector. sector of the Eritrean economy through the commercial supply of modern communications services within the framework of the Proclamation; 2.3 Existing telecommunication network in Eritrea – Establish technical standards and promote the development of Eritrea’s communications capabilities, industries and skills; 2.3.1 Introduction – Ensure the Eritrean public have The Telecommunication Service of Eritrea growing access to communications; (TSE) was set up under the Ministry of and Transport and Communications with a view – Optimize the use of communications to run the telecommunication services on networks and services in Eritrea with commercial basis and is the only provider due consideration of the rights of the of telecommunication services in the operators, suppliers and installers and country. the public interest etc. The Telecommunication Service of 2.2 Macro economic policy Eritrea’s public switched network (PSTN) consists of approximately 45,000 lines of With the liberation of Eritrea in 1991 the which 36500 lines are in use. TSE waiting government of Eritrea launched a major lists indicates that there are 40,000 rehabilitation and reconstruction pro- waiting applicants currently waiting for gramme of the country’s economy and has service. begun the task of defining a development strategy. This development strategy is At the moment the Telecommunication contained in its MACRO-POLICY manifesto Service of Eritrea is providing basic Tele- which is a multifaceted development policy communication services and also providing that addresses the infrastructure of the carriers to communicate with the outside country. To complement this policy the world. TSE also provides limited value government has issued Investment Procla- added services such as Dial-up and leased mation No. 59/1994 inviting local and line Internet services, international private foreign investors to participate in the leased circuits, etc. development objectives.

Eritrea - 3 99

2.3.2 Switching network – Beleza PABX connected with microwave spur link located in the The network inherited from previous suburbs of Asmara, colonial administrations comprised a limited telephone service in the capital city – Keren local exchange linked via Asmara and in the port towns of Assab and STM1 SDH microwave and is Massawa each having 10,000, 1800 and located 91 kilometers away to the 1000 exchange lines respectively which north, th were analogue of the 19 century make. – ASM IV/1 (remote subscriber Since independence there has been a stage) connected via an optical substantial modernization Programme to fiber located in Asmara, replace the outdated analogue switches by digital ones, installation of new switches, – ASM VI (Remote Subscriber Stage) the construction of a new satellite earth connected via an optical fiber station for international traffic and the located in Asmara, construction of new exchange buildings. – Elaberid Hicom PABX connected to In early 1993, The Telecommunication Keren exchange via microwave Service of Eritrea saw the urgent need of spur link, expanding and modernizing its network – Adikeih rural switch connected via by increasing the capacity of the ex- PDH microwave link and is located changes in Asmara to connect the large 110 kilometers away to the south. number of applicants who were on a waiting list for telephone subscription. – Massawa (local AXE-10 Switch) The same expansion and modernization installed and commissioned in 1998 became evident in the towns of Keren, connects: Massawa, Mendefera and Dekemhare that have had very old analogue exchanges. – Ghinda PABX with STM1 SDH microwave link, Therefore, TSE undertook a modernization – Edaga ( Remote Subscriber stage) and expansion programme of replacing its via optical fiber, obsolete exchanges with modern digital exchanges in most of its major centers. – Gurgusum (Remote Subscriber mul- Accordingly, the following centers were tiplexer) via an optical fiber link, replaced by digital exchanges: – ASM V via SDH microwave link. – Asmara II (Local/Transit combined) was installed and commissioned in – An International Switching Center was 1994. Hosting the following Remote installed in 1996 as a Gateway Suscriber Stages: connected to: – ASM II local/Transit exchange via – ASM III connected to the main coaxial cable, switch via modern fiber optic trunks and is located in Asmara, – ASM V local/Transit Exchange via coaxial cable, – ASM IV linked via modern fiber optic trunks and is located in – Assab (local nalogue switch) via Asmara, domestic satellite link, – Dekemhare linked via PDH MW link – Akordat, Barentu and Tessenai located 40 kilometers away from rural switches via VSAT DAMA Asmara to the south, satellite link. – Mendefera linked via PDH MW link located 54 kilometers away from 2.3.3 Transmission network Asmara to the south. The transmission network was likewise – ASM V ( Local/Transit combined ) was expanded and modernized. TSE currently installed in 1997 with a new version uses a variety of transmission systems to of digital exchange AXE-10 type extend the telecommunications services connecting to: to cities and towns throughout Eritrea.

100 Eritrea - 4

2.3.3.1 Microwave systems Dekemhare due to the requirement for a 34 Mb/s interface at related PDH There are five microwave systems microwave system, currently in use which are either newly installed or upgraded since independence – The STM-1 system between Central, of the country. These systems are Gejeret and Sembel, summarized below: – A Siemens SDH system was installed – The 140 Mb/s PDH system between in 1997 to provide STM1 links: Edaga Hamus, Central and Gejeret was installed in 1986 and has been – Between Asmara and Massawa, put in service in 1994. This requires – Massawa and Ghinda via Bonrspiro replacement. repeater Station; and – Asmara and Keren via the mount Fiber optic systems are also used for Ira repeater station. inter-exchange trunking in Massawa with systems installed between Massawa Head Two low capacity PDH spur links between Office, Edaga and Gurgusum. mount Ira and Elabered town and between Biet Ghioghis and Beleza were also installed under the same contract. 2.3.4 The external plant – An Alcatel/Teletra 34 Mb/s system between Asmara Central, Asmara The external plant has been concurrently M/W station, Abaselama repeater expanded using modern cable such as station, and Ethiopia was installed in jelly filled plastic cables replacing the old 1996 to provide services to Ethiopia. paper insulated ones. Since independence But the Abaselama-Ethiopia link has close to 40,000 new telephone pairs been temporarily closed unilaterally consisting of underground (buried/ducted) by the present Ethiopian regime since and aerial network was installed. June 1998. As part of the access network TSE has – A Siemens SRAL 8 Mb/s link was implemented a Wireless Local Loop (WLL) installed beteen Abaselama repeater technology that covers the villages station and Adikeih in 2001. around Asmara and the town of Debarwa – The Teletra M/W system between which is 30 km away from Asmara. The Asmara, Mendefera and Dekemhare first phase of the project was to connect was installed in 1986. This was reha- 2 000 subscribers and this is planned to bilitated in 1995. However, there are be upgraded and expanded up to no spare parts available and is recom- 4 000 subscribers using latest wireless mended to be replaced. technologies. In addition there are also single channel HF, VHF and UHF links that connect the 2.3.5 Satellite communication remote towns of Nakfa, Afabet, Adiquala, facilities Dahlak, Segheneiti, Dongollo and Senafe to Asmara. TSE has installed two International ground satellite earth stations both of 2.3.3.2 Fiber optic transmission which are standard A located in the systems capital Asmara. One faces the Atlantic Fiber optic systems are used for all Ocean Region and the other to the Indian ° interexchange trunking in Asmara with Ocean Region operating at 342 East and ° four systems currently in use: 60 degree East respectively. Besides, there are two standard F2 domestic earth – An STM-4 provides primary trunking Stations in Asmara and in Assab that between Central and the Satellite connect the latter with all Eritrean towns. Earth Station and the M/W sites, Other types of satellite communication – One 140 Mb/s PDH system provides are VSAT DAMA satellite antennas that trunking between central and the connect the towns of Akordat, Tessenei M/W sites. This link currently carries and Barentu with the rest of the country traffic only to Mendefera and and the world.

Eritrea - 5 101

Table 1 – Subscriber lines, sales volume and revenues (1995-2002)

Item product 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 No. of lines 16,340 19,368 22,050 24,308 27,726 29,971 31,200 36,500 Urban Traffic 50,102 70,344 96,194 78,556 84,998 96,161 128,372 144,862 (no of pulses- 000s) Foreign outgoing traffic 1,453 1,54 2,055 2,326 2,432 2,878 3,549 4,478 in 000s Min. Foreign incoming traffic 5,721 7,231 8,741 10,143 12,004 9,530 17,188 22,668 in 000s Min.

Urban Revenues n/a 24,966 32,188 30,482 30,883 32,696 31,354 32,923 (Nkf.-000s) Interurban revenues n/a 47,111 57,314 74,639 68,973 79,891 73,104 78,221 (Nkf.-000s) Net foreign billings n/a 44,629 52,563 61,010 60,458 58,803 61,490 62,720 (Nkf.-000s)

Table 2 – Historical operational performance indicators (1995-2002)

Item Description Unit 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002

Supply and demand Main lines connected DEL 16 340 19 368 22 050 24 308 27 726 29 971 31 200 36 500 Mains lines per 100 people % 0.5 0.55 0.63 0.69 0.78 0.81 Public payphones No. 124 124 265 389 417 Satisfied demand % 30.5 55.7 57.7 56.9 58 Average waiting time for a line year 19 6.3 5.3 5.9 6

Quality of Service Mean Installation Time of stations days n/a n/a 1.24 4.07 3.17 1.6 1.47 1.64 Reported faults cleared in % n/a n/a n/a 62.7 49.4 74.5 70.5 71.8 24 hours Mean fault clearance time Outside Plant days 5.48 1.25 4.12 3.5 4.64 3.25 4.66 2.81 Customer Premises Equipment days n/a n/a 3 2.1 6.5 1.32 1.17 1.08 Call completion Rate: % Local 37 48 52 52 54 53 51 52 STD n/a 24 21 48 49 56 48.5 55 International 22 47 49 53 49 43 31 41

Productivity Full Time Staff No. 513 553 628 578 463 453 476 641 Number of main stains No. 32 35 35 42 60 66 66 57 per employee

Complaints Total number of complaints No. 1 159 1 976 1 279 2 069 1 133 921 398 856 % of justified to total complaints % 76.8 69 33 58 39 50.6 97.7 17.52

102 Eritrea - 6

2.4 Operation and services for accessing the Internet; and maintenance increase broadband utilization of the Internet to enhance sustainable development objectives. 2.4.1 Operations and revenues

The Telecommunication Service of Eritrea has expanded and rehabilitated the net- During the commissioning of the project, work which inherited from the colonial the backbone bandwidth was 512 kbps administrations. Since independence in downstream and 256 kbps upstream. 1991, TSE has been operating its network After 6 months time this bandwidth was modestly well. The Telecommunications found to be too small to satisfy the users. sales volume, revenue figures and sub- Besides, since it was shared between the scriber line expansion and quality of Leland Initiative countries, it was very service parameters starting from 1995 up slow. Therefore, it was expanded to to December 2002 are depicted in Table 1. 1 Mb/s Upstream and to 512 kbps downstream in a year’s time. Still this also was 2.4.2 Operational performance of the not enough which required further national network expansion to 2/1 Mb/s. The speed of the Internet access at the current bandwidth In the last decade the Telecommunication is still very slow that indicates the Service of Eritrea has made a substantial bandwidth may need to expanded up to progress in operating, maintaining and 10 Mb/s in order to provide fast Internet expanding the national telecom network. access for which the planning work is In those years the capacity of the network completed. has increased by 3-4 fold compared to the capacity of the inherited network. To date there are 5 Internet Service By African standards the operational providers and about 50 Internet cafes. performance of the network as depicted in The number of Internet Users in the Table 2 shows the trend towards expan- country is increasing fast. There are about sion, improved quality and increased 12,000 Internet users. subscriber satisfaction. This places Eritrea in a better position out of the 32 selected least developed countries. 4 Competition in the Telecom Sector 3 Internet service TSE is currently the only provider of tele- The Internet service in Eritrea was communication services in Eritrea with launched in November 1999. The govern- the exception of 5 Internet Service ment of the State of Eritrea and the providers which have started in November government of the United States of 2000. In addition one mobile network America had cooperated to establish the operator, has obtained a license from the National Internet Operating gateway Communication Department to operate a under the Leland Initiative. It was agreed mobile network in Eritrea in a joint that the Internet is open for competition venture with the Government of Eritrea. from the inception and the Telecommuni- The operator has conducted a pilot cation Service of Eritrea was entrusted to project and is preparing to install and operate the National Internet gateway. operate the network. Accordingly, 5 Internet Service providers were interested to go in for the business after meeting the Communication Depart- Moreover, the Government of Eritrea is ment’s requirements. currently undergoing an exercise to The objective of the Internet service is to transform TSE into a share company. An assist in the creation of an enabling envi- Internationally recognized organization ronment to facilitate electronic networking (KPMG) has undertaken TSE’s business and access to global Information infrastruc- viability, profitability and asset valuation ture technologies; ensure the availability of assessment and has submitted its findings a reliable, competitive and cost effective to the Government in 2001.

Eritrea - 7 103

5 Network development Consequently, the reliability, availability of the network and the overall quality of service is very poor and is deteriorating 5.1 Objectives of the network rapidly. Besides, the capacity of the programme national network is fully utilized.

The prime objective of this programme is Therefore, TSE has drawn a network to enhance the socio-economic develop- development programme which will be ment objectives of the State of Eritrea by implemented in short and medium terms. expanding and modernizing the network The main objective of the programme is so that basic and advanced services are to replace the old switching equipment introduced throughout the country by: and expansion of total digital exchange – Increasing the telephone penetration capacity to meet the majority of forecast from 0.81 to 5 per hundred popula- demand in major cities and towns. The tion nation wide, programme also addresses the replace- – Improving the quality of service, ment of the older microwave systems and expansion of the overall TSE microwave – Introducing advanced services such network to provide a firm base for future as the Internet, network expansion and provision of tele- – Enhancing Eritrea’s connectivity within phone services to a number currently the region and internationally, unserviced towns. – Improving and sustaining the profit- The network development programme ability of TSE against the falling of envisages to encompass the following tariffs and accounting rates worldwide. activities: The initiation of this expansion and modernization programme through the intro- – Installation and Commissioning of a duction of new technology is therefore, to number of digital exchanges having address the above elaborated realities and 150,000 in the short term programme problems. in Asmara, Massawa, Keren, Assab, Dekemhare, Mendefera Adikeih and Senafe and other unserviced towns 5.2 Overview of planned and cities; projects – The installation and commissioning of The Telecommunication Service of Eritrea digital SDH microwave link between has old and obsolete exchange and Asmara, Dekemhare and Mendefera transmission equipment in its existing and the extension of the microwave network. Some of the equipment are first link between Adikeih and Senafe as generation analogue exchanges that are well as between Asmara-Tessenei inherited from the colonial administration route; and were installed in the 1960’s. Even the digital exchanges and the transmission – The introduction of mobile service equipment were manufactured in the covering Asmara, Massawa, Dekem- 1980’s. Since these exchanges and hare, Mendefera, Keren towns and the transmission systems are Y2K non- highway from Asmara to Massawa. compliant they need to be replaced. In The initial capacity of the mobile addition, these equipment are out network will be 30,000 lines; production and hence it is difficult to – Expansion of the National Internet maintain and operate the network as Gateway bandwidth; there are no spare parts available in the market. – The introduction of sophisticated billing With regard to the Outside Plant, the system within TSE; major part of the under ground cable – Planning, Design and implementation network in Asmara is above 30 years old. of access network for 260,000 primary It uses paper insulated cables and is network lines; difficult to repair because the accessories and materials for this technology are not – Fiber optic ring network to connect available in the market. the main switches in Asmara.

104 Eritrea - 8

5.2.1 Switching systems 6 Benefits and The switching systems in the development Beneficiaries Programme in Asmara consist of 4 parent exchanges that will be connected in a mesh The output and benefits from network using fiber optic and 13 Remote implementing this programme are: Subscriber Stages that will be parented to – Raise the telephone density of the the nearest and convenient main switching country to 24% per hundred popula- unit. In Asmara alone the switching tion in Asmara and 5 per hundred capacity will reach up to 110,000 exchange population all over the country. This lines in the short term programme. will impact the socio-economic devel- Besides, the existing national gateway will opment of the nation as the telephone also be replaced and expanded. density has a direct correlation to GDP growth. In the regional centers and other major towns 7 parent exchanges will be installed. – By introducing and expanding Internet In other small towns and villages and other advanced services, the 39 Remote Subscriber Stages appropriate Eritrean society will be linked to the to their population will be installed. Under Global Information Infrastructure tech- the plan these remote units will be hosted nologies which will improve business to their respective regional centers. The competitiveness of the Eritrean overall capacity of the switching systems in companies. the regional centers will be close to 50,000 lines. – The advanced services being introduced will enhance the educational 5.3 Transmission systems and research institutions activities’ (tele-medicine, distance learning The planned transmission project in the e-commerce, etc) nationwide. Network Programme aims at connecting: – The programme will improve the – the digital exchanges in different parts quality of service of the network and of the country via SDH microwave or this will help TSE generate profit and latest technology as a long distance the Government of Eritrea to earn network, income from corporate tax. The public – to meet the regional interest of will also benefit from having efficient COMESA and IGAD member countries and good quality of service. TSE has plans to extend the connectivity of the Eritrean network via Sudan, Ethiopia and Djibouti to the 7 Challenges rest of the continent, The main challenges TSE is facing in – TSE is committed to terminate in operating, maintaining and expanding its Massawa any viable submarine cable network among other things are: that may pass via the Red Sea. It is to be recalled that Eritrea was one of – Difficulty in securing funds for projects, the countries that signed the Letter of Intent to terminate the failed Africa – Lack of skilled personnel in the ONE submarine cable project and has Eritrean market,

also signed the Shareholders’ Agree- ment for the Comtel Project. – Pressing demand from carriers to reduce accounting rates, 5.3.1 External plant – Shortage of training relevant to The external plant project consists of the telecom industry, planning, designing, supply of cables and accessories and installation of 260,000 – Problems in getting spare parts. Sup- primary network lines most of which is in pliers specially Ericsson and Alcatel Asmara. In addition, the supply of pair gain were not willing to provide spare equipment and other wireless technology parts though a contract for the supply including the installation and commission- of spares for the life of the purchased ing are also envisaged. equipment has been signed.

Eritrea - 9 105

Mr Tsegay Desta Bainosay Mr Mussie Woldeslassie Yohannes Planning Manager Transmission Manager Telecom Service of Eritrea Telecom Service of Eritrea Semaetat Street No. 11 Semaetat Street No. 11 P.O. Box 234 P.O. Box 234 ER-ASMARA ER-ASMARA Eritrea Eritrea Tel.: +291 1 202 764 Tel.: +291 1 118 322 Fax: +291 1 120 938 Fax: +291 1 120 938 E-mail: [email protected]

106 Eritrea - 10

Ethiopia

Development through ICT

1. Development through 2. Distance Education ICT Services

As part of the Ethiopian Government’s The broadband infrastructure is primarily strategic move to embrace Information meant to provide connectivity services to and Communication Technologies (ICT) SchoolNet (a national network of Second- for development, a large-scale expansion ary and Vocational schools); EthERNet (a of the telecom infrastructure is underway. national network of higher learning and research institutions), WeredaNet (a na- As it stands today, there is a wide gap be- tional network of government administra- tween what the market demands and tions) and AgriNet (a national network of what the incumbent operator, ETC, pro- agricultural research institutions). vides. For a nation of more than 65 million people, there are only 412,000 telephone In the coming 3 to 6 months all second- lines, 55,000 mobile phone subscribers, ary and vocational schools, institutes of 9,000 Internet customers and 130 data higher learning and agricultural research circuits. institutes are planned to be connected to the above broadband infrastructure. Since To bring about a radical change of this Ethiopia is a vast country, reaching all scenario, there is a plan to increase places through terrestrial means is very capacity of these networks in many folds. difficult. Therefore VSAT is selected both Networks are designed to provide high as a transmission and last mile solution to bandwidth reach to urban and rural sites reach remote sites. Moreover, the VSAT with full carriage of services. Interrelated solution is favored for quick deployment with each other, three distinct broadband of broadband services. Where the terres- infrastructure projects have been con- trial digital data network exists alongside ceived. VSAT, it will be used as a return channel – Broadband VSAT reaching 1,100 sta- to uplink Internet content. tions nationwide. In a supply and installation contract – Broadband digital data network with recently concluded with Hughes Network optical core network. Systems (HNS), 1,110 DIRECWAY VSAT – Broadband Internet. terminals and hub station system were procured to work on Intelsat IS-901 Some of the applications ready to be satellite. To cater for all types of services supported by these networks are Distance such as distance learning, video con- Learning, Interactive Data, Internet conferencing, interactive data and Internet, tent delivery, Video conferencing and the VSAT system is designed with a voice. In providing the required connec- 45Mbps outroute DVB carrier and up to tivity, primary consideration has been 384Kbps inroute DAMA carrier. A sche- given to educational system, health, matic diagram of the VSAT system agricultural research centers and govern- together with the terrestrial system is ment administration offices. shown below.

Ethiopia - 1 107

Configuration of The Proposed Network

Sululta Earth Station

SCPC DVB Mux Modem Remote Earth Station DVB/IP ASI International Encap SDH Teleport ATM LNB BUC Router DVB IRD DVB IRD DAMA

FireWall video

DVB Mux optional Router option SDH DVB/IP FireWall Encapsulator TV Addis up to 8 channels ITMC Router Ababa simultaneously ATM PC VoIP Internet PSTN VoIP Addis Video Gateway Gateway Ababa ATM Conferencing Network PC local Internet Education Video Service Video Streaming Intranet Servers Server (Agriculture, Gov't, schools)

Figure 1 – Configuration of the proposed network

• The service will be provided to more will be encoded either as digital video than 500 secondary and technical (via a suitable DVB encoder) or as IP vocational schools. via a suitable video streaming server.

• The system will have eight video channels, which will carry classroom content to the schools. 3. Government WAN Service • All the remote stations will have the ability to record material locally at The Government network will have school site so that program can be network structures that follow the replayed at their convenience. administrative structure, that is, Federal Government is positioned on the top, • Each video channel will have at least Regional Government comes next then 2 audio channels. Wereda Administration follows.

• Some schools will have a classroom • Each Wereda administration office will that will be organized as an interac- have a local area network called tive classroom (40 students will WRD-LAN. attend the interactive class). The re- • maining classrooms will be set on Several WRD-LAN will form a Regional receive only mode. The interactivity wide area network called REG-WAN. will be one way video and two way • Several REG-WAN will form Federal audio. Two way audio will be provided WAN called FED-WAN. through a suitable VoIP system pro- • There are 594 Weredas in 11 Regions. vided at remote stations. • This network will offer data WAN ser- • The video content will be transmitted vices and IP based video conferencing within the DVB carrier. The content services.

108 Ethiopia - 2

5. Internet Services 4. Agricultural Research Institutes Network Services • 32 sites including the headquarters in All schools (more than 500 sites), all Addis Abeba. Weredas (594 sites), all agricultural re- • Each site has existing LAN to be search institutes (32 sites) and all higher connected to the Headquarter. education institutes (14 sites) will get an Internet service and will share a common • The Headquarter will serve as infor- Internet outbound link. The Internet will mation hub for the remote sites. be delivered from a connection to the • Information at any site will be ac- Internet backbone through DVB/IP carrier cessed from any other site. on terrestrial means.

Mr Abebe Belayneh Mr Tadele Gurara Division Manager D/Managing Director Ethiopian Communications Corporation Ethiopian Telecommunication Corporation P.O. 1047 P.O. 1047 ET-ADDIS ABEBA ET-ADDIS ABEBA Ethiopia Ethiopia

Tel.: +251 1 514 369 Tel.: +251 1 211 321 Fax: +251 1 516 292 Fax: +251 1 504 582 E-mail: [email protected] E-mail: [email protected]

Ethiopia - 3 109

Guyana

Guyana Country Report

1 Basic Country Data 2 Economic Summary

Physical Coordinates: Northern South America, bordering the North Atlantic Recent Economic Developments Ocean, between Suriname, Brazil and Venezuela. Coordinates: 6O 50’ North Guyana is categorized as a lower-middle- 58O 12’ West. income country. It has a population of about 770,000 and a per capita GDP of Area: Total: 214,970 sq km, Land: about US$900. About 90 percent of the 196,850 sq km, Water: 18,120 sq km. For population lives along a narrow coastal purposes of comparison, Guyana is strip, part of which lies below sea level slightly smaller than the State of Idaho and must be protected by over 300 miles of sea defenses. The incidence of poverty, Population: 772,000 (est. 2000) at 35 percent of the population is among the highest in the Western hemisphere. Neighbouring Countries: Brazil to the South-Southwest [land boundary 1,119 km], Suriname to the East [land Guyana is a very open economy [export boundary 600 km], Venezuela to the to GDP ratio in excess of 80 percent). The West-Northwest [land boundary 743 km]. country's exports are concentrated in The Atlantic Ocean to the North sugar, gold, bauxite, lumber and rice, [Coastline: 459 km] making it vulnerable to changes in international commodity prices. Like Natural Resources: bauxite, gold, dia- many other Caribbean countries, Guyana monds, hardwood timber, shrimp, fish will face increased competition in export markets as preferential trading arrange- Ethnic groups: East Indian 51%, black ments with the European Union for key 30%, mixed 14%, Amerindian 4%, white commodities like sugar are eroded. Due and Chinese 1% to uncertain economic prospects and a difficult political situation, Guyana has Official Language: English. Amerindian over the years experienced massive dialects, Creole, Hindi are also spoken. emigration, which has depleted the country's pool of skilled labor and Government type: Republic within the professionals. Commonwealth

Capital: Georgetown Guyana's economy grew by over 7 percent per annum between 1991 and Currency: The Guyana dollar 1997. However, since 1998, economic performance has suffered. Economic Country Code (dialing in): 592 growth averaged less than 0.5 percent over the period 1998-2001. This dismal Mobile Technology: TDMA (one operator), performance is explained by a) terms of CDMA (one operator), and GSM (expected trade shocks, b) drought conditions turn-up, end third quarter 2003) caused by El Niño, c) industrial unrest,

Guyana - 1 111

and d) domestic political disturbances Enhancing governance and strengthening that followed the two general elections public sector Institutions and processes. [1997 and 2001] as well as persistent [For example, strengthening democratic political and ethnic tensions. institutions and processes, encouraging civic participation and increase public

accountability and transparency, and Policy Issues building internal consensus on reform priorities]. Accelerating the modernizing Informed by a long-term National of the judiciary, strengthening the Office Development Strategy, Government has of the Auditor General, improving the recently finalized a Poverty Reduction procurement system, modernizing land- Strategy Paper (PRSP). The overarching titling, and streamlining the civil service goal of the PRSP is to sustain the trend of are some of the critical steps that could poverty reduction achieved between 1992 be taken in the near future. and 1999 by i) stimulating economic growth, ii) strengthening governance and Improving macroeconomic management public sector capacity and accountability, and policy. [For example, efforts aimed at and iii) enhancing the delivery of basic improving fiscal performance, encourage services and improving social safety nets. domestic savings, encouraging foreign direct investment, broadening the tax base, simplify taxes, reducing tax-and- The key policy issues that have emerged tariff exemptions, and improving tax and are: customs administration]. Creating of an enabling environment for Ensuring sustainable development. [For private sector development. [For ex- example, via a) regulation of small scale ample, harmonization of tax incentives mining, logging, wildlife harvesting, and across investor types, greater emphasis freshwater fishing, b) effective sea on rules-based rather than ad-hoc tax defense management, and c) better policies, and acceleration of privatization regulation of private sector investment and strengthening of the regulatory and economic activity in interior areas. framework].

Key Economic Data 1999 2000 2001 2002

Population 770.6 772.2 Population Density (people per sq km) 3.58 3.59 GNI (Current US$ million) 524.6 552.6 GNI per capita (current US$) 760 750 GDP (current US $) 593.6 596.9 GDP Growth (annual %) 3.0 -0.8 Inflation 8.6 5.9 Period Average Exchange Rate (G$/ US$) 180.50 184.75 189.50 191.75

112 Guyana - 2

3 Regulatory Environment

Regulator The Guyana Public Utilities Commission Address Public Buildings, Brickdam, Georgetown, Guyana Telephone (592) 227-3293 Fax (592) 227-3435 E-mail [email protected] Web Site None Main Contacts Mr. Prem Persaud, Chairman, GPUC; Ms. Jennifer Ganpatsingh, Secretary (Ag.) Year Created: 1990 Reports to The Legislature

Budget Approved by: The Legislature Budget Financed by Government subvention and by contributions from the two principal utilities, GT&T and the Guyana Power & Light Co.

Responsibilities Tariff approval, specification of regulatory accounts, consumer protection, universal service, expansion plan approval, interconnection approval, research, investigations, and advising the Policy Maker.

Policy Maker

Regulator The Ministry of Public Works & Communications Address Office of the Prime Minister, Wrights Lane, Kingston, Georgetown, Guyana Telephone (592) 226-6955 Fax (592) 226-7573 E-mail [email protected] Main Contacts The Hon. Prime Minister, Samuel Hinds.

Guyana - 3 113

Status of Services

Services Monopoly Liberalized WTO Commitment Local x In the area of value added services: a) All Domestic Long Distance x foreign suppliers are permitted to interconnect International x to the public telecommunications network, and Mobile x b) online information and data base retrieval Leased Lines x liberalized. Data x In terms of Modes of Service Delivery, a) full VSAT x market access and full national treatment to all DSL x cross-border foreign service providers all Wireless Local Loop x foreign consumers entering Guyana to Paging x consume the specific service, and b) full Cable TV x national treatment to all service providers ISP x granted commercial presence.

Restrictions on Ownership None

Regulatory Overview The arrangements for telecommunications regulation in Guyana is based primarily on a) the Telecommunications The state-owned Guyana-Telecommu- Act of 1990, b) the Public Utilities Act of nications Corporation (GTC) was privat- 1990 (and its subsequent amendments), ized in 1990 after the then Government c) the Purchase Agreement between considered privatization the best strat- Government and the Investor (ATN), and egy for a) improving performance and d) the operating License granted to the service quality, b) enhancing the range GT&T. of service provision, and c) injecting much needed new capital and expertise. The monopoly (exclusivity) model was The main provisions of the Purchase opted for because Government felt that Agreement concern a) the scope of the the company would be unattractive to License to be granted to GT&T, b) the investors if it were to face competition in primacy of the Purchase Agreement over the provision of basic network services. the other documents, and c) conditions Government felt too that the market was relating to pricing [including the guaran- too small [based on population and per teed rate of return and how it is to be capita income] to justify splitting the computed] and services provision [in- company along the lines of geography or cluding an agreed expansion plan]. service. The PUC Act was introduced in 1990 and Recognizing the importance of effective has since been amended on two telecommunication in a situation where occasions (in 1997 and in 1999). The the sector is monopolized, Government Telecommunications Act of 1990 estab- sought to institute a regulatory model lishes among other things, the licensing that would promote consumer welfare regime, procedures for the approval and and minimize the potential for abuse of registration of apparatus, procedures market power. Regulation was also relating to rights of ways and the intended to a) the promote fair compe- acquisition of land, and regulations for tition, b) provide the utility with the provision of cable programming. incentives to improve efficiency, One of its central characteristics is that it c) permit shareholders a reasonable rate caters for a Director of Telecommu- of return, and d) ensure the adequacy of nications whose responsibility it is to, the utility’s funding. among other things, a) monitor license adherence and performance, b) promote

114 Guyana - 4

the interest of consumers in respect of limited to, a) universal service, b) prices and quality of service, c) oversee provision of public call boxes, c) public matters related to interconnection and emergency call service, d) maritime determine reasonable terms in the event service, e) interconnection, and f) inter- that agreement cannot be reached national obligations. It also stipulates between parties. To date, this Office has conditions that guard against transfer never been filled. pricing, unfair cross subsidization, and predatory pricing and sets out the GT&T’s operating License sets out it procedures for License revocation. The exclusivities [including international License insofar as it relates to exclusive voice and data transmission and sale of services is for twenty years [and subject advertising in telephone directories] as to renewal]. And, insofar as other well as its rights and responsibilities in a services are concerned, for a period of number of areas including, but not ten years [with the option of renewal].

4 Telecom Statistics

2002 General Telecom Revenues (US$ ‘000) NA Total Telephone Subscribers 194,443 Total Telephone Penetration (%) 89.4

Fixed Network Main Telephone Lines 87,819 Main Lines Penetration (%) 50.5 Main Lines Growth (annual %) 8 % of Digital Lines 100

Mobile Network Mobile Subscribers 106,624 Mobile Penetration (%) 61.3 Mobile Growth (annual %) 45 % of Total Telephone Subscribers 54.8

Internet Internet Subscribers NA Internet Users NA Internet Penetration NA Internet Growth NA Internet Hosts NA Personal Computers NA

Traffic Minutes International Outgoing (‘000) 21,834 International Incoming (‘000) 100,229

Rates Accounting Rate with USA (US$/min) 0.23 Collection Charge to the USA (US$/min) 0.55

Guyana - 5 115

5 Telecom Market There is competition too in the markets for customer premises equipment (CPE) Overview and GT&T is encouraging the Regulator GT&T’s operating License does not grant to encourage competition in the area of the company a monopoly over all internal wiring. Government and GT&T telecommunications services in Guyana. have also collaborated to facilitate the All markets with the exception of local, licensing of non-interconnected VSAT local long distance, and international are operators to provide international con- open to competition. To date, in addition nectivity to call centers. to GT&T, cellular mobile licenses have been issued to a) Caribbean Telecom- The current legal framework and GT&T’s munications Limited [license for CDMA operating License notwithstanding, over network issued April 1996], b) Caribbean the last three years GT&T has experi- Wireless Telecom, LLC. [PCS license enced a significant level of competition issued April 2000], and c) Cel*Star to its international telephone service Guyana Inc. [license for GSM network business. Technological advances permit issued February 2001]. Voice on Net and Voice over Internet To date, no significant competition has Protocol (VOIP) services. Current esti- developed in cellular mobile telecommu- mates suggest that these illegal nication. Indeed, only one of the three operations account for in excess of operators have so far turned up service 100,000 minutes of outbound traffic per [a modest operation with roughly 200 month. This international voice competi- subscribers and no network built out] tion continues to proliferate, despite its that is restricted to one geographic illegality, because the regulatory bodies region [Berbice] of the country. The are “turning a blind eye.” There are too absence of a clear regulatory framework operators that provide direct Internet and the inability to finance network roll- access via VSAT links that bypass GT&T’s out are the principal factors inhibiting network. competition. GT&T has just concluded an interconnection agreement with Cel*Star. GT&T remains the only operator with an There is active competition in the obligation for universal service. However, Internet Service Providers (ISP) market. the recent precipitous decline in interna- However, based on the operating license tional settlement rates, the regulator’s it holds, GT&T is the sole operator with reluctance to initiate meaningful domes- authority to purchase Internet bandwidth tic rate rebalancing, regulatory failure to from the Internet Backbone Access have other operators and/or Government providers in North America and Europe. make a contribution to this laudable Therefore, GT&T provides a wholesale goal, and increasing network and settle- Internet service and the ISPs resell the ment bypass all conspire to limit the bandwidth to end-users. universalization of access.

6 Key Player Profile

Company Name: Guyana Telephone & Telegraph Co. Ltd.

Company Details Address Telephone House, 79 Brickdam [PO Box 10628], Georgetown, Guyana

Telephone: (592) 225-1315 Fax: (592) 225-0190 Web Site: www.gtt.co.gy

116 Guyana - 6

Company Profile: Established 1991 as a network operator and service provider and authorized to be sole provider of local, local long-distance, and international telephony.

Key Businesses: Local, local long-distance, and international telephony; Telephone Directory (White & Yellow pages); PBX; mobile; data; public phones; Interconnection; maritime; wholesale of Internet bandwidth,

Employee Headcount 650

Contacts GM/CEO: Ms. Sonita Jagan DGM Operations: Mr. Gerry DeFreitas Director Business Mr. Eustace Abrams Dev.

Director Sales & Mr. Michael George Marketing: Legal/Regulatory Mr. Godfrey Statia Consultant:

Key Shareholders Atlantic Tele-Network A holding company registered in the USA that has the following (ATN) subsidiaries and affiliates: GT&T, Wireless World LLC, Atlantic Tele-Centre, Bermuda Digital Communications, ATN Haiti

Shares Held: 80 % Government of – Guyana

Shares Held: 20 %

7 The National The transport network connecting the switching nodes consist of single-mode Telecommunications fibre optic systems configured in four Network main rings to provide route limited diversity in the event of major equip- GT&T provides the national telecom- ment failure or fibre cable damage. munications network. Within a period of The access network consists of mixed roughly 10 years, the company has gauge [mainly 24-gauge for distribution brought Guyana a modern, digital tele- and 26- gauge for feeder distribution] communications network employing fibre copper cables. Nortel’s Fixed Wireless optic cables, digital microwave radios, Access (FWA) technology and a Fixed and digital satellite systems for purposes Cellular network are also used to serve a of transport. The access network in- number of areas. Intelsat DAMA Mesh cludes fibre rings employing SDH Connection is deployed to serve remote technology, which serves the entire regions of the country. Fibre cables country. employing SONET technology serve the The switching network employs SS-7 main commercial centers in Georgetown. signaling configured with 3 DMS-100s GT&T operates a TDMA cellular network and 2 DMS-200 switches. These switches in cellular band B in the 800 MHz range. support numerous International Line The network comprises a DMS-MTX Control Modules (IRLCM) and Interna- Switch and 20 cell sites. The network tional Outside Plant Modules (IOPM) to provides coverage that is almost seam- provide a total switching capacity of over less along the coast and is estimated to 90,000 lines. Total working lines cur- provide portable quality coverage to rently stands at 87,810 and the network approximately 15 percent of the country. capacity is being increased continuously.

Guyana - 7 117

The company’s Data Network (in service Barbados. The Americas II Cable since 1999) is based on Nortel's Passport provides direct routes and lease services Switches and has a present capacity of to countries in North America and 160 ports. This network comprises of Trinidad and Tobago. fifteen nodes, configured to provide Frame Relay services. Data rates be- Both Earth Stations employ digital tech- tween 64K and 2Mb are provided via a nology and modern standard-B anten- copper loop. Fibre interconnection allows nas. These Earth Stations provide leased for data rates of up to 10Mb. circuits and carry PSTN traffic to the principal international destinations in GT&T's Internet Gateway was installed in North America, Europe, and the December 1996 and the first ISP was Caribbean. The Earth Stations carry connected in January 1997. At its private network traffic using IBS Carriers inception, this gateway was connected to and PSTN traffic using QPSK/IDR the Internet backbone via a 256K Carriers. By end-2003 both Earth Satellite link since there was no fibre Stations will be equipped with TCM/IDR connection to Guyana at that time. The carrier. The international transport net- network was designed to provide work provides for direct routes to 64/128 K links to ISPs and corporate 8 countries that account for over clients via a lease line. 90 percent of our traffic. The remaining traffic is transit switched. The network has grown to meet the bandwidth demands of ISPs and other The Georgetown Earth Station (in com- dedicated users and currently has a bination with VSAT facilities in four 20Mb capacity to the Internet Backbone. interior communities) forms part of the This capacity comprises links via the domestic network in that it provides Americas II cable and a redundant path service to interior locations using the via Satellite. Intelsat (DAMA) satellite facilities.

Consequent upon a steady decline in the GT&T operates a TDMA cellular network demand for telex and telegram services in cellular band B in the 800 MHz range. and notification by international corre- The network comprises a DMS-MTX spondents of their inability to support Switch and 20 cell sites and it has a these services at the “far end,” GT&T current capacity of 115,000 customers. ceased to offer telex and telegram The network provides coverage that is services in 2002. The Company contin- almost seamless along the coast and is ues to discharge its obligation to estimated to provide portable quality maintain Maritime services. coverage to approximately 15 percent of the country. The network now serves International switching is provided by a some 107,000 customers. DMS-300 digital switch that employs CCS-7 signaling connections (both to the international environment and to the two Success Stories and Pressing DMS-200s in Georgetown and New Problems Amsterdam). Appropriate software is used with DCMEs to control traffic quality The extent of network modernization on major international satellite and fibre that the company has achieved and the cable routes. The switch is equipped with continuous roll-out of the national the full range of network maintenance network in the face of uneconomic and management capabilities. domestic rates, the FCC’s Benchmark Order [which reduced settlement rate on The international transport network the principal route from US$0.85/minute consists of the capacity GT&T’s owns in to US$0.23/minute], and increasing the Americas 1 Cable, the Columbus II network and settlement bypass that Cable, the Antilles Cable, the Americas II escapes regulatory sanction, are among cable, and the Eastern Caribbean Fibre the company’s greatest successes. System (ECFS) and two Standard “B” Another success story for the company, Earth Stations. The ECFS provides an and indeed the country, is the alternative transport medium for service positioning of mobile cellular service as a between Trinidad and Tobago and mass-based service, consequent upon

118 Guyana - 8

the company’s introduction of lower of markets for basic telecommunications rates, calling party pays billing, and pre- [including local, long-distance and inter- paid service. national voice and data transmission services] is deemed critical. Among the major challenges to the continued modernization of telecom- The Government endorses the Free munications in Guyana and the contin- Trade Area of the Americas (FTAA) and ued universalization of access are has made modest commitments under a) regulatory reluctance to initiate the WTO. meaningful rate rebalancing and other Government has commenced a review of regulatory uncertainty, and b) the its policies and approaches to the sector erosion of international telephony reve- with a view to developing a new national nues occasioned by bypass via telecommunications strategy. It is antici- alternative procedures [Voice on Net, pates that at the end of this process, VOIP, “leaky” PBXs]. there would result a) the introduction of a clear National Telecommunications 8 Prognosis for Policy that underpins the introduction of market-based reforms, b) a renegotiated Guyana’s GT&T license that shortens the exclusiv- Telecommunications ity period, c) a move to cost-based/cost Sector oriented pricing of telecommunications services, d) an orderly (phased) transi- The Government pf Guyana has indi- tion to competitive service provision in cated its subscription to the new tele- all markets, e) Introduction of price-cap communications paradigm that focuses regulation, and f) strengthening, reor- on the trade in telecommunications ganizing, and re-orienting regulatory services. Consequently, the opening up institutions.

Mr Osafo Braithwaite Mr Gene Evelyn Assistant Engineer Director National Frequency Management Unit Rate Making 68 Hadfield St.-D'Urban Park Guyana Telephones and Telegraph GY-GEORGETOWN P.B. 10628 Guyana GY-GEORGETOWN Guyana

Tel.: +592 226 3976 Fax: +592 226 7661 Tel.: +592 227 0514 E-mail: [email protected] Fax: +592 225 0190 E-mail: [email protected]

Guyana - 9 119

India

Indian telecommunications: On the threshold of a new revolution

1. India is today one of the most TRAI’s responsibilities also include regu- liberalized telecom markets in the world. lating tariffs and interconnection between With a growth of more than 100 per cent different operators. It also gives its in the mobile service sector during the recommendations to the department of last financial year, it is probably the telecommunications on various policy fastest growing high potential telecom related issues. market in the world. While government policies surely have played a big role in 1.3 India’s telecom sector can be this, the role of incumbents and the classified into the following categories: private service providers also cannot be – Govt. owned/controlled large under- discounted. Even though not really free of takings called Public Sector Undertak- problems, the opening up of the sector to ings (PSUs). competition has largely meant better and cheaper telecom services for the people of – Integrated private service providers India. that are regional or national level players, including joint venture com- 1.1 Last decade was very significant panies with foreign telecom enter- for the Indian telecom sector from the prises. point of view of liberalization. It went through fundamental structural and insti- – Smaller players offering one or more tutional reforms. It was in 1994 that the value added services. government realized the need for opening – Equipment manufacturers, including up of the market for competition. Conse- foreign companies operating in India quently, National telecom Policy NTP through subsidiaries and joint (1994) was formulated. NTP 1994 paved ventures. way for introducing competition in fixed line and mobile telecom services. By 1.4 There are over 80 operational 1996, private telecom operators were entities in this sector, which includes providing services in most of the states in 4 International Long Distance Operators, India. In 1999, need was felt to review 4 National Long Distance Operators, NTP 1994. The result was a new telecom 41 Basic Service Licensees, 25 Cellular policy NTP (1999). The current regulatory Licensees besides numerous equipment environment allows the entry of private manufacturers, Internet Service Provid- companies in all areas of telecom services ers, etc. including international & national long distance communications and equipment 1.5 In its march towards further manufacturing. liberalization of telecom sector, the Telecom Regulatory Authority of India 1.2 The Telecom Sector operates (TRAI) is now proposing a new licensee under the overall policy directive formu- regime – unified license i.e. a single lated by the Ministry of Communications operating license which may cover fixed, & IT. Telecom Regulatory Authority of mobile, domestic long distance and India (TRAI) is responsible for ensuring international long distance and create level playing field for all the operators. uniform rules for all the players. Now, the

India - 1 121

Indian telecom sector is becoming a loss was BSNL’s gain, then only around 4 happening place with lots of activities in per cent of BSNL’s new subscribers in the various segments taking place. In the two months came from the other Indian perspective, the rolling out of operators. mobile services and Business Process Outsourcing (BPO) business can very well 2.3 What is also unique about BSNL’s be considered as success stories. success is the fact that while almost all Indian operators have majority of their cellular subscribers preferring pre paid 2. Incumbent’s success connections, BSNL’s majority of the subscribers are of the post-paid variety. story in a highly According to one estimate, 55 per cent of competitive market its subscribers have post-paid connection while market leader, a Private Cellular 2.1 The success of Bharat Sanchar Company, had just 24 per cent post-paid Nigam Limited (BSNL), the government- subscribers at the end the financial year owned incumbent fixed line and national 2002- 2003. long distance service provider, as a GSM 2.4 It would be pertinent here to wireless service provider is a unique case discuss the reasons behind BSNL’s not just in India but in the whole world. success with its mobile services. What No where in the world, an incumbent has made so many people prefer a state succeeded in a market that is already operator that is considered to be crowded with private competitors. In past relatively less market savvy and customer nine months (BSNL started its mobile friendly? One reason was that in most service in October 2002), BSNL has not places BSNL’s competitors did not take it only added more than three million seriously. subscribers to become India’s second largest cellular operator but has also 2.5 However, attributing BSNL’s suc- created an entirely new market for itself. cess only to complacency of its rivals Its success stories have reached those would mean undermining the other places where it is not an operator. For ingredients behind its success. In my view instance, in places like Delhi and Mumbai, the tariff plans designed by BSNL that the prospective subscribers and the sub- lowered the entry costs for new scribers of existing services, who have subscribers has been one of the major grudges against their existing operators, factors behind its success. The waiver of want BSNL’s services. A report recently deposits for its existing landline custom- mentioned how at a BSNL run PCO at ers has also provided an incentive for Mumbai Airport, the attendant was busy customers to avail of mobile services, as answering inquiries about BSNL’s Cell One it dramatically lowers entry costs. BSNL mobile service even though Mumbai does tariffs have not just been low, it is also not fall in BSNL’s mobile service network. simple to understand. There was no hidden cost in its tariff plans. In price 2.2 Of BSNL’s 3.1 million subscribers th sensitive market like India offering ser- (till June 30 ) 90 per cent are first time vices at a cost that customers perceive to mobile users. An analysis by India’s be cheap and affordable is very premier telecom magazine Voice & Data important. BSNL appears to have realized shows that during the February- March this very well. Also, unlike the private 2003 more than 95 per cent of customers operators, BSNL offered simple tariff that BSNL added to its kitty were new packages. Contrast that with private users. The magazine reported that during operators, some of who offer some 80 the February-March period, there were tariff plans, each more complex then the only nine instances where there was a other. Given all this, BSNL tariff appeared decline in the subscriber base of an attractive to the lower middle and middle- operator where BSNL had its service, income group subscribers, the group that excluding Chennai and Calcutta. The total is supposed to represent India’s huge decline was to the tune of just 37823 potential subscriber base. subscribers, while BSNL added a total of 985197 subscribers during the period. If 2.6 BSNL’s thrust on network design we presume that the private operators’ and coverage also paid off. Spread across

122 India - 2

the length and breadth of the country, companies globally as compared to any BSNL cellular service was taken to some other outsourcing destination country. 1100 towns and cities in just six months. Some of the key unique Indian out- It designed its network in such a way that sourcing advantages are: it covered areas where there was lot of people movement but were beyond city or 3.3.2 Abundant Skilled Manpower town limits like highways. Rolling out network in places where there was either India’s English speaking manpower rates no service or the private operator was not high in areas such as qualifications, active enough also helped in notching up capabilities, quality of work and work numbers. ethics. India produces in excess of 2 m graduates per year. This places India 2.7 While it would still take some time ahead of competitors such as Singapore, to know what kind of impact BSNL’s Hong Kong, China, Philippines, Mexico, success in the mobile services will have Ireland, Australia and Holland, among on its overall business, especially in terms others. of bottom line. However, BSNL’s efforts in the mobile business should be praised for 3.3.3 Infrastructure two important reasons – one, it has successfully created a new class of mobile The fast track growth in the Indian users by going to new places and second, telecom and physical infrastructure area it has shown the world that a right is fast bringing it on par with other approach can help even incumbents win countries. tough business battles. 3.3.3.1 Telecoms 3. Telecom Fuels Growth The successful liberalization of both mobile and fixed lines as well as in Business Process International services and Long Distance Outsourcing has been the key success factor in the growth achieved in IT and ITES services. 3.1 It is now a fact that India is the Today there are 4 operators in ILD back-office hub of the world. The services and multiple operators in mobile Business Process Outsourcing (BPO) and fixed lines. Prices have been steadily industry, which is also called IT-enabled declining. Services, is estimated to grow by around 65 per cent year on year. Indian BPO 3.3.3.2 Civil Infrastructure firms are now equipped with world class infrastructure for providing high quality Software technology parks have come up service at competitive price. Companies in most metros and capital cities – giving from Europe and US are increasingly significant benefits to users – and enabled opting to outsource their critical business high quality office spaces to come up process related work. which have centralized power and telecom facilities. 3.2 NASSCOM, the apex association of Indian IT companies, estimates that for 3.3.4 Quality 2002-03 the ITES services were Rs.11300 crores (2.5Bn $) – which was an increase Indian companies have unique capabilities of 59% over the 2001-02 exports of Rs and systems for setting, measuring and 7100 crores (1.51 Bn $). NASSCOM monitoring quality targets. NASSCOM projects that BPO exports would touch 21 (National Association for Software Ser- to 24 Bn $ by 2008. The employment vices Companies) in India is working with generated by the sector is estimated to international certification agencies to set be 171000 in 2002- 03. It is expected to standards such as COPC and eSCM (from increase to 1.1 mn by 2008. Carnegie Mellon University). This will no doubt replicate the success that India has 3.3 The Indian Advantages had in software where India has more than 50% of CMM Level 5 centres. This 3.3.1 India currently offers the builds up confidence in Indian delivery of strongest value proposition to outsourcing services.

India - 3 123

3.3.5 Productivity – Simplification of reporting for call centres registered. In certain categories, Indian centers have achieved higher productivity levels, for – Allow ITES companies to access example, the number of transactions Internet on same LAN in India – completed per hour for back office leading to savings. processing, as compared to their Western – Allow ITES companies and IT compa- counterparts. McKinsey NASSCOM esti- nies of the same group to share mates that for certain UK/US banks the telecom bandwidth. no of transactions per hour is higher by – Enable hot stand by facilities to come 20% on a like to like basis. Similarly the up to serve the needs for Disaster no of correct transaction is 98% in India Recovery. vs. 95% in UK/US. – Enable centres belonging to different group to connect for disaster recovery 3.3.6 Efficiency situations. India is capable of offering a 24x7 service Many new initiatives are under way for and reduction in turnaround times by further simplifying procedures and enable leveraging time zone differences. India's Indian companies to remain competitive unique geographic positioning makes this in the international arena. possible. 3.3.9 Labour laws 3.3.7 Government Incentives Govt has allowed ITES companies to The Indian Government has provided employ women in the night working – incentives such as income tax holiday with many states passing legislation to until 2010 for the export of IT Enabled enable this without hindrance. This has Services. The Government of India has led to significant employment opportuni- announced a special policy for call center ties. services. Many state governments in India 3.3.10 BPO service providers depend are offering incentives and infrastructure heavily on telecom resources to deliver for setting up IT enabled services. For their services. In fact, telecom is the life- example there is no duty payable for blood of any BPO operation. The growth import of capital equipment for ITES in telecom infrastructure, therefore, has services under the STPI scheme. been the most significant reason behind the emergence of India as a favorite BPO 3.3.8 Dept of Telecom initiatives destination of the world during the past five years. BPO companies can today rely The scheme for Call centres has been on widely available, cheaper and more simplified tremendously by the DOT – reliable telecom services. cases in instance are:

Mr Rabindra Nath Jha Mr Jayant Kumar Director Director Department of Telecom Department of Telecom OSP LRO Sanchar Bhavan, Ashoka Road Room No. 1006 IN-NEW DELHI-1 20 Ashoka Road India IN-NEW DELHI India

Tel.: +91 11 237 10 596 Fax: +91 11 237 10 417 Tel.: +91 11 233 72 601 E-mail: [email protected] Fax: +91 11 233 59 454

124 India - 4

Indonesia

Indonesia’s country report on the Internet development

1 Policy and regulatory 1.3 The Internet Applications framework The Indonesian Government has established a national team for telecommu- 1.2 The Internet nications and informatics to encourage The Internet has been stated as a pro- the use of information Technology (IT) for gram of priority because of its important government offices and proliferation of role in the globalization of economy and Internet access for the Indonesian soci- information. The biggest challenge is to ety. Followings are the application of the provide a telecommunications infrastruc- Internet in Indonesia: ture for accessing the internet in the form of community access centre. The govern- • Public services such as E-Government, ment offers the use of the internet to national ID system, and computerized many communities such as universities, system Home Affairs. schools, businesses and employees. It also endorses the growth of content- • Social empowerment such as tele- based businesses that will empower the education, cyber universities, and tele- emergence of the information society. The medicine. growth of the internet in Indonesia has significantly increased. The government has provided licenses for 139 Internet • Electronic-commerce (e-commerce) and Service Providers (ISP). Currently, there electronic Data Interchange (EDI). are 109 ISPs already in operation supported by approximately 800,000 sub- • Wide Information Systems such as scribers. In order to increase the Internet Geographical Information System, and users, Universal Service Obligation (USO) and the Internet Kiosks will be encour- • National Security and Defense such as aged to promote the proliferation of the Information system for trained people internet networks to many cities and and public security. villages.

1.4 E-Commerce Approximately 2,550 private individuals or organizations have established kiosks to provide internet services for the public. IT applications are frequently used within Although the registered number of Inter- business practice in Indonesia, many net subscribers is 800,000, it is estimated companies apply on-line shopping, Inter- that there are more than three million net banking and on-line business to daily Internet users. operations. Business on the Internet is

Indonesia - 1 125

also advancing, encouraged by the pres- information sources for Indonesians ence of free Internet access. The govern- who live in villages. ment does not restrict on-line business information services and always support any organization or business that make efforts to promote and boost the use of 2.3 Private initiatives Internet and E-commerce. • Technology diffusion to individuals

and households: The IT kiosk called Warintek is a mode of Internet Kiosks 2 Digital divide developed by the Indonesian Institute of Science and Research (LIPI) and endorsed by the Ministry of Research 2.1 General Policies and Technology. It is aimed to build The Telecommunications Law No. 36/ 9,000 kiosks in villages across 1999 was implemented in September Indonesia. 2000 to improve the business environ- • The Association of Internet Providers ment. endorsed by the Ministry of Education has launched a program called Sekolah 2000 (School 2000), which aims to invite 2,000 schools from all 2.2 Government Initiatives over Indonesia each year to be con- • Centre of IT development: By Presi- nected to Internet services with lower dential Instruction No. 1/2001, the cost connections. government has initiated a Multimedia • Millenium Internet Roadshow (MIR): City or Cyber City by providing a This program is aimed to distribute grant of 1,500 acres of land including knowledge of IT and Internet by using IT infrastructure, located in Kema- easy and cheap media Compact Disc yoran, an area in old Jakarta Airport. (CDs). The CDs containing IT materi- A cyber city, which will be developed als are distributed to societies through by private institutions will provide events such as seminars and exhibi- facilities for many business points tions. Its contents are also displayed with broadband access and services. on-line for use any time. This business includes: development of IT software, computers and accessories suppliers, “Indonesian Silicon Valley”, and IT school and training centre. 3 Conclusion • Other initiatives in developing IT • centers are Bandung High Tech Valley Top level political leaders should have (BHTV) in Bandung and Parahyangan awareness of the importance of IT Multimedia Centre near Bandung. (Internet) use. Currently, a centre for IT software de- • The government of Indonesia is con- velopment has been developed by a cerned with the use of IT in particular private enterprise and called Bali- the Internet as a tool to bridge the camp, in Bali. digital divide. • The use of Bahasa Indonesia for • Program of the use of IT (Internet) in content. every field can only be executed by • By including the Presidential Instruc- involving all related stake-holders: tion No. 2/2001, the government en- government – private sectors – society. courages programmed software in In- • For least developed and developing donesia as well as more Indonesian- countries, the use of Internet can only based language contents. Indonesian be executed when the illiteracy issue contents are especially applied for is already tackled.

126 Indonesia - 2

Mr Ade Darmadji Darya Mr Bahtiak Manurung Head of Bilateral Section for Posts, Staff Services Telecommunication Telecom & Informatics Directorate General of Posts and Directorate General of Posts and Telecommunications (POSTEL) Telecommunications (POSTEL) JL. Medan Merdeka Barat No. 17 JL. Medan Merdeka Barat N. 17, Lt.5 ID-10110 JAKARTA ID-10110 JAKARTA Indonesia Indonesia Tel.: +62 21 383 5070 Tel.: +62 21 323 5211 Fax: +62 21 386 2873 Fax: +62 21 386 0721 E-mail: [email protected] E-mail: [email protected]

Indonesia - 3 127

Kazakhstan

Telecommunication Development Country Report for Kazakhstan

Internet for everyone Kazakhstan is made up chiefly of specialists and business users, followed by students. One is far less likely, on the other 1 Introduction hand, to come across workers, pensioners, housewives and unemployed people on A great deal of discussion is currently Kazakhstan’s Internet scene. being focused on the influence that new information technologies have on the life of human beings and society. 2.1 The Internet user community in Kazakhstan The way of life of many people and the opportunities that are open to them have The core of the Internet community in significantly changed with the emergence Kazakhstan: 1.6% ± 0.4% of the adult of broad access to information services, population in the country’s major cities, and, while in our country the number of i.e. 60.7 ± 15.2 thousand people. The such people is still being measured in small core community consists of those who percentages, in the developed countries we regularly connect to the Internet, spend- are looking at double-figure percentages ing at least three hours a week on it, or _ a fact that simply cannot be ignored. visiting daily.

Research on the Internet community The active Internet community in and its communication environment in Kazakhstan: 3.7% ± 0.6% of the adult Kazakhstan is being carried out on a long- population in the country’s major cities, term and regular basis. The uniqueness of i.e. 140.3 ± 22.7 thousand people. The this study lies in the fact that, for the first active community consists of those who time in Kazakhstan, a survey has been regularly, and at least once a week, visit carried out both outside the Net and the Internet. within the Net itself (by means of online interactive interviews). The regular Internet community in Kazakhstan: 5.3% ± 0.8% of the adult In this way, the results obtained give a population in the country’s major cities, i.e. more objective picture of the Internet 200.9 ± 30.3 thousand people. The regu- user community and its environment in lar community describes those users who Kazakhstan. regularly visit the Internet, be it only a few times a month. The SpyLog company, a leading provider of statistics on the 2 The Internet Russian-language Internet, put the number community in of unique visitors from Kazakhstan in Kazakhstan and January 2001 at 145 thousand. its environment The maximum Internet community in Kazakhstan: 10.4% ± 1.2% of the adult From the research carried out to date it population in the country’s major cities, emerges that the Internet community in i.e. 394.3 ± 45.5 thousand people. The

Kazakhstan - 1 129

maximum community refers to anyone Internet users in Kazakhstan include who has visited the Internet, including people from both high-income and those who have visited it on only one low-income groups, but the proportion of occasion. users constituted by people with a high income per family member (above The information that circulates on the 7 000 Tenge) goes up with increasing Internet is accessible not only to those regularity and duration of Internet use. who themselves visit the Internet (i.e. who belong to the core, active, regular or maximum community). Through personal The maximum Internet community in contacts and family, the information that Kazakhstan is dominated by salaried is gleaned from the Internet, for example employees and specialists, who make up on goods that are on sale in electronic 30%. The next largest group is students, shops, becomes accessible also to those at 26.8%. Managers and businessmen who themselves do not visit the Internet make up 22%, which gives their social but who have friends and relatives who group the third-largest representation. regularly do so. Thus, in order to gain a Pensioners and invalids make up 1.6%. more comprehensive picture of the extent of which the Internet has an influence on For the past half year a significant the people of Kazakhstan, the study also increase was observed in the proportion looked at the communicative environment of students; since this survey was (both immediate and extended) of the conducted during the time when students country’s Internet community. What we were preparing for the summer term, it are talking about here is the number of may be concluded that those students people who, while having no personal actively used the Internet to find experience of the Internet, are able to information in preparing their examina- obtain information about events on the tions and dissertations. Internet from friends and family members who have found that information on the Internet. 3 Internet utilization by The immediate environment of the Internet community in Kazakhstan repre- region sents 18% ± 1.4% of the adult population in the country’s major cities, i.e. The largest proportion of users throughout 682.5 ± 53.1 thousand people. The im- the Internet community comes from mediate environment refers to those Almaty. The new capital, Astana, is not yet people who themselves do not use the as well represented as Almaty, but it is Internet, but whose friends include at interesting to note that it is particularly least three regular Internet users. well represented within the regular Internet community, with managers and The extended environment of the Internet specialists employed by national govern- community in Kazakhstan represents 42% ment bodies and in the offices of national ± 1.4% of the adult population in the companies making up a significant country’s major cities, i.e. 1 592.4 ± 53.1 portion. thousand people. The extended environment refers to those people who themselves do not use the Internet, but Analysis of the geographic distribution of whose friends include at least one regular the zone of influence of the Internet Internet user. The extended environment among the adult population in the (1 592 thousand) is over four times the size country’s major cities leads to the conclu- of the maximum community of Internet sion that the Internet community is not users in Kazakhstan (360 thousand). evenly distributed among the regions of Kazakhstan. The zone of influence of the It is the communicative environment Internet is particularly weak in northern of Kazakhstan’s Internet user com- and central Kazakhstan. It is particularly munity which has seen the most sig- dense in the population of the cities of nificant rise in the last half-year, Almaty (26.3%), Astana (16.9%) and the from 847.5 thousand to 745.0 thou- major urban centres of western and sand individuals. eastern Kazakhstan.

130 Kazakhstan - 2

4 Growth of the regular Online shops began to appear in 2000, conducting retail commerce in the community “business to consumer” category; their Even cursory statistics about the develop- number is increasing with every month. ment of the Internet in Kazakhstan Six years of development of the Internet in provide a clear picture of the runaway Kazakhstan have allowed ordinary citizens, character of the growth process of this the business community, non-government new sector of telecommunications. organizations and the government to learn a great deal about the Internet, state-of- The number of regular Internet users the-art telecommunication technologies and their promise for contemporary (monthly use) increased from 10 000 in society. Domestic and foreign companies 1996 to 117 000 at the end of 2002. Even more spectacularly, the number of hosts annually invest tens of millions of dollars in (meaning the so-called real hosts) in the Kazakh information and telecommunication KZ domain increased from seven regis- companies. tered in January 1995 to 8 385 in March Over the past six months the sustained 2003, an increase of three orders of growth trend of recent years in the regular magnitude. The number of Internet Internet community experienced a renewed service providers has reached hundreds, surge in Kazakhstan. From October to April including several companies possessing the number of servers increased by more licences for the provision of IP telephony than 70%, reaching 209 000 individuals. services.

Ms Svetlana Dubrovina Ms Yelena Volkova Head of Radiofrequency Spectrum Use Head of Licensing Standardization and Planning Unit Certification Unit Committee for Communications and Planning Unit Informatization Committee for Communications and Informatization 71, Averoz Street KZ-ASTANA, 473000 71, Averoz Street Kazakhstan KZ-ASTANA, 473000 Kazakhstan Tel.: +7 31 721 57 475/157731 Fax: +7 31 723 33 066 Tel.: +7 31 721 57 464 E-mail: [email protected] Fax: +7 31 723 33 066 E-mail: [email protected]

Kazakhstan - 3 131

Kenya

Internet for all: Public Internet Access

Introduction Technologies in schools and institutions of higher learning in Kenya. Information and Communications Tech- nologies (ICTs) is an enabler to both socio-economic development in any coun- 2 Infrastructure try and Kenya as a country is not an exception. The following are key issues to the development of ICTs: Access, i.e. availability and affordability of telecommunications infrastructure and services underlies the growth of ICT 1 Regulatory Policy services. The strategy should be to build focused network infrastructure capacity The Communications Commission of for key sectors including education and Kenya (CCK), which is the telecommu- health. This infrastructure should include nication regulatory body in Kenya, has telephone lines, leased data lines and the the mandate of creating an enabling Internet backbone based on cost effective regulatory environment. The introduction leading edge technologies. of a new telecommunication market structure in December 2001,has created new The Commission guided by the Telecom- areas of investment in the communi- munications and Postal Sector Policy cations sector in the country, introduced Statement of 2001, through obligations competition and increase private sector given to network providers aims at im- involvement, which is expected to impact proving the availability of efficient reliable on the growth of the ICT sector. telecommunication services by increasing As part of its role the Commission is the number of lines per 100 people from expected to provide support to private the current 0.16 lines in rural areas to and public sector initiatives aimed at 1 line and from the present 4 lines per spurring growth in the communications 100 people to 20 lines in urban areas by sector and transferring technological ad- the year 2015. This objective will be vantages and opportunities to Kenyans. It achieved through the installation of ap- is in fulfilling this role that the Com- proximately 3 million new lines and liber- mission has been involved in the imple- alization of the telecommunication sector. mentation of regulatory policies such as the granting of special consideration for The Commission in addition looks forward VSAT networks used for social services to encouraging the use of wireless access including tele-education and libraries, technologies in future as this require telemedicine, public services such as minimal implementation and maintenance intra-government, civil aviation, mete- cost and can provide services where other orology and disaster management. Con- telecommunication infrastructure on cable sequently the Commission is involved in is unavailable. These technologies include projects aimed at promoting the deploy- VSAT, Wireless Local Loop (WLL) and ment of Information and Communication Spread Spectrum Technologies (SST).

Kenya - 1 133

3 Hardware 5 Economy and Politics In fulfilling the Government’s commitment Access to fixed telephone whose pen- to expand educational opportunities and etration now stands at 1.1 is still very low achieve free universal primary education while computers are still found in office in Kenya, there are proposals to use rather than homes. However the govern- Information and Communication Techno- ment has zero-rated import duty charged logies as the intervention measure to deal on computers in an effort to promote ICTs with the challenges currently facing the (Information and Communication Techno- educational sector in Kenya. logies) development in the country. It is hoped that the growth of the Internet industry will be achieved owing to the current stability, openness and consist- 4 Human Resource ency in economic, legal and political institutions to foster a low-risk business ICTs involve the rapid deployment of and investment climate spearheaded by computer based learning facilities that the new government. would advance teaching methodologies and improve access to infinite database of learning materials. 6 ICTs For Development: There are proposals to improve and Public Internet Access expand education and training to develop a critical mass of knowledgeable workers, In any society Communication is the tool technology users and motivated entrepre- to the development of the economy in neurs. Training strategies to be focused facilitating all aspects of business transac- on educating and retaining of a core of tions. professionals with the technical capabi- Internet Services started in Kenya during lities to provide and maintain ICT infra- the 90’s and its development has not structure and related ICT services, and to been rapid enough due to lack of ade- adapt new technologies for local require- quate infrastructure that could facilitate ments. the growth. There is only one Internet Backbone operator in Kenya with Internet Currently Kenyan universities and other Points of Presences (IPOPs) only in major higher institutions of learning offer towns. The Backbone operator despite Computer-Science, engineering, com- having IPOPs in major towns is not merce and business administration degree allowed to offer Internet services to the and certificate courses. However most of public to avoid unfair competition to these programs have not been tailored to licensed Internet Service Providers (ISPs) meet the requirements needed in the im- who are prohibited from putting up any plementation, maintenance and running infrastructure except that provided by the of ICT services. incumbent operator. By June 2003 there were over 70 licensed Vendors of computer and Internet related ISPs in the country out of which about hardware, now offer training in Microsoft, half are in active operation. Still the Cisco, CompTia, Compaq and other operational ones have concentrated their vendor specific international certification services within the major towns specifi- courses. One of the Universities, Jomo cally in the Capital City and are not Kenyatta University of Agriculture and interested in moving to the rural areas Technology host the Cisco’s Networking due to economic availability concerns Academy Program providing a 280-hour compounded with lack of adequate infra- technical training course over the Inter- structure. net. This course trains workers in developing countries in designing, building, and Telephone penetration on the other hand maintaining computer networks, enabling still remain very low in the country with students to obtain jobs in the local IT approximately 80% of telephone lines industry. being in the urban areas out of which a

134 Kenya - 2 greater percentage still are business tele- 7 ICTs for Education: phone lines. This implies that rural and more specifically, residential telephone Addressing Shortage access is quit limited. through E-Learning The result of all these is that Internet True monopolistic times in the telecom- Services still remain a tool for the urban munication sector used to be and no population and particularly in the capital longer are or at least dying out slowly city while home access and particularly with the liberalization of the sector in the rural remains an illusion. The mode of many countries. Telecommunication com- Internet access for many people is panies have been operating as independ- through offices and in Internet Cafes, ent entities which have played a major role in providing access to a majority of the Kenyan In Kenya the incumbent Telkom Kenya population. The cost of access in the has a training school, Kenya College of Internet Cafes ranges from $0.01 in the Communications Technology (KCCT) that capital city to $0.07 per minute in other for many years has been used for training major towns. telecommunication staff not only for Kenya but also for East Africa. The college Residential access is still very limited and is a subsidiary of Telkom Kenya with ade- where one has the access, the cost is quate training facilities and resource per- very prohibitive to the user, making it a sonnel drawn fro the experienced staff of difficult means of research but rather Telkom Kenya. quick email access means. However, things have changed and the The future of rural Internet access lies in college now moves towards being inde- the opening up of certain policies that pendent and running its own programs as currently can be considered as impedi- a separate entity to ensure that it ments to the growth of Internet. These becomes self sustaining while offering include; competitive training not only for Telkom Kenya but also for the private sector. The Lack of competition in the fixed market challenge for the institution is the ability segment has contributed to lack of ade- to remain self reliant while offering com- quate infrastructure that would facilitate petitive courses that will attract loyalty Internet access. from both public and private sectors and retain its skilled resource personnel. Lack of competition in the provision of Internet Backbone is a major impediment Another telecommunication training insti- to growth. The only Backbone provider is tution in Kenya is African Advance Level better placed to provide access in a wider Telecommunication Institute (AFRALTI), community and affordable prices but due which is a ITUs Center of excellence to foreseeable unfair competition, this offering wide ranging telecommunication cannot be allowed at the moment. programs most of which are, organized by ITU and the CTO. It has been serving not However, the incumbent has been al- only Kenya but also the English speaking lowed to provide Internet services countries south of Sahara. through a separate subsidiary Company as a way out but is yet to start services The two institutions however still rely on for reasons not known at the moment. local resource personnel. Except for online courses offered through other organi- Restrictive policies on technology that zations through these institutions as the could provide cost effective infrastructure accredited institutions, ICT has not been development for easy access Internet fully employed in these institutions as a access, like VSAT have been some of the training tool. impediments to Internet growth. There are however other initiatives to the There is however plans to open up most use of ICT for training not necessarily in of the telecommunication sectors in the telecommunication field. One such organi- country that will lead to the development zation is the Kenya Education Network of this sector. (KENET).

Kenya - 3 135

8 Kenya Education 9 Memorandum of Network (KENET) understanding for KENET is a project supported by US collaboration government ‘Leland initiative’, which is a Additionally the Commission has signed a global information project to extend full Memorandum of Understanding for col- Internet connectivity to 20 or more laboration with the University of Nairobi African countries, Kenya included, in and the Jomo Kenyatta University of order to promote sustainable develop- Agriculture and Technology, for purposes ment. The initiative objectives include of research and development, and con- assistance in creating and enabling policy tinuing education in the areas of tele- environment suitable for the development communications, type approval, radio fre- and extensive use of the Internet in order quency management, information tech- to share information on development nology and other related areas. This col- matters, business, the environment, laboration is expected to be an avenue to health, democracy and education among promote information exchange for the others. The Kenyan government em- promotion of education in the ICT sector. braced these objectives but placed more emphasis on the education. 10 African Virtual The project is an integration of proposal University in the education sector including the Information technology in Primary The African Virtual University is a Schools developed by the Ministry of satellite-based teaching network working Education and the Kenya College of with 22 partner institutions in 16 coun- Communications Technology and the tries. AVU offers non-credit, remedial and Internet for schools project (ELIMUNET) specialized certification programs with developed by CCK to provide Internet content provided from major universities connectivity to 710 schools, 5 primary in Africa, North America and Europe as and 5 secondary schools, in each of the well as private corporations and organi- 71 districts of the Republic of Kenya. zations.

To facilitate its operations the Commis- In support of the project the Commission sion in April 2002, granted AVU a licence has helped create an enabling policy to construct and operate a VSAT system environment and facilitated low cost, for data transmission between their high-speed access to the Internet to Nairobi offices and Washington D.C. educational institutions by providing logistical support in the granting of licenses and waiving of frequency fees. 11 Conclusion In June 2002, CCK granted KENET a It is now accepted fact that the telecom licence to construct and operate a private infrastructure is one of the key factors telecommunication network to intercon- that affect economic, social and cultural nect all universities and tertiary educa- development in both developing and in- tional institutions. The Commission is cur- dustrialized countries. rently providing support to the project through allocation of needed frequencies In rural Kenya, people are spread on ex-gratia basis in addition to providing sparsely over the landscape in the dis- financial support to the Secretariat for an tricts that can cover thousands of square initial period of two years. The Commis- kilometers. This makes conventional ca- sion has so far granted a six-month bling very expensive especially when low waiver on frequency fees to KENET for usage of lines in these economically under purposes of testing of a VSAT system. developed areas is taken into account.

136 Kenya - 4

However, with the opening up of the Such low-cost technologies are capable of market and deployment of advance tech- providing voice and data connectivity in nologies such as wireless applications and rural areas at a low and operational cost. the recently developed broadband wire- Thus they are attractive for sparsely less applications which hopefully shall be populated rural areas where existing cost- effective and easy to use solutions (wireless technologies like GSM and for providing communications services, CDMA) based technologies may not be these will facilitate and improve on the commercially viable. accessibility to these areas.

Mr Chrisphine Juma Ogongo Mr Musa Etiko Omungu Assistant Engineer Assistant Technologist Broadcasting & Telecommunications Communication Commission of Kenya Communication Commission of Kenya Box 14448 Box 14448 KE-NAIROBI, 0800 KE-NAIROBI, 0800 Kenya Kenya Tel.: +254 20 43 9 111 Tel.: +254 20 43 9 111 Fax: +254 20 4348 200 Fax: +254 20 4348 200 E-mail: [email protected] E-mail: [email protected]

Kenya - 5 137

Mauritius

Mauritius Country Paper

1 Introduction the current ICT state of the country is presented in section 2, section 3 de- The Government of Mauritius has showed scribes some projects undertaken to its commitment to make ICTs the fifth make ICT the engine for development and pillar of the economy after the agricul- accessible by all, and presents a number ture, textile, tourism and the offshore of additional means by which accessibility sectors in the address [1]. The strong can be improved, section 4 describes the political will of Government is evident by strengths and weaknesses of the country the fact that as from February 2001, the as far as ICT development is concerned. Prime Minister is personally chairing a Section 5 concludes the paper. Ministerial Committee on ICT, which initially met every month but now meets at longer intervals, to review and monitor 2 The present situation the work of three Task Forces as follows: of the ICT sector in 1) Task force on Cybercity and Business Mauritius Parks chaired by the Deputy Prime Minister and Minister of Finance. This section presents the ICT sector as it is today. The situation is expressed in 2) Task Force on E-Government by Minister statistical terms, and equally in terms of of IT and Telecommunications. policies, regulations and legislations that 3) Task Force on E-Education and have been put in place, and those E-Training by the Minister of Educa- proposed for in the future. Also the on- tion and Scientific Research. going projects that will contribute in making ICT the fifth pillar of the economy Since then, several laws have been are described. enacted and regulations made; a new regulatory body (ICT Authority of Mauritius) has been set up; the telecom- 2.1 Facts and Figures munications sector was liberalised on 1 January 2003 (one year earlier than Several surveys have been carried out in originally scheduled); and the University Mauritius (which has total area of ap- of Technology (the second university in proximately 2000 sq km and a population the country) has specifically been man- of about 1.2 million) so as to quantify the dated to address the shortage of ICT skills ICT penetration. The SADC E-readiness of the country. report [2] published in 2002 quotes the PC penetration for Mauritius to be as high As the Internet is recognised to have the as 12.5% or 120 PCs per 1000 people. potential of transforming Mauritius into an Although on the African benchmark this is E-island, our policy makers are fully a remarkable performance, yet the Gov- aware that Internet is not a luxury but an ernment believes that there is still a long essential tool for economic development, way to go. There are currently 9 licensed hence the urgency to promote public Internet Service Providers (ISPs), Internet Access. The remaining sections however only two are operational. There of this report are structured as follows: were 15 cyber cafes [2] in 2002. The

Mauritius - 1 139

number of Internet users has been rising strates that Internet is accessed from exponentially over the past years reach- several locations, and that home is the ing some 16% of the population in 2002. main access point [3] as illustrated in A survey [3] carried out by the National Figure 1. Computer Board (NCB) last year, demon-

Figure 1 – Location of Internet access1

Another interesting result of this survey Internet cafes are more popular in rural concerns a comparison of Internet usage compared to urban areas. As far as tariffs in urban and rural areas in different lo- are concerned, dial-up subscribers pay cations as shown in Figure 2. In general, 15 USD monthly whereas cyber cafes the survey revealed that the majority of charge an average of US$2.5 per hour for Internet users access Internet from home access to the Internet according to the both for urban and rural areas. Also SADC e-readiness report 2002 [4].

Figure 2 – Internet access of users by region at different locations1

______

1 Source [3].

140 Mauritius - 2

2.2 Policies, Regulations and – August 2001: Electronic Transac- Legislations tions Act 2000, parts I to V, VII to IX, XI, XIII, and section 41 The Government, is committed to proclaimed. develop the IT and communications in- – December 2001: Information and dustry to increase national wealth, Communication Technologies Act create new opportunities and jobs. It has 2001 identified IT in education as central to supporting the development of an – November 2002: The Postal Serv- efficient workforce for sustained econo- ices Act 2002 mic growth, and for transformation of – May 2003: The Computer Misuse Mauritius into an information-based soci- and Cybercrime Bill – (enacted in ety. Parliament on 15 July 2003 and yet to be proclaimed) In 1997, Mauritius was among the 69 countries who were signatories of the – July 2003: Licensing and fees re- WTO treaty to allow full liberalisation of gulation, and Amendment of Sched- the Telecommunication sector, as from ule regulation made under section 48 1st January 2005. This commitment was of the Information and Communi- clearly indicated in the Telecommu- cation Technologies Act 2001 nication Act of 1998. In 2001, in an effort to reduce the cost of doing 2.3 The Cybercity project business and to promote the application of ICT in Mauritius [5], Government The main ICT project for development is brought forward the liberalisation of the unquestionably the Cybercity project telecommunications sector by one full which is located in close vicinity of the year to 1th January 2004, with the University of Mauritius and along the enactment of the ICT Act 2001, which main highway linking the major cities of repealed the previous Telecommu- Mauritius. This project which started nication Act of 1998. In October 2002, from a mere concept in 2001 will see the Government further amended the ICT inauguration of its first Cyber Tower in Act of 2001 to bring forward the libe- December 2003. The Cybercity will be ralisation by yet one more year to part of an IT free zone which will also be 1st January 2003. One of the first results made up of other digital parks. The of this decision has been a consequent Cybercity is being constructed on some decrease in telecommunication services 75 hectares of land and will comprise of tariffs. It is expected that this libera- a cyber tower, a business tower, a know- lisation will enhance opportunities for ledge complex, a multi-media complex, a operators to market new value added Government administrative complex, services [5], and offer a wider choice in common facilities and residential units. terms of technology solutions for busi- The activities in which the Cybercity will nesses [5]. be involved comprise among others of software development, Multi-media de- Since 2001 the following laws, policies velopment such as animated movies, and/or regulations related to the ICTs hardware design and development, ICT have been passed in Mauritius in order services such as software and hardware to create the right institutional, legal and support and ICT enabled services like regulatory frameworks and facilitate the call and data centres. execution of Government’s policy: – February 2001: Policy framework 2.4 A computer in every for Internet Service Providers (ISPs) in the Republic of Mauritius issued by home initiative the Ministry of IT and Telecommuni- There is currently established in cations. Mauritius a number of schemes driven by – March 2001: Telecommunication the Government to promote the culture Licensing Regulations made under of “one Personal Computer for every sections 8(5) and 26(2) of the now home”. A soft loan scheme from the repealed Telecommunications Act Development Bank of Mauritius with an 1998. interest rate of 7% per annum, extended

Mauritius - 3 141

over a repayment term of 7 years is • To ensure all computer users under- provided to Mauritian for the purchase of stand the advantages of using a a Personal Computer. This scheme was personal computer. introduced in August 1991 and as at end June 2003, 45155 homes have benefited • To increase the employability of all from the scheme. Government is en- people, to enable them to be part of couraging private organisations to facili- the global Information Society. tate access for their employees. Air Mauritius Company Ltd. (our national airline) has even decided to allow its The Cyber Caravan project is the employees to access to the Internet from realisation of the National Computer their home after office hours, using the Board (NCB), which has two IT Coaches office infrastructure subject to certain each equipped with 9 and 10 PC’s res- conditions. pectively, and they can accommodate between 9 to 18 persons per training session [6]. A third caravan is in the process of acquisition. The training sessions are free of change and are 3 ICT for all targeted towards people with little or no skills in ICT [6]. The statistics presented in the previous section show that only 16% of the According to the NCB, over 21700 people Mauritian population are Internet users; in 285 centres, primary and secondary hence it becomes important to encour- schools had already benefited from the age the creation of public Internet ICT courses delivered by the IT Coach as Access points. As highlighted in [3], at April 2003. The centres include, Social Mauritius has a successful E-learning po- Welfare Centres, Village Halls & Munici- licy. There are currently four official on- pal Councils, Youth Centres and Women line training programmes available at Centres. primary, secondary and tertiary level. It is expected that the use of ICT in education will create a skilled workforce for the economic development of the country. Several projects have been undertaken to bring the Internet to all 3.2 The National Computer regions of the country and more Proficiency Programme importantly to people found at different levels of the society. The National Computer Proficiency Pro- gramme (NCPP) is a nationwide training programme which has been set up by Government in collaboration with the 3.1 The Cyber Caravan private sector aiming at providing IT training to all classes of the population, One of the main initiatives in bringing up to the level of computer proficiency about accessibility of IT to the people is [7]. The ultimate objective is to spread the IT Coach or Cyber Caravan project, the IT culture at all levels of the which was launched in November 2000. Mauritian society from teachers to The aim is to bring computer facilities to students, the unemployed, the working the doorstep of Mauritians. The main population and the community at objectives of the Cyber Caravan are [6]: large [7].

• To raise the level of knowledge about This programme forms part of the ICT and the level of competence in national E-government project which using personal computers and com- requires that all civil servants become IT mon computer applications. literate. At the end of April this year some 6600 people have been trained • To promote and encourage ICT within the NCPP. literacy.

142 Mauritius - 4

3.3 Other initiatives in 4 Strengths and improving access to ICT Weaknesses An ICT training programme for public The main strengths of Mauritius are: officers started in September 2002 and by end of June 2003, 2000 officers have • Its excellent inland infrastructure, completed their training. There is cur- the total backbone bandwidth capa- rently the school IT project which is in city is 34 Mbps, consisting of a cop- the pipeline. The evaluation exercise for per, microwave and optical fibre net- the provision of hardware and software work. As far as electricity is con- as well as for Project Management Serv- cerned, 94% of all households are ices has been completed in May 2003. connected and the total electricity The approval for the construction of generation capacity is 1,584,500 MW 34 IT laboratories has already been ob- [1]. tained [8]. There are additional IT courses offered by the Industrial, Voca- • Its education system which is to a tional & Training Board of Mauritius very large extent free of any (IVTB); as at May 2003, 164 participants charges. It is estimated that 43% of had followed basic courses in Call Centre all adults left school after completing Operation while 970 participants had fol- their primary school education and lowed basic courses in IT E-business [8]. that 41.3% of all adults have secondary school education and 1.7% has tertiary education [1]. • The strong commitment of govern- 3.4 Future means to improve ment to make ICT the fifth pillar of accessibility the economy. • A converged regulatory framework In addition to the ongoing initiatives and for IT, Telecommunications, and projects mentioned above there are postal services under a common um- some proposed projects and initiatives brella. that may improve ICT accessibility and availability over the island: • Competition has been introduced in the sector. a) provide free Internet access in public Access point such as post offices, The country also has some weaknesses, educational institutions and other such as: similar points to the public; • The small size of the local market. b) provide unlimited Internet access to educational and research institu- • The shortage of qualified and experi- tions; enced people in the ICT sector c) ensure reasonable and affordable • Telecommunication costs are still tariffs for Internet access through quite high flat rate dial-up access; and domestic access through xDSL; • Limited public access to Internet outside the home and the office d) promote competition in the field of ICT and Internet access provision; • There is strong dependence on the incumbent’s infrastructure e) define accessibility to ICTs as one of the prime functions of the Universal • Access to its outer islands (the Service Fund; closest which is about 500 Km away is only accessible through satellite). f) examine alternatives to fully cost- based tariff rebalancing, especially in The country is open to foreign expertise African countries, since the reality is in areas where it is currently lacking and that in most parts of Africa acces- where it has not yet built enough local sibility issues may be amplified when capacity; these include areas of security, all ICT services are provided at cost. data protection, and cyber crime which

Mauritius - 5 143

are altogether novel avenues locally, but 6 References essential for our success in the various ICT-based projects. [1] Address of the President at the opening of the first session of the national assembly of the Republic of 5 Conclusion Mauritius. 3rd October 2000. This paper has demonstrated the com- [2] The SADC E-Readiness Report, 2002. mitment of Mauritius to make ICT its [3] NCB, ICT Outlook 2002: ICT pene- engine for development, it was seen also tration within the Mauritian Society, that much has been done to promote 2002. public Internet access and to make ICT [4] Ministry of IT and Telecommunication, available for all. ICT is expected to White paper on Telecommunication become the fifth pillar of the Mauritian Sector, 1997. economy. It is recognised though that the communication costs are still very high [5] Mauritius: Budget Speech 2003/ and that there is a shortage of qualified 2004, 2003. persons in the ICT sector. However, much [6] http://ncb.intnet.mu effort is being made by the regulator (the [7] A. Narasiah et al., ICT as an Engine of ICT Authority) to see to it that the tariffs Growth in Africa, Mauritius Inter- go down so as to benefit development. national Conference on Access to ICTs The multi prong approach adopted by for all, 2003. Government is expected to bring greater accessibility at affordable cost. [8] Notes of 15th meeting of Ministerial Committee on ICT. 16 May 2003.

Ms Kresnawtee Beegun Mr Mukund Krishna Oolun Permanent Secretary Director of Engineering and Licensing Prime Minister's Office Information and Communications Information and Communication Technologies Authority Technologies Authority (ICTA) Jade House 1st Floor, Jade House Remy Ollier Street Remy Ollier Street MU-PORT LOUIS MU-PORT LOUIS Mauritius Mauritius Tel.: +230 217 2222 Tel.: +230 201 1366 Fax: +230 217 7777 Fax: +230 211 9272 E-mail: [email protected]

144 Mauritius - 6

Moldova

Telecommunication Development Country Report for Moldova

Integrating Consumers to infrastructure at a low level and relatively poor usage of the new informa- into the Regulatory tion and communication technologies Process does not allow exploration of all the opportunities, that can offer this market Institutional framework reform (institu- segment. tional separation of administration, regulation and operation functions in the area of telecommunications) has started in Telephone density at 100 inhabitants has 1993 in the Republic of Moldova, when reached the level of 20% for fix lines separation of operation functions from the (level of digitalization: 50%) and 11% for administration and regulation ones took mobile phones. place, and in 2000 separation of administration functions from the regulation ones took place. Nowadays, the Ministry Actually step by step things are changing of Transports and Telecommunications and a successful example is elaboration of (MTC) manages or administrates the area the New National Numbering Plan (NNP), of telecommunications in our republic, creation of working groups, where were which is the specialty central public included representatives of the basic tele- authority that carries out the Government communications operators which have politics in the area of telecommunications participated in roundtable debates, trans- and determines the development strategy parency and posting information on of this sphere. Internet site www.anrti.doc, active participation of customers and consulting Regulation in the area of telecommuni- with public opinion making questionnaire, cations, as well as implementation of as a result operators expenses to the new development strategy in this area are NNP passing have been minimized. carried out by the National Agency for Regulation in Telecommunications and Informatics, which is independent from the Government, operators and central At the present moment an increased public administration bodies. interest of consumer participation in the process of elaboration of different regula- At the moment consumer participation tions and policies is noticed. into the process of regulation or elaboration of different policies is insignificant. As an explanation to this are impacts from As a conclusion, I could also mention the planned (centralized) economics, where fact that consumer participation into the consumer role was limited. process of regulation of the telecommunications in Moldova can be and have to In order to change consumer mentality, a become the factor, which will stimulate transition period is necessary. Another economic, social and cultural develop- reason is information access, which due ment.

Moldova - 1 145

Mr Viorel Munteanu Mr Andrei Untila Senior Specialist Director Communication Department Telecommunication and Ministry of Transport and Radiocommunication Department Communications Ministry of Transport and Communications Bd. Stefan Cel Mare 134 2012 MD-CHISINAU Bd. Stefan Cel Mare 134 Moldova MD-CHISINAU, 2012 Moldova Tel.: +373 2 251 153 Fax.: +373 2 546 564 Tel.: +373 2 25 1113 E-mail: [email protected] Fax: +373 2 54 6564 E-mail: [email protected]

146 Moldova - 2

Mongolia

Telecommunication Development Country Report for Mongolia

Mongolia is located in the central part of Asia and borders with Russia along 3,485 km to the north and with China along 4.676.9 km to the south. The average altitude is 1,580 m above the sea level with the capital city Ulaanbaatar at 1,350 m and the highest point at 4,653 m. Mongolia is a country which has mountain ranges, moun- tains and hills, steppes and valleys as well as the Gobi and other deserts. It is the seventeenth largest country in the world. The climate of Mongolia is continental and there are four seasons.

Country Profile Capital Ulaanbaatar Area 1,566,500 sq km Population 2,608,100 Urban Population 57.2% Population Growth 1.01% GDP USD 949 million

GDP per Capita USD 452

GDP Growth 1.2%

Currency Tugrug Main Telephone Lines 131,300 Telephone Density Overall 5.4% Rural 0.9% Waiting List for Telephone Lines 19.318 Paging Subscribers N/A Cellular Subscribers 260,100 Internet Subscribers 10,000 International Outgoing Traffic N/A

Mongolia - 1 147

Network Digitisation Switching 95% Transmission 85% Government Department Responsible for Information and Communication Technology (ICT) Ministry Address Tel No. Fax No. Ministry of Policy and Coordination Infrastructure Department of Information Government and Communications Building-2 +976 11 310 612 +976 11 329 236 Technology (ICT) United Nations +976 11 329 236 Ministry of Infrastructure Str-5/2, Ulaanbaatar MONGOLIA 210646 MONGOLIA Minister: H E Mr. Byamba JIGJID Director General: Mr Jalavsuren BAT-ERDENE Regulatory Body Department Address Tel No. Fax No. Communications Regulatory Post Office 24, Committee (CRC) P.O. Box 904, +976 11 304 257 +976 11 327 720 Ministry of Infrastructure Ulaanbaatar 210524 MONGOLIA MONGOLIA Post and Telecommunications Implementation Authority Department Post and Telecommunications Agency (PTA) Address Post Office 24, PO Box 904, Ulaanbaatar 210524, MONGOLIA Telephone +976 11 369 855 Facsimile +976 11 369 825 Telecommunications Operators Operator Mongolia Telecom Address Sukhbaatar Square, Ulaanbaatar 210376, MONGOLIA Telephone +976 11 324 855 Facsimile +976 11 325 412 Operator Mongolian Railway Communication (Railcom) Address Central Post Office, Ulaanbaatar 210376 , MONGOLIA Telephone +976 11 329 154 Facsimile +976 11 328 360 Cellular Operators Operator Mobicom Corporation Address Amarun Str-2, Post Office 20a, Ulaanbaatar 210620, MONGOLIA Telephone +976 11 322 018 Facsimile +976 11 310 411 Operator Skytel Company Co Ltd Address PO Box 811, Ulaanbaatar 210613, MONGOLIA Telephone +976 11 318 488 Facsimile +976 11 318 487

148 Mongolia - 2

Internet Providers Operator MagicNet., Co., Ltd Address Negdsen Undestrill Str-49, Ulaanbaatar 210646, MONGOLIA Telephone +976 11 311665 Facsimile +976 11 311496 Operator Micom Company Co Ltd Address Sukhbaatar Square 9, Ulaanbaatar 210611, MONGOLIA Telephone +976 11 313 220 Facsimile +976 11 318 360

1 Telecommunications In December 2000, the Ministry of Sector Objectives Infrastructure adopted the Mongolian Tele- communications Sector Policy Statement The information and communication tech- (2010). The policy of the Government of nology is a competitive industry in the Mongolia is targeted to implement the development course of Mongolian econ- liberalisation of the communication sector omy and shall have the important role in as well as the principle of non-discrimina- the reconstruction and renovation as well tion in the telecommunication sector by as investments into other industries in creating an efficient regulatory system. economy. The modern and new services and advanced technologies shall set the In November 2002, the Government of new possibilities for making more quality Mongolia adopted the “Mid-term strategy based and effective the Government’s for development of the ICT in Mongolia” administration, public and social services. and it has defined as follows the medium- The objective of the general strategy for term development strategy in this sector developing telecoms in Mongolia (for in order to establish a state policy and 2010) is to introduce more productive regulatory system and create a favorable investment, along with the latest high- environment for human and social, tech and technology. This will improve economic and business, political and legal telecoms service supply by 2010, with an developments. Main objectives: intended telephone density in urban areas – Policy and legal framework; of 15 phones per 100 inhabitants in Ulaanbaatar, and 10-12 in aimags – Infrastructure development; (provincial centres). International and domestic calls from all somon (village) – Human capacity building; centres will be accomplished automatically. Another aim is to ensure that no – Business and private sector, support less than 50% of the population with the and partnership; etc. technical facilities will be connected to the Internet. Accordance with the Resolution No. 232 of the Government of Mongolia, as of 1.1 Telecommunications 1 January 2003 the Ministry of Infra- structure of Mongolia were restructured Policy and the established the new department The Mongolian Government highlighted in named as the Policy and Coordination its Action Plan the importance of commu- Department for Information and Commu- nication and information technology to the nications Technology (ICT). The depart- development of the country, a focus that ment is responsible for information and cuts across education, infrastructure and telecommunications, and postal sector economic sectors and gives great signifi- development policy and strategy making cance to the information and technology & its coordination, and implementation accessibility in the rural areas of Mongolia. activities in Mongolia.

Mongolia - 3 149

2 The Telecommuni- created as a 100% state owned Joint Stock company. The first phase of privatisation cations Network started in 1995. The majority of shares are owned by the State, with 40% belonging to The overall Mongolian telecommunication a foreign investor, Korea Telecom, and backbone network consists of 2,500 km of 5.56% publicly traded. analogue, and approximately 900 km of digital microwave, 2200 km long optical cable link, plus 21 Very Small Aperture 4 Mobile Terminal (VSAT) systems linked to Ulaanbaatar and all provincial centres. Communications 332 telephone exchanges have a total switching capacity of 135,000 telephone The Government of Mongolia has an- lines, with 131,000 lines currently in nounced international open tender for service. More than 95% of the total third mobile operator in Mongolia switching capacity and 85% of the (GSM-900/1900 systems) and it is ex- transmission network are digital. pected to start service in the end of 2003 year. By the end of year 2002 teledensity has become 5.4 per 100 inhabitants in the country, 11.5-12 in the capital city, 4-5 in 4.1 Mobicom provincial centres (aimags) and 0.9 in MobiCom Corporation was the first villages (somons). operator for mobile cellular services. It Provinces are connected to villages via was established and approved to provide about 30,000 km of open-wire systems cellular mobile services in Mongolia in with 3-12 channels capacity, radio links and 1995. Mobicom is a private company. The small capacity digital microwave network. shareholders are the Japanese companies KDD and Sumitomo, and the Mongolian There is an Intelsat earth station which firm NewCom. Commercial operations uplinks domestic television programme started in March 1996. Mobicom operates broadcasting to remote television receivers a GSM 900 network. Mobicom provides within the whole territory of Mongolia, and local, long distance and international receives a variety of regional satellite TV telephone services as will as fax and channels for programming in Ulaanbaatar, internet services to and from hand-held, and provincial centers. portable, mobile and fixed terminals. The Mobicom network covers capital city and 25 province centers through Mongolia. 3 Basic Telephone Mobicom is also a reseller of Inmarsat Services services. Now more than 80% of the subscribers are based in Ulaanbaatar. The Basic voice telephony is offered by number of mobile phone subscribers Mongolia Telecom and another four exceeds the number of fixed lines sub- smaller operators. scribers as at the end of 2002. Mobicom has also introduced WLL system in remote and remote areas in Ulaanbaatar and 3.1 MongoliaTelecom province centers. In 2002 there were The Mongolia Telecom is the incumbent 9,000 subscribers to the WLL services. network operator. The network, however, Mobicom has introduced IP services via is owned on behalf of the State by the Post satellite. and Telecommunications Agency (PTA). Mongolia Telecom has concluded a lease 4.2 Skytel agreement with PTA for the exclusive use of the national network. Until 1990 the Skytel received a licence for the operation telecommunications infrastructure was op- of a cellular telephony network and a erated by the Ministry of Communications. licence for radio frequency utilisation in In 1990 the Ministry was restructured and March 1999. Skytel became the second a Mongolian Telecommunication Authorities mobile operator after Mobicom. The (MTA) established. In 1992 the Mongolian shareholders of Skytel are Korean compa- Telecommunication Company (MTC) was nies – SK Telecom Co Ltd, Taihan Electric

150 Mongolia - 4

Wire Co, and (from Mongolia) MCS, Altai play in its development. They offer a Traiding and UnivCom Co Ltd. The Skytel platform for building and applying knowl- network covers Ulaanbaatar and 16 big edge; facilitate participation in trade for cities/province centers and introduced isolated communities and SMEs as well as public card phones in spring 2000 and a corporations; are critically important for CDMA system in 2001. national competitiveness; and allow for improved delivery of public services. As a result these technologies offer the opportu- 5 Internet Network and nity for accelerated economic growth (see Services Attachment: General information and network introduction of Mongolia). There are seven Internet Service Providers in Mongolia. The largest ones are MagicNet The Government also approved the (former Datacom), which was the first Communications Law of 2001 and has datacommunication provider, and Micom, established the Communications Regul- which is owned by Mongolia Telecom, and atory Commission to regulate the telecom Bodicom. The other four providers operate sector. Further, the Goverment of Mongolia in a very specific market: CSCM is an approved the Medium Term Strategy for academic institution that connects universi- the Development of the ICT sector and an ties and schools, Onet works only in Action Plan for its implementation in Erdenet. Internet cafes, which are mush- January 2003. rooming in Ulaanbaatar, use the services of The Policy & Coordination Department for the internet service providers and offer ICT has also been established within the Internet access to the public. MagicNet is Ministry of Infrastructure in January 2003. introducing voice over IP or voice over internet services. The Government of Mongolia imple- The Internet Exchange Point was estab- mented policy and regulatory framework lished in 2000. All ISPs have been con- for building the appropriate regulatory nected to the Exchange Point since June and management structure, and renova- 2001. tion of the backbone telecommunications network. In September 2002, the IT training center (equipped by video conferencing, SUN The Government of Mongolia’s Mid -term computer servers, laboratories, distance ICT strategy identifies harnessing the learning hall, etc.) were established in potential of ICTs as a key driver of Mogolia under the Science and Technology development and is supported by four University of Mongolia, which is connecting pillars which include: 5 province centers by satellite. – Establishing the appropriate policy, The total speed of outgoing line is reaching legal and regulatory framework; approximately 16 Mbit/s, whereas of in- – Developing the key telecommuni- coming – 9.5 Mbit/s and there are over cations and information infrastructure 10,000 Internet registered subscribers and necessary for providing access to more than 50000 users presently. reliable and affordable connectivity; – Establishing an economic and business 6 Strategy and the framework for the utilization of ICTs in Priority Objectives governance and other applications; and for Information and – Developing human resources to effec- Communication tively utilize ICTs. Technology Sector In order to develop the information Development infrastructure in Mongolia, the Government in Mongolia places priority on: The Government of Mongolia recognizes – Developing government capacity to that Information & Communication Tech- lead and implement a national ICT nologies (ICTs) have an important role to program;

Mongolia - 5 151

– Establishing a policy and regulatory of licensed VSAT service providers also framework that encourages the provide various value added services such competitive provision of affordable and as managed network services, which allow reliable telecommunications infrastruc- businesses to utilize ICTs. Approximately ture and services; 90% of the current fixed network infra- – Establishing an appropriate legal and structure is digitized. Further, Mongolia regualtory framework for the develop- Railways also owns fibre optic infrastruc- ment of e-services; ture. This provides the opportunity to provide affordable bandwidth while increas- – Further privatizing Mongolia Telecom; ing returns on state owned assets and – Digitizing the transmission network investments. between aimags and soums, to enable internet connectivity; Mongolia will ensure that the policy and – Establishing appropriate insitutional regulatory environment allows for fair and and regulatory frameworks for public– compeututve provision of infrastructure private partnerships in the provision and services. The challenge Mongolia of rural access to ICTs; and faces is to increase rural access to ICT infrastructure and services. – To increasingly utlize ICTs, especially the Internet in the social services As the broadcast media has an important sector, with a focus on education and role to play in the development of health. Mongolia by providing information to its As part of the objective to develop human citizens, the equipment of radio and TV resources, the Government intends to studios will be improved and transmission i) mainstream IT into the education systems and stations for TV broadcasting curriculum; ii) organize schemes to provide will be upgraded. Within this framework, basic knowledge of IT to the population, to Mongolia will start broadcasting of the support primary, intermediary and 4 domestic digital TV (including the advanced IT courses and centres using National TV) and 4 FM radio channels economic policies, tax policies and other whole Mongolia in the end of 2003. policies, and to enable broad enrollment/ involvement of the population in such The Government of Mongolia’s short to training; and iii) develop distance learning medium term priorities for the ICT sector based on ICT, to create a system of as follows: acquiring formal education through open training programs, to support training – Develop and implement a Universal centres that conduct training in the use of Service Fund to provide access in rural electronic text books. and peri-urban areas of Mongolia; As part of the objective to support the development of business and the private – Implement policies (economic/fiscal/ sector, the Government intends to create a tax) and design incentives to encourage favourable policy and regulatory environ- adoption and use of ICTs in businesses, ment for ICT related privae sector led the social sectors, civil society; development. – Strengthen CRC’s capacity to adeqately Mongolia has made considerable progress regulate the telecommunications sector in developing its information and commu- and create a pro-competitive environ- nications infrastructure in recent years, ment for the private sector led particularly in the availability of modern development of Mongolia’s information basic service and cellular services. The and communications infrastructure; number of main lines grew from 3.5 per 100 inhabitants in 1996 to 5.4 in 2002. – Improve regulatory framework for the The number of cellular subscribers grew introduction and widespread use of new from 1800 in 1996 to 235,000 in 2002 services/IP enabled services, transit with the licensing of two operators. The data transfer, call-back, and its inter- Internet service market is fully liberalized connection & tariff issues; and there are approximately 50000 internet users of the Internet. A number – Cyberlaws, and others;

152 Mongolia - 6

– Create the enabling environment in – Develop and implement the Concept order to improve availablity of IT on DTH (Digital-To-Home) Distance- services including E-learning, Tele- learning and education, distance- medicine, and national information medicine and national registry, etc. databases; – Increase usage of ICT for the economic Implementation of short and medium term growth – industry, financial sector, strategy on ICT and infrastructure develop- Agriculture – such as introduce ICT ment will create one of the prerequesite for applications in socia-economic sector; establishment of knowledge based society, – Increase the potential and results of introduction of new types of services and basic and complementary research appplications, ensuring sustainable and studies in the ICT sector; rural development, improvement of access – Broaden and deepen regulatory reform; to education and public/social services, and ensuring balanced level of regional develop- – Implement e-commerce and e-services ment. /applications for all sectors;

Mr Tsengel Tsegmed Mr Naranmandakh Tumen-Ulzii State Secretary Chief Officer Ministry of Infrastructure Ministry of Infrastructure MN-ULAANBAATOR, 210646 MN-ULAANBAATAR, 210646 Mongolia Mongolia Tel.: +976 11 329 329 Tel.: +976 11 372 835 Fax: +976 11 310 612 Fax: +976 11 372 835 E-mail: [email protected] E-mail: [email protected]

Mongolia - 7 153

Myanmar

Telecommunication Development Country Report for Myanmar

It is found that, in the later part of the working programme is a national duty. It 21st century, advances in science and is a long term task which every ministry, Technology were very rapid and great organization, entrepreneur and citizen changes occurred. Communication and have to undertake to the best of their electronics in particular have changed and abilities. developed a lot in every decade since the Second World War. During the last two The Ministry of Information has to be decades of the 21st century, computer carrying out the tasks concerning not only technology advanced very fast. The use of news and information but also entertain- computer technology has become greater ment and education. In the radio and and more widespread in every social television programmes, educational pro- infrastructure, education, health, eco- grammes are being broadcast periodically nomic, commercial and military sectors. and continuously. As information technol- As computer technology, the Internet and ogy has advanced greatly in the radio and the communication infrastructure have television sector, the use of IT is being developed on a large scale in the world, extended. The Ministry is also aware of the term “Communication Age” has been the education and e-learning systems invented. being widely used in the word on the basis of IT. In other words, electronics has been used in various fields and the term “e-every- The setting up of a distance education thing” has been used as a form of system necessitates a system for teacher- expression. Such things as e-TV, e-educa- student communication.The teaching and tion, e-learning, e-mail, e-banking, e-com- learning system used on the basis of merce, e-trading, e-government and e-tour technology available in different periods have been emerged. In accordance with are as follows: these advances in technology, economic and social infrastructures related to social – Posts and Telecommunication Services environment need to be changed. (Postal Offices) undertook the tasks of The government is implementing short sending lessons to students and their and long term plans to achieve develop- answer papers, discussion and ques- ment of human resources in terms of not tions to teachers (after 1800 and in the only quantity but also quality. These plans early 1900s); cover development of school education systems and distance education systems – Radio and television stations broadcast and creation of constant learning oppor- school lessons (as of 1970); tunities and life-long learning opportunities. – Teaching school lessons with the use To build the nation into a new, modern of video tapes and CD ROMs and one which has advanced technology and through satellite broadcast (after economic development, human resources 1980); development is the vital importance. This

Myanmar - 1 155

– Teaching school lessons with the Web 2 The possible – based system through the Internet (the worldwide network of computer extension use of links) (after 1995). Satellite Data

In the nation, efforts are being made to Broadcasting System be able to effectively use IT and extension – Video Conference between student and of communication network infrastructure teacher can be held with the use of which are the basis for the development VSAT Return and Wireless communica- of the Internet and the Internet. In that tion systems. situation, Satellite Data Broadcasting Sys- – Interactive Responses including e-mail tem is to be implemented to broadcast and Voice over IP can be linked by use and teach school lessons to every part of of telephone or VSAT network. the nation in every season and to introduce a new, modern teaching – learning – Education programme channels can sector. be extended by use of Multi channel streaming video system if they are Therefore, Myanmar Radio and Television needed. under the Ministry of Information set up Satellite Data Broadcasting system to- 3 Establishment of an gether with the satellite television broadcasting system and built a communication IT-based teaching and network based on IP (Internet Protocol). As learning system of 1 January 2001, the e-education system has been launched. By use of that system Data Broadcasting system, which has the following services can be provided. been launched for distance education, has been used at present mainly for the broadcasting of school lessons direct from 1 The present condition the teaching studio and TP streaming education video programmes. The Minis- of Satellite Data try of Education is giving priority at Broadcasting System present to extension of learning centres, production of educational video lessons – The direct broadcast of school lessons and the broadcasting of special teaching from the teaching studio or with the programmes including special courses. use of education video tapes through Streaming Video System. The establishment of e-learning resource centres, the e-teaching system and the – The storing and broadcasting of digital Interactive communication network which learning resources such as Streaming provides access anytime is required to Video Files and Web-based resources, use the distance education system e-based resources and e-books in the effectively and successfully. The already- Archive system and Servers; and the established Data Broadcasting System individual downloading of data (in this can be linked for extensive use. regard, it is necessary to make arrangements to link individuals and However, the extension of the e-learning the Network). system depends on the individual use of computer, availability of e-learning re- – The transfer of Unicast Files requested sources and establishment of a commu- by individuals and that of Multicast nication network. Files sent to learning centres, schools and students (File Transfer). 4 Services available – The asking and answering of ques- At present, Data Broadcasting education tions between students from learning TV programmes are being broadcast centres and the teacher from the through the satellite. The broadcasting of teaching studio by telephone while IP Video Streaming programmes, the school lessons are on air (16 Sub- recording of educational lessons at learn- scriber Trunk Dialing, STD phone lines ing centres, archiving by video tapes and have been installed.) transfer of data files including materials

156 Myanmar - 2

for lessons and questions as well as the e-education of the international giving of lectures direct from the teaching standard. studio can be carried out. – To allocate a budget every year for In other words, the broadcasting of more conducting trial projects and research. educational programmes on the basis of academic years and subjects for the distance education, the drawing of 6 Conclusion necessary plans designed to make teaching effective and distribution of Text The establishment of Data Broadcasting Files relating to be carried out. System is meant to contribute to the effective and successful implementation of 5 Working programme the national education promotion plans of the government by use of Information for establishment of Technology. It paves the way for the e-learning system application of electronics in the education sector. It is found that the expenditure is The following tasks are to be carried out by far less than those of projects to use an e-learning system effectively implemented in the world. For instance, it and successfully in distance education. is learnt that Distance Education Via – To extend production of educational Satellite Project being implement in a video tapes of high quality in terms of South-East Asian nation cost about subjects and academic years so that USD 10 million and its operation expendi- all the lessons can be broadcast. ture is about USD 3 million. Moreover, it is also learnt that about USD 50 million was – To extend broadcast hour of the educa- allocated to the establishment of studios tional lesson programmes through the and resource centre for six educational TV IP Video Streaming System. channels aimed at basic education of – To extend the interactive communica- Grades 7 to 12 which was started in 1996. tion system so that the broadcasting of school lessons from the studio In extending the modern teaching and takes the form of Virtual Class Room. learning system in the nation, the IP-based – To broadcast lessons extensively with e-learning system is to be used exten- the Web – based Authorising System. sively. It is necessary to extend a communication infrastructure network, to – To distribute Text Files including extensively produce Web-based e-learning lessons and questions via Data Broad- resources, to set up Digital Asset Manage- casting Network to make teaching ment system, to promote teaching effective and to make arrangements systems, to generate opportunities to for asking and answering questions by enable individual to use computers, to use of e-mail. provide training on computer application – To implement extensive installation of and to cultivate a self-learning habit and to the Video Conference system and the create opportunities for it. These are the High Speed Wireless system to make issues that we are encountering in mod- education discussions more effective. ernization of teaching and learning system. – To carry out the work extensively by linking the communication network The introduction of the modern teaching already set up in the nation, multime- and learning system by the use of Data dia broadcasting systems including Broadcasting Technology means the Digital Broadcasting System, the building of a constant learning society Internet and the Intranet. which is practising a life-long education system for the improvement of the national – To provide individual students with education standard and development of opportunities of using computers, human resources in accord with the canter to the needs of computer skills aspiration of the government. The develop- and give training. ment of human resources in the nation is a – To extend the activities of research, fundamental requirement of the e-knowl- studies and trial projects and interna- edge age for the development and mod- tional cooperation to form an ernization of the nation.

Myanmar - 3 157

Mr Lin Naing Nil Mr U Maung Maung Tin Assistant Director (Line Section) Managing Director Department of Posts and Myanma Posts and Telecommunications Telecommunications (DPT) 839/841, Bgvoke Aung San Street Ayeyarwon Road MM-YANGON MM-YANGON Myanmar Myanmar Tel.: +95 1 211 333 Tel.: +95 1 591 394 Fax: +95 1 210 999 Fax: +95 1 591 383 E-mail: [email protected] E-mail: [email protected]

158 Myanmar - 4

Nepal

Telecommunication Development Country Report for Nepal

Abstract Nepal is predominantly an agriculture country. Its contribution to gross domestic Internet café are mushrooming in product is the largest followed by tourism, Kathmandu – the capital city of Nepal. The finance & real estate, construction, indus- challenges and opportunities both are very try, transport & communication, etc. The high for ICT in Nepal. About 83% of per capita income is around USD 235 and a populations live in the rural areas; and the very large proportion of the population are 83% of the area is mountainous/hills, below poverty line. The major source of which are rugged and remote. Email is government revenue are custom duty, required to overcome the deficiencies of value added tax, income tax. infrastructure in hills. As one million Nepalese work abroad, for whom email is a As the country estimated population necessity to contact their families in Nepal growth is 2.3 per annum, the gain and vice versa. The Government has a plan achieved by developmental activities has to focus the rural areas of Nepal for public been concealed by growing population. internet access. Many agencies are in Little over half (57%) of the population of planning states to implement Rural ICTs. working age reported economically active After the operation of few years will in 1991 and among them 81% were indicate its effectiveness and successes. engaged in agricultural activities. Contri- Still there is a great opportunity to make butions of non-agricultural activities are Community Tele center as a success story gradually increasing in the GDP. Per like Community forestry in Nepal. Experi- capita GDP is estimated in the order of ences from other developing countries USD 240 for 2000/01. would be valuable for Nepal. The policy of economic liberalization has been highly instrumental in improving 1 Introduction Nepal’s trade performance. Nepal major The Himalayan Kingdom of Nepal is a export commodities are paste, Pulses, oil landlocked and mountainous country with Cake, Catechu, Jute good Sacking, Twins, 147,181 sq. km of area with 17% of flat Carpets (Hand knitted woollen), Ready- land and 83% of rugged terrain. The popu- made garments, handicrafts, ginger, ICT lation is of about 23 millions. The average products and services. Industrial develop- life expectancy is 60 years. 58% of the ment is slow as such the government has population are literate where the percent- formulated various policy and Acts for its age of male literacy is 70 and female is 30. further development.

Administratively the country is divided into About 90% of the population live in rural five development regions and seventy five areas. Due to difficult terrain, in many districts. Lowest administrative units are places it takes about one week of trekking Municipalities and Village Development to reach a motorable road and two weeks Committee. Currently, there are to reach a letter to the capital. The importance of telecommunications in remote 58 Municipalities and 3 914 Village Devel- opment Committees (VDCs) in Nepal. areas is obvious.

Nepal - 1 159

2 Telecommunication Villages coverage by Telephone Infrastructure of Nepal Service 1761/3914 Rural Telecommunications Services When we talk about Internet, Telecom a) Multi Access Radio Telephony infrastructure becomes key factor for (MARTS) Terminals 504 success of its implementation. In spite of MARTS Subscribers 3000 the poor economy, the available telecom infrastructure in Nepal is on par with that b) VHS Telephone Subscriber 1 100 in many developed countries. Nepal entered the era of telecommunications over four decades ago. In 1955 with the 3 Towards the establishment of a 300-line manual Liberalisation of crossbar (CB) exchange, the general public Telecom Sector had access to telephones. Department of Telecommunications and Nepal Telecom- in Nepal munication Corporation (NTC) were As a breakthrough towards the liberalisa- established in 1959 and 1975 respectively. tion of the sector, a new Telecommuni- NTC, the only provider of telecom facilities cations Act, 2053 (1997) was enacted and (basic as well as international links), a regulatory body, Nepal Telecommuni- provides about 400,000 subscriber lines cations Authority (NTA) was constituted. including mobile phone services through His Majesty’s Government of Nepal 130 digital PSTN switches and GSM 900 (HMG/N) pronounced its Telecommuni- Mobile switches throughout the country. cations Policy in 1999. The policy has rec- 33% of the Villages are connected with ognised the telecommunications service telephony network. as an essential pre-requisite for socio- economic development of the country. The liberalization of V-SATs in 1999 The Telecommunications Policy is commit- enabled the private sector to provide data ted to develop and expand the telecom- services. Other data services such as Radio munications services in a fair competitive Paging, trunk mobile, and wireless in local atmosphere with the involvement of the loop have opened up in recent years. private sector. These legislations were amended later. Due to rapid development In spite of the tele-density is 1.4 in telecom sector the related Policy, Act, (telephone per 100 populations). However, Regulation are some what outdated within this density is heavily concentrated in the only a few years. The concept has cities, mainly in Kathmandu valley. The changed. Hence, process has already actual coverage in rural area is very low. started to amend the related legislation in Till date only one operator Nepal Tele- some months time. communications Corporation is providing PSTN and GSM mobile services. Some 4 Presently available facts and figures on Present status of basic Telecommunication services in services Nepal are as follows: in the country

Telephone Exchanges in Operation The NTA, the regulatory body has issued following number of licenses to provide a) Locations 170 the different telecommunications services b) Districts 67 as mentioned below: c) Number of Exchanges 172 – Basic Telephone Services 2 – Mobile Telephone Service 1 Telephone Lines – Internet including e-mail 20 a) PSTN 440 000 – Radio Paging 8 c) GSM Mobile 45 000 – Fax mail Service 6 d) Internet Subscriber 35 000 – Video Conferencing 1 e) Internet Users (approx) 120 000 – VSAT Service Provider 10

160 Nepal - 2

– GMPCS Service 2 services were offered a year later on – VSAT Service User 48 15 July 1995. Currently there are 20 ISPs operating in Nepal, and the total HMG/N has a plan to establish minimum bandwidth available is around 20 Mbps. two telephone lines in each Village Development committees (VDC) by 2005 At present, unofficial estimates put the for the fulfilment of Universal Service number of E-mail/Internet registered sub- Obligation (USO). Presently, HMG is scribers in the neighbourhood of 35,000, implementing a “Special Rural Telecommu- where as the total number of users of nications Program” (SRTP) partly through these services is estimated to be 120,000, NTC and partly through private operator. A because of the tendency to share the private operator will be selected through expensive connection with relatives and international competitive bidding process close friends. Estimates also put the by NTA. This operator will establish number of computers in the country at minimum two telephone lines in each VDCs about 140,000. The number of computer of Eastern Development region of the users is estimated at 500,000, a whopping kingdom. 70% of them in the capital alone. These days people in the urban areas in 5 ICT’s for Development Nepal have easy access to Internet as the Telecom infrastructures in the urban areas – Internet for all: are developed. Internet cafes are mush- Public Internet Access rooming in the capital and in bigger cities. Mostly young people are spending consid- Present Status of ICT and Internet in erably long time in internet cafés. Most of NEPAL the Internet Service Providers (ISPs) are concentrated in urban areas. In this 21st century, a bright future of any individual or a society or a nation is ICT is still a rare opportunity to the dependant on the use of computers and people living in the rural part of the the Internet. Information & Communica- country. Most of the villages in Nepal lack tion Technology (ICT) is changing the way normal telephone lines. In a country with people share information, doing business, 58% of literacy; less than 5% population delivering services, government function- are computer literate. There is a great ing. ICT is reconstructing the basis of challenge to expand the service and the national economic power. ICT can reduce transfers of technical know how of the IT knowledge gaps between developed and application to those who are just literate developing countries. in order to make them computer literate. With proper implementation of ICT, our NTC has kept its policy in line with the societies could be enhanced with: well objective of HMG to provide basic tele- equipped education centres regardless of phone service as well as ICT to all the geographic conditions, improved health VDC’s through the expansion of its network care system in remote areas, direct access in the rural areas irrespective of its to global market from remote parts of the economical value and the low prospect of country, faster exchange of information return. NTC is keen to start Multipurpose between organisations within the country. Community Tele-Centres (MCT) in rural All these things are possible only if Internet areas of Nepal. access becomes easily available and affordable in each part of the country. 6 Programs and Nepal’s fascination with the Internet started with the e-mail services provided Institutions Related by Royal Nepal Academy for Science and to Rural ICT Public Technology (RONAST). But commercial e- mail was introduced in the early 90s Centers through a private initiative. Connectivity Public Access Centers was based on dialling in through India. Mercantile Communications, a local com- HMG/N has an ambitious plan to set up pany, began to provide commercial e-mail 1500 IT access centers by the end of the services in June 1994. Full Internet 10th Plan period (2008). There are many

Nepal - 3 161

stakeholders who are initiating work in nication with his/her family in Nepal and rural ICT Public centers. The Ministry of vice versa. Information & Communication (MOIC) and the Ministry of Science & Technology Namche is a famous place which is the (MOST) are collaborating through the starting place for Mount Everest Expedi- National IT Coordination Committee and tion. The ICT/Internet is running well in other working level committees to develop such a remote place. In Kathmandu a strategy to implement the plan. The medical network Healthnet provides online other agencies are Rural-Urban Public access for doctors to international data- Partnership Program, Ministry of Local bases and Nepalese Health information. Development (MLD). The UNDP is provid- This facility is available in Tribhuwan ing MOST with limited support to pilot University Hospital Campus. For new users fifteen rural Tele-centers in order to design a weeklong training is provided to doctors. test and specify a replicable methodology Delivery of services such as health, for eliciting and delivering the information distance education, and other government needs of rural communities. services to the rural population is a possibility. At present such programs are UNDP is undertaking a study “Assessing not initiated/designed. the Feasibility of ICT as a Development Instrument for Rural-Urban Linkages in Nepal”. With the assistance of ESP, the 7 The Bottleneck MLD is preparing an IT Master Plan for in Rural ICT Local Governance, which is nearly in final Development form. The interest of the MLD in ICT is to promote ICT in District Development The most important concern for the Committee (DDC) and municipalities and various agencies involved in Rural ICT to host the web pages of these Public centers in Nepal is the cost of institutions. The Department of Postal telephone calls for Internet access. Services is very much eager to launch Demand from all sectors is to treat all e-posts in the remote districts. Internet access calls as a local call. The IT Policy-2057 stipulates that for ICT activi- MOIC and MOST both have the ties, the Internet access will be made responsibility towards ICT development in available through local call. Concerned Nepal. NTC, with its vast telecommuni- Ministries are working together to provide cations network can become a key player such provision. in ICT development. NTC is playing a key role by supporting the growth of business How Appropriate is Internet for Rural in the IT field. Nepal

Probable Users of Internet in Rural Areas Establishing access to Internet is important if it results in creating informed For using Internet and getting benefit out citizenry and better quality of life for all. of this requires certain level of literacy. But access can be used to increase Being able to connect ideas and to assess inequalities just as it can serve as a information critically are important. The catalyst for spreading the benefits. minimum would be secondary school Access to information and knowledge is completion for using Internet successfully. increasingly recognized as a basic human One of the categories of the people to get right. The poor and the marginalized often advantages is a Development Worker who consider themselves excluded from the provides services to the rural population. If decision-making and activities through a Development Worker is better informed ethnicity, caste; gender; disability or or informed and organized, it will benefit physical isolation. These groups need to be the rural people. Remittance from aboard empowered to take part in the debate and is a good source of income for Nepal. One to contribute their knowledge to decisions million Nepalese mostly from the rural that affect their lives. areas are working in India, Far East, Middle East, and other regions of the world. For Reaching out to these isolated communities the Nepalese living/working aboard, Inter- and taking information to them – rather net has become a cheap means of commu- than expecting them to come and get it –

162 Nepal - 4

is a major challenge in development. There Experience of Other Countries is a perceived need within Nepal for better Some countries have developed success- access to information relevant to develop- fully internet café culture. Examples are: ment and governance. Access to Internet “Cabinas Publicas” in Peru and “Wartels” in does not make any sense if it can provide Indonesia. Bhutan has recently started information relevant to people living in e-mails from post offices. Broad band remote part of the country. There are quite connection in homes have resulted drop in a few URLs where local contents are the internet café use. African countries available. Therefore local content develop- have jointly developed a program which ment should be prime concern during has indicated success. development of ICT in rural areas of Nepal.

In most parts of the country there is no 8 Conclusion electricity. Solar power backed ICT equip- There is a potential of almost limitless ments are getting popular in Nepal, but it possibilities from the use of Internet in is not easily affordable to general public. Nepal. However, it needs certain level of Internet access cost is much higher than in literacy to use Internet. In the urban developed countries. areas especially in Kathmandu the Public Cyber Cafes are mushrooming. In only a The following four questions are relevant couple of years time other towns will in context of Public Internet Access to follow the trend of the capital city. rural population in Nepal. Several agencies are planning and about to start the services in the rural areas for How can we make fruitful use of Internet ICT including internet. At present it is not for the rural areas of a developing country known what will be the result of these like Nepal; where there are other pressing initiatives in rural areas. Only the needs such as clean drinking water, operation for some time and lifting of primary health services, schools, etc.? subsidy will tell the results for evaluation. What are the areas we have to focus on As about one million Nepalese work in while providing information services in other countries for a living, Internet will rural parts of the developing countries? be a good source of communication to

their families in rural areas. It will be Voice Over IP has become a debatable worthwhile to learn from the lessons from issue in Nepal. Convergence of various ICT the success stories of other similar services (Voice, Data, Images, Video) is developing countries. possible using single IP based service. Therefore IP based services including Voice HMG has made a positive attitude for Over IP should be taken as technology or Internet use for all. There are still many Service and whether it should be regulated minor problems that need to be sorted by government? out for the benefit of the net users.

References Some of Contents on Internet (pornography, violence, etc.) are socially not – Outlines Report – Specialised Policy acceptable in countries like Nepal. In such Advice, Teleplanning A. Wirzenius Ltd., cases what are the guidelines to follow by Finland, July 2003, submitted to the Services providers and regulators to Ministry of Information & Communica- control access to such information? tions, HMG/N, Nepal. – MIS Report of NTC. What are the experiences of other – Aide Memoire, 31 January, 2003, developing countries in using “Internet Project Supervision Mission of The Scribes” to provide services to illiterate World Bank to Nepal. person or one who can not use Internet – Various Articles of Computer himself/ or herself? Association of Nepal.

Nepal - 5 163

Mr Ramesh Kumar Adhikari Mr Bhesh Raj Kanel Under Secretary Director International Assistance Section Rural Services Directorate Ministry of Information and Nepal Telecommunication Corporation Communications NP-KATHMANDU Singhadurbar Nepal NP-KATHMANDU Tel.: +977 1 554 8072 Nepal Fax: +977 1 554 8071 Tel.: +977 1 422 8830 Email: [email protected] Fax: +977 1 422 1729 E-mail: [email protected]

164 Nepal - 6

Nicaragua

Retos del acceso público a internet en Nicaragua

Nicaragua enfrenta el reto de aprovechar financiamiento, despliegue, desarrollo las infinitas oportunidades que brinda el y sostenibilidad de dichas iniciativas. Internet como herramienta de desarrollo y – Que fomente el uso de Internet a visualiza el acceso público como uno de los través de la generación de contenidos mecanismos más efectivos para alcanzar el y aplicaciones locales, así como del objetivo de universalizar los beneficios aprovechamiento y sistematización asociados con la disponibilidad de esta local del amplio material global herramienta para toda su población. El existente. aprovechamiento de esta herramienta y la efectividad de las políticas de acceso – Que responda a una visión de futuro público tendientes a mitigar la brecha para lograr el acceso gratuito en digital, no dependen únicamente de las todas las escuelas y centros del alternativas tecnológicas o de la difusión de sistema nacional de educación, su modelos aislados que han resultado articulación con los objetivos educati- exitosos, sino fundamentalmente, de la vos de largo plazo y la sensibilización capacidad del país para articular múltiples del sector privado con relación a los esfuerzos mediante una política nacional de significativos retornos futuros que acceso a Internet: pueden ser obtenidos mediante este tipo de inversión. – Que optimice los limitados recursos – Que considere todas las alternativas públicos disponibles para el acceso tecnológicas y los modelos de acceso universal, provenientes de la coopera- público disponibles que mejor respon- ción internacional o de recaudaciones dan a las necesidades de demanda de internas, al evitar duplicidad y al definir servicios. Las soluciones de banda estrategias de cobertura que respon- estrecha tales como los sistemas de dan a las características de los distintos radio paquetes de bajo costo, conti- segmentos de población agrupados de núan siendo alternativas válidas acuerdo a su disponibilidad de pago. cuando el acceso público a Internet – Que responda a las necesidades de responde primariamente a la necesidad las comunidades y visualice el acceso de comunicación. público no como un fin en si mismo, sino como un medio que se inserte En menos de un año Nicaragua ha dentro de una estrategia integral para experimentado un crecimiento de las el desarrollo de dichas comunidades. cabinas públicas de acceso a Internet con fines comerciales, de aproximadamente un – Que aproveche el potencial de las 300%. El éxito de este crecimiento es iniciativas privadas de acceso público a atribuido al simple hecho de no interferir Internet, al evitar que el Estado se con sus operaciones y a la existencia de un convierta en competidor debido a la marco jurídico que las respalda. No implementación de proyectos dirigidos obstante, continuamos enfrentando el a segmentos que podrían ser atendidos enorme reto de encausarnos con una visión por el sector privado y al facilitar un común para aprovechar el potencial del marco regulatorio adecuado para el Internet como herramienta de desarrollo,

Nicaragua - 1 165

para dinamizar el papel del sector privado, Referencias para dar atención a la demanda existente – De la Roca, Pablo/García Téllez, en las zonas que no son atendidas por este Edwin/García Talavera, Víctor; TELCOR, sector, para mejorar la gestión del sector Ente Regulador; Diagnóstico sobre público y para poder implementar solucio- Infraestructura de Telecomunicaciones nes creativas de acceso público a Internet e Internet en Nicaragua (presentado al en un país donde más del 50% de su equipo consultor de la Unión Inter- población enfrenta problemas de analfabe- nacional de Telecomunicaciones en el tismo funcional y cerca del 65% de su marco preparatorio de la cumbre población se encuentra en condiciones de Mundial sobre la Sociedad de Informa- pobreza, sin disponer de recursos económi- ción); Capítulo III del Diagnóstico cos para ser invertidos en comunicaciones. Regional. La optimización de los limitados recursos – Arce, Maria Edith/López, José Ignacio; disponibles mediante el desarrollo cohe- GTZ; Experiencias de Telecentros en rente de una política nacional de acceso Nicaragua. público y de aprovechamiento del Internet, – Arce, Maria Edith/Hoppman, Cornelio; marcará la diferencia entre la ampliación o Consultores Independientes; Estudio reducción de nuestra brecha digital. de e-readiness para Nicaragua.

Sra Alma María Cuadra Villavicencio Sr Victor García Ingeniero Electrónico Director of Telecommunications TELCOR Regulatory Agency Edificio Telcor TELCOR Avenida Bolívar Esq. diagonal a la Edificio Telcor Cancillería Avenida Bolívar Esq. diagonal a la Apartado 2664 Cancillería NI-MANAGUA Apartado 2664 Nicaragua NI-MANAGUA Nicaragua Tel.: +505 867 5434 Fax: +505 222 7327 Tel.: +505 222 7350 E-mail: [email protected] Fax: +505 222 7554 E-mail: [email protected]

166 Nicaragua - 2

Pakistan

Telecommunication Development Country Report for Pakistan

PAKISTAN TELECOMMUNICATION AUTHORITY

COUNTRY PAPER

Pakistan - 1 167

PAKISTAN TELECOMMUNICATION AUTHORITY

Introduction

1. Among the ten most populous countries of the world, with a population base of 149 million, Pakistan is a developing economy located in South East Asia. It has India on the East, Afghanistan & Iran on the West, China on its North and Arabian sea in the South. Pakistan is primarily an agricultural country that contributes to 25% of the economy with raw cotton and rice as major exports. Pakistan’s GDP per capita is USD 492.

PAKISTAN TELECOMMUNICATION AUTHORITY

Introduction

2. The Government of Pakistan has identified IT & Telecom as one of the major sectors of growth on which to revitalize its economy. Major reforms have been introduced and sector opened to competition to facilitate private investment and create a pro- business environment.

168 Pakistan - 2

PAKISTAN TELECOMMUNICATION AUTHORITY

Telecommunication Sector of Pakistan

Pakistan has made steady progress in expanding telecommunication networks and services in recent years. Key features of the present telecommunication infrastructure in Pakistan are: 1. PTCL, the incumbent, enjoyed monopoly over fixed line telecommunications services until December 2002. It was established as public limited company in 1996 and has 88% shares owned by the Government of Pakistan. It has shown impressive growth in the past 5 years and manages a well-developed domestic telecommunication infrastructure of 4.85 million access lines (June 2003), nationwide fiber-optic backbone and international communication through sub-marine cable (SMW3) and satellite links.

PAKISTAN TELECOMMUNICATION AUTHORITY

Pakistan Telecommunication Company PTCL

2. PTCL has installed more than 1.5 million new telephone lines since June 1997. As a result, teledensity (defined as the number of operational telephone lines as a percentage of population), at about 2.56%, has increased by 6% per year. 3. The telecommunication network is 100% digital.

Pakistan - 3 169

PAKISTAN TELECOMMUNICATION AUTHORITY

National Telecommunication Corporation NTC

National Telecommunication Corporation was formed in 1996 in order to meet telecommunication requirements of Government and Defense Forces. It has nationwide presence with a network of 72,000 customer access lines and nationwide fiber-optic backbone infrastructure.

PAKISTAN TELECOMMUNICATION AUTHORITY

Special Communication Organization (SCO)

The Government created SCO in 1976 and gave it the task of installing and maintaining telecommunication facilities in the entire Azad Jammu and Kashmir and Northern Areas. SCO operates a network of 60,000 lines in its territory.

170 Pakistan - 4

PAKISTAN TELECOMMUNICATION AUTHORITY

Cellular Mobile Telephony

Cell-phone usage is rapidly growing and the subscriber base has crossed 2.3 Million mark from a mere 0.35 Million. Calling Party Pays (“CPP”) regime has significantly contributed to the growth of mobile industry. Currently, four operators (2 GSM, 1 D-AMPS, 1AMPS) provide services all over the country based on nationwide licenses.

PAKISTAN TELECOMMUNICATION AUTHORITY

Internet Services

More than 70 active Internet service providers provide Internet access, which is accessible in more than 1700 cities and towns. Low Internet rates have contributed to higher Internet usage in the country. Internet services are accessible at a cost of single unit local call charges without discrimination of distance, in most parts of the country. Substantial reduction in bandwidth prices contributed towards growth of IT sector. Low-priced data communication services are available to companies in the information and communications technology sector in order to encourage these companies to establish and grow in Pakistan.

Pakistan - 5 171

PAKISTAN TELECOMMUNICATION AUTHORITY

Role of Other Private Sector Operators

Private sector operators have played a very important role in developing the value added services market in Pakistan. Major investments are in cellular mobile and value added services that include Card Payphones, Premium rate services, call centers, Internet service providers and data network operators. Some private sector service providers have deployed fiber-optic infrastructure in main cities to provide CaTV and Internet services. In addition, PTCL has entered into O&M contracts with private sector partners to offer services such as Wireless Local Loop (WLL), pay-phones, DSL based Internet access, pre-paid calling cards, International voice termination using VoIP technology. Companies in the Information Technology business can set up satellite based direct international connectivity for call centers / IT services under franchise agreement with PTCL.

PAKISTAN TELECOMMUNICATION AUTHORITY

Regulatory Perspective

1. Efforts to develop a fully competitive market in telecom sector were initiated in the early 90’s. The Pakistan Telecommunication (Re-organization) Act, was promulgated in 1996. Pakistan Telecommunication Authority (“PTA”) – the telecom regulator, was established to regulate the telecom industry. 2. Frequency Allocation Board (“FAB”) is entrusted with the responsibility of allocating and assigning frequency spectrum to Government, telecom system / service providers, broadcasting operators and private users of wireless systems.

172 Pakistan - 6

PAKISTAN TELECOMMUNICATION AUTHORITY

TELEPHONE ACCESSIBILITY

1. Pakistan Telecommunication network is expanding each year, thus providing telephone access to rural and urban communities. Total lines installed by May 2003 are 4.446 million, out of which 3.747 million are in service as against 3.655 million last year. This resulted in an increase in the tele-density from 2.27 to 2.56 during this year. The teledensity is still lower than many other developing countries. Table 1 shows the tele-density for the last six years.

PAKISTAN TELECOMMUNICATION AUTHORITY

TELEPHONE ACCESSIBILITY

Growth Trend of Teledensity in Pakistan (fig-1)

Years ALIS Population Teledensity 2.660 1998 2.660 133.61 1.99 2.874 1999 2.874 136.69 2.10 3.053 2000 3.053 139.76 2.18 3.252 2001 3.252 142.86 2.27 3.655 2002 3.655 145.96 2.50 2003 3.816 149.03 2.56

Pakistan - 7 173

PAKISTAN TELECOMMUNICATION AUTHORITY

TELEPHONE ACCESSIBILITY

Growth Trend of Teledensity in Pakistan

3 2.5 2.56 2.5 2.27 2.18 2.1 1.99 2

1.5

0.5

0 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003

PAKISTAN TELECOMMUNICATION AUTHORITY

Cellular Mobile in Pakistan

Cellular industry of Pakistan comprises of four companies namely Instaphone, Paktel, Mobilink and U-fone. The industry has shown tremendous growth in the year 2001-2002 as the subscriber base increased from 0.7 million to 1.2 million (70% increase). However, this growth rate is lower than the previous years growth rate.

Mobilink and U-phone are using digital technology (GSM) for its cellular service. Lately Instaphone introduced D-amps, (Digital Analogue Mobile Phone System). Table 2 gives a bird’s eye view of the situation of cellular market in Pakistan from 1999 to 2003.

174 Pakistan - 8

PAKISTAN TELECOMMUNICATION AUTHORITY Cellular Mobile in Pakistan Cellular Subscribers in Pakistan (fig-2) Year Instaphone Mobilink Paktel PTML Total Growth (U-fone) rate % 1995-96 20,950 16,385 30,703 - 68,038 -

1996-97 43,029 52,600 39,398 - 135,027 98.4

1997-98 53,184 82,912 6,000 - 196,096 45.2

1998-99 108,058 87,556 70,000 - 265,612 35.4

1999-2000 112,000 114,272 80,221 - 306,493 15.4

2000-2001 220,000 309,272 116,71196,623 742,606 142.0

2001-2002 319,926 570,888 141,679206,109 1,238,602 66.79

2002-2003 441,226 1,080,903 550,159272,511 234,799 89.3

PAKISTAN TELECOMMUNICATION AUTHORITY

Cellular Mobile in Pakistan Cellular Subscribers in Pakistan 2344799

1238602

742606

306493 196096 265612 68038 135027

1995-96 1996-97 1997-98 1998-99 1999-00 2000-01 2001- 2002- 2002 2003

Pakistan - 9 175

PAKISTAN TELECOMMUNICATION AUTHORITY

Cellular Mobile in Pakistan

Figure shows the market share of cellular operators with respect to the number of subscribers.

Instaphone 19% PTML 23%

Pa ktel 12%

Mob ilink 46%

PAKISTAN TELECOMMUNICATION AUTHORITY

Card Payphone Industry

As part of the broader consumer oriented policy, Pakistan Telecommunication Authority has been encouraging deployment of payphones in the country with special subsidies for the rural areas. Local manufacturing of terminal equipment has been encouraged. Annual revenues have exceeded 8 billion rupees. Indoor and outdoor units are installed in urban and rural areas exceeding 116,000 phones.

176 Pakistan - 10

PAKISTAN TELECOMMUNICATION AUTHORITY

Card Payphone Industry

Total Number of PCO’s in Pakistan (1999–2003)

115074 120000 98759 100000

80000 57446 60000

40000 27710

20000

0 1999-2000 2000-2001 2001-2002 mars-03

PAKISTAN TELECOMMUNICATION AUTHORITY

Type Approvals

Under the provisions of the Pakistan Telecommunication (Re- organization) Act 1996, the Authority certifies the terminal equipment which is to be connected to the public networks. In order to facilitate users and operators the process have been made easy and fast. As part of the liberal policy PTA accepts certification of world renowned certification labs.

Pakistan - 11 177

PAKISTAN TELECOMMUNICATION AUTHORITY

Standards

Standards & Specification wing has significantly contributed towards the adaptation of worldwide standards by offering consultative draft recommendations to the industry. These drafts become fully approved standards after the approval of the Authority.

Major-General Shazada Alam Malik Mr Wasim Tauqir Chairman Director Policy & Research Pakistan Telecommunication Authority Pakistan Telecommunication Authority (PTA) (PTA) Authority Headquarters, 3rd Floor, Sector F-5/1 CTRL Building PK-ISLAMABAD H-9/4 Pakistan PK-ISLAMABAD Tel.: +92 51 287 8130 Pakistan Fax: +92 51 287 8120 Tel.: +92 51 441 4910 E-mail: [email protected] Fax: +92 51 441 4676 E-mail: [email protected]

178 Pakistan - 12

Papua New Guinea

ICTs for Development – Internet for all Public Internet Access

1 Summary 3 Public Internet Access

The world is increasingly becoming IP- in Papua New Guinea centric through the increased use of the The Papua New Guinea telecommuni- Internet. At the same time the develop- cations network is operated by a single ment of certain IP protocols such as the monopoly Carrier, Telikom PNG Ltd, Session Initiation Protocol will further http://www.telikompng.com.pg, which is benefit developing countries such as 100% owned by the Papua New Guinea Papua New Guinea. Government.

The Papua New Guinea Government and The Papua New Guinea telecom- the Papua New Guinea Telecommuni- munications authority, PANGTEL, cations Regulatory Authority through their http://www.pangtel.gov.pg/pangtel, is policies and regulatory arrangements the national telecommunications provide some support for the use of the regulator. Internet as an important medium for national development. Four Internet Service Providers (ISPs), provide the public Internet access in PNG. This Report identifies that in Papua New The four ISPs are connected to the Guinea two of the main constraints to outside world via a single gateway router. public Internet access for both urban and This single router, owned by Pacific rural areas is the high cost, and Mobile, which is a subsidiary Mobile tele- inadequate network infrastructure. It phone company of Telikom PNG, is further identifies that more government connected to Australia via two links, one support is required in terms of relevant to Optus and other to Telstra. The total vision, strategies, and policies, and their bandwidth to Australia is currently six timely execution. Mega Bits Per Second (6 MBPS).

2 Introduction 4 Constraints to Internet Access in The Internet Protocol (IP) is enabling the convergence of telecommunications and Papua New Guinea computing, which in turn should lead to lower cost of the telecommunications The following are two main constraints to services, such as the public Internet access. Internet Access in Papua New Guinea: This should very much benefit a developing – High Cost, country such as Papua New Guinea (PNG), http://www.postcourier.com.pg/. – Infrastructure Limitations.

In this Report some of the major current 4.1 High cost problems and several possible solutions in relation to public Internet access in PNG Telikom PNG Ltd incurs high operational are discussed briefly. costs due to many factors including

Papua New Guinea - 1 179 equipment vandalism, difficult tropical 5 Deregulation, mountainous terrain, and land compensa- tion demands. Therefore it is financially Government Policies, constrained. Being government owned, it and Regulatory also suffers from various governmental disturbances. Existing internal network Approaches management process inefficiencies also The Government already has Plans to contribute to slow response to market deregulate the industry. But segments of demands. Until most or all of the the industry feel that, in the interest of its problems are eliminated, the high cost of citizens, and the development of the Internet access will continue to exist. country, the government will need to deregulate certain segments of the The local telephone call (dial up access) industry as soon as possible. This should itself costs around K3.00 per hour be done in a responsible manner whereby (USD 80 per hour). However final costs for Internet access, more than one including the ISP costs to the end user is Internet gateways are allowed to operate close to K10.00 (USD 2.70) per hour. The from certain areas in PNG. These local Internet Cafes also charge an gateways should operate competitively average of around K10.00 per hour. The and help to keep the Internet access cost four ISPs pass on these costs to the end low. users. However, these cost are not easily affordable by the ordinary citizens. The Government is currently in the Process of partially privatizing Telikom PNG, which should result in a modern and efficient management system for the 4.2 Infrastructure Limitations Company. Such a Management System will be expected to respond quickly and Currently Telikom PNG lacks the neces- cost effectively to the telecommunications sary financial resources to quickly service needs of the people of Papua New upgrade and modernize the infrastruc- Guinea, based on modern telecommuni- ture. Therefore, there is very limited cations business decision sequences, Internet access from the rural areas, due without any negative impact on the Papua to almost nil infrastructure. This does not New Guinea environment and culture. include the remote resource development Centers, such as mining and oil field sites. Government policies already exist, that cover areas such as, rural telecommunications, community service, and universal In the urban areas the Internet access is service obligations. However, they will limited by bandwidth bottlenecks within need to be executed based upon relevant various network segments through out and more focused, visions and strategies. the national network. This also affects the Further more, they will need to be very few Internet users in the rural areas. financially supported, and be executed in a timely manner. Despite the high cost of accessing the Internet, the demand is very much on the PANGTEL also believes in a consultative increase. Not long ago, the bandwidth approach to the communication industry was increased to 6 MBPS, but already, it in PNG and have formed various volunteer gets 100% utilized during the normal committees to capture industry viewpoint working hours. Majority of the people who on matters relating to the telecommuni- are accessing the Internet are the cations industry in Papua New Guinea. working class, and students. 6 Network Due to many reasons, including those mentioned above, the response to market Infrastructure demand by Telikom PNG is also very slow. Development Sometimes there can be over a million KINA worth of unfulfilled outstanding The emerging cheaper IP based orders in a year. technologies presents an opportunity for Telikom PNG to reposition itself as a

180 Papua New Guinea - 2

“green field” Carrier by redeveloping it’s urban customers. These systems may be mostly out dated network infrastructure useful for further expansion from the with newer IP based network equipment. remote VSAT sites. They may also be used to enable access into those rural Unfortunately, being a Government owned areas that are adjacent and closer to the monopoly entity, Telikom PNG is faced with urban areas. financial constraints. Therefore, its move towards modernization of the national tele- The use of session initiation protocol (SIP) communications network will be slow and over this new network will further present gradual, until the Government completes an opportunity to Telikom PNG to offer IP the partial privatization process. telephony services at a much more affordable prices to both rural and urban Recently, Telikom PNG embarked on a customers. national strategy in consultation with the national government, to acquire VSAT It is also planned to evaluate the use equipment for deployment in rural areas. VOIP over 802.11 for both rural and This is under the government’s rural tele- urban areas. communications policy. Using a technology such as VSAT, Internet access can be 7.1 Rural Internet access provided to the rural areas. Telikom PNG Ltd will provide the service, but the Rural community based Internet access government will help subsidizes the costs can be quite easily provided using such of supporting the service. technology like VSAT. Most likely place to locate these rural Internet access systems Currently Telikom PNG is very slowly would be in schools, community centers, working towards finalizing an acquisition satellite towns, and local government process to acquire a modern data centers. communications network infrastructure. This will be a broadband network and will The location of these systems will also be able to transport voice, data, and very much enable the government’s rural video services. The Core will consist of telecommunications policy initiative. Not ATM/MPLS switches, while the access will only, would there be Internet access, but, consist of DLC, DSLAM, and broadband there will be other services such as wireless, access devices. The network will telephone and fax services. Overall a be developed in three phases within a community center or a school, for three-year period. It is anticipated to example, will provide services such as; cover the nineteen provinces. Due to the email, chat, web surfing, e-learning, financial constraints, the phase one e-store, pots, fax, etc. network, which is part of three-year three-phase plan, will consist of a scaled down three-site network. 8 Rural Internet This infrastructure development will also Applications require the upgrade of the current 6 MBPS A recently established remote satellite Internet gateway bandwidth, and will town, Panakei, which is located in the Siwai support both the rural and urban areas. area, on the island of Bougainville, Papua Plan is also in place, despite it’s New Guinea, already has demand for telecommunications services. The Community implementation being delayed, to introduce VOIP trunking on the international links as is hoping for the Provincial Government, well as the national links. National Government, and Telikom PNG to assist them. The planned Internet applications include online cultural artifact shop, 7 Services Development online tourism promotion, and online vocational training. When such a service It is anticipated that a rural VSAT become available it will help in bringing connected to the new network should social and economic development to the enable cost effective Internet access into rural grass roots people. It will also rural areas. The broadband wireless simultaneously minimize the urban – rural access devices based on meshed technol- digital gap and the migration of youth into ogy will be used to connect both rural and the town and cities.

Papua New Guinea - 3 181

The University of Papua New Guinea 9 Conclusion planned to offer online degree courses to regional University Centers, some of This Report has briefly highlighted that which are located in the remote areas of despite some Government support, the Papua New Guinea, starting this year. development of the Papua New Guinea Unfortunately this was delayed due to telecommunications network, lacks lack of necessary infrastructure. When adequate financial resources and efficient implemented, cost effective university management. This will continue to slow level education will be readily available to down the adoption of the Internet the remotely located citizens. technology. Therefore any support, from the ITU or the Region, to cost effectively develop the Network, would be most welcome.

Mr Paul Ginis Mr Peter Luku Executive Manager Manager Enforcement & Consumer Affairs Data Communications Planning Papua New Guinea Telecommunication Telikom PNG Limited Authority (PANGTEL) 1st Floor Telikom Rumana Frangipani Street, Hohola 685 8227 PG-WAIGANI PG-BOROKO, NDC Papua New Guinea Papua New Guinea Tel.: +67 5 300 52 63 Tel.: +67 5 325 8633 Fax: +67 5 300 52 63 Fax: +67 5 300 4829 E-mail: [email protected] E-mail: [email protected]

182 Papua New Guinea - 4

Paraguay

ICTs for Development: Internet for all: Public Internet Access

1 Introduction those are places where people lease computers with access to Internet, to accessible prices, also those “cybercafés” The public access to telecommunications are installed in shopping centers in which services is a special interest for the the access is free and they are used to national authorities. This policy is accord- promote the services of the suppliers ing with the philosophical line of the legal (ISPs). normative in Paraguay. Besides, also exist shops named "cabinas Particularly, regarding Internet, we can telefónicas", that offer phone services, fax divide the public access in two parts. One, services and Internet access. referred to the urban environment; the other one, referred to the rural environment. From the public sector, the Comisión Nacional de Telecomunicaciones (CONATEL), government institution of In Paraguay, the diffusion of Internet in the telecommunications regulation in the urban environment, is extensive. It is Paraguay, is in charge of promoting the given principally in the populated cities, availability from the public access to Asunción, Encarnación and Ciudad del Internet. In particular, from the State, Este, however, in the rural areas the projects have been elaborated for the diffusion of Internet is limited. This is sector of the education. because of the market forces difference among the mentioned areas. In the cities you frequently see the Internet access availability at home, via phone or via 3 New horizon in the leased connection, however, this is not use of Internet the case in the rural areas.

On the other hand, from a general point of view of the use of Internet, besides the 2 Initiatives from the traditional interest of the users in the public and private Web, electronic mail, chat, etc. It is being carried out efforts for the implementation sectors of the distance learning in diverse universities. Although to the date don't The investments in projects of public still exist centers that dictate courses at Internet access from the private sector distance, the international offer of courses have been focused in the urban envi- is extended, and a lot of students in ronment. In the populated cities, have Paraguay have adopted this education been installed the named “cybercafés” method.

Paraguay - 1 183

4 Practical example of Internet, for the elaboration of the investigation works through the Web and application of the the distance learning. development of the public Internet access The project has as objective the diffusion of Internet in sectors of the education in Paraguay that would not have access in another way. However, the grant on the part of the State won't be able to be indefinite. A practical example of development of the For that reason, it is planning, the way in public Internet access is the one imple- that service will be financed lapsed the mented by the Comisión Nacional de five years of recruiting of the company. Telecomunicaciones (CONATEL). An alternative is the contribution of the parents of the students for the maintenance of the service; other, the The CONATEL, is subsidizing installation contribution of the private sector in order and operation of the Internet access for to continue the service once the CONATEL schools of primary and secondary levels no longer subsidizes them. (high school) in the whole national territory, with main attention in the rural areas. 5 Conclusion

In the urban environment, the public At the moment, the project takes little Internet access is sufficiently diffused by more than one year and it arrives at some means of named “cybercafés” and by 278 schools. The financing is carried out means of named “cabinas públicas”, by using a fund coming from the however, in the rural environment where operators of telecommunications services it is not justified the private investment who contribute proportionally to its due to the null or negative revenue, it is revenues in concordance with the Law necessary the participation of the State. 642/95 of Telecommunications. This fund This way, National Constitution from is called Fund of the Universal Services. 1992, defines to Paraguay as a Social This way, the provision of the Internet State of Right. In this sense, the State, access to the rural areas is taken as an through the Comisión Nacional de Tele- universal service. comunicaciones has taken to the Internet service, as an universal service and therefore it is subsidized it. In order to implement the development of the public Internet access, the CONATEL There are two questions that they should has elaborated a project of attendance to be kept in mind for the near future; one: the schools, determining in a first phase, other areas of the telecommunications 278 schools which have been endowed of should be attended with the Fund of computers, printers and other equipments Universal Services; an example is the besides the Internet access and mainte- public telephony and since the resources nance of the equipments for five years. are scarce, probably the grant to the To take the project to the practice, the schools for the Internet access is not CONATEL has called to bid to national sustainable; two: the implemented pro- companies that are willing to provide the ject just affects to one of the rural goods and services referred. The winning population's segment (children and teach- company was, according to the terms of ers of the school environment), It haven't the bid, the one that the minor prices an universal projection. request to carry out this provision. For the referred reasons, it would be desirable that the State, in direct way and The schools are endowed this way, of the by means of the use of special funds goods and necessary services. The dedicated to the project, maintain and equipment and services let the students foment the public Internet access in the to access to the available information in rural areas.

184 Paraguay - 2

Sr Rubén Aldo Ruiz-Pajon Sra Mónica Raquel Vázquez Meixner Asesor Técnico Jefa del Departamento de Gestión Gerencia Técnica Administrativa Comisión Nacional de Secretaría General Telecomunicaciones Comisión Nacional de (CONATEL) Telecomunicaciones Edificio San Rafael (CONATEL) Yegros No. 437 Yegros 437 y 25 de Mayo PY-ASUNCIÓN Casilla de Correo 1483 Paraguay PY-ASUNCIÓN Paraguay

Tel.: +595 21 440 020 E-mail: [email protected] Tel.: +595 21 425 406 Fax: +595 21 425 406 E-mail: [email protected]

Paraguay - 3 185

Peru

TICS para el desarrollo: Internet para todos: Acceso publico a Internet

1 Introduccion 2 Las oportunidades El servicio de Internet aparece en el Perú que ofrece internet en 1991 a través de la Red Científica Peruana (RCP), en su etapa inicial estuvo El Estado Peruano asume los retos de la restringido al ámbito académico. En 1994 globalización, aplicando las tecnologías de la Red Científica Peruana (RCP) funda la la información y comunicación para inser- primera cabina pública Internet, a partir tar al país en el nuevo orden de la de ese momento las cabinas públicas de sociedad de la información. Por lo tanto, acceso a Internet en nuestro país han ha emprendido una serie de iniciativas experimentado un gran crecimiento, por tendientes a promover que las entidades lo que han sido consideradas como del Estado utilicen Tecnologías de la modelo a nivel internacional. Información y Comunicación para lograr transparencia, participación y una efi- Y es que el Perú se ha convertido en el ciente gestión gubernamental y optimizar pionero de las cabinas públicas a escala el uso de la infraestructura de Tele- mundial, implementando un sistema de comunicaciones utilizando las redes conectividad compartido, un modelo de existentes. desarollo impulsado por pequeños empr- esarios. Para ello ha desarrollado una Estrategia Nacional de Gobierno Electrónico que Funcionan en el país más de torna la gestión pública más eficiente. 2500 Cabinas que permiten el acceso comunitario a Internet a casi el 75% de El sistema de información regional usuarios con precios alrededor de los permitirá a cada municipio publicar su 0.60 centavos de dólar por hora, lo que historia, cultura, atractivos turísticos, ha hecho posible que en la que el acceso proyectos, etc., el portal de compras del de los peruanos a Internet sea mucho Estado hará posible canalizar las compras más alta que en varios países de la región públicas hacia las regiones de forma y el mundo. totalmente transparente, y el sistema de memorial institucional basado en la En el ranking elaborado por la Intranet, que permitirá que la información Universidad de Harvard (2001) que mide del Estado se preserve, difunda y sea el acceso público a Internet, el Perú accesible. destaca nítidamente, por delante de la mayoría de los países de la región, e De esa manera se facilita la descentraliza- incluso del mundo, ocupando el puesto 13 ción del país, otorgando una mayor 1 a nivel mundial . transparencia y un mayor fortalecimiento de la democracia.

______La cabina pública se convertirá en una

1 OSIPTEL: Documento de Trabajo: La situación de oficina virtual de atención ciudadana Internet en el Perú (a Diciembre de 2001). atendiendo en cualquier parte de la

Peru - 1 187 nación, e impulsará el desarrollo del co- 3 Barreras que impiden mercio electrónico en el Perú al permitir que ciudadanos y empresas paguen sus el acceso de grandes tasas con medios tan variados como la sectores de la tarjeta de crédito, tarjetas de débito, tarjetas prepago población a Internet A la fecha se han obtenido mejoras importantes en el sector telecomunica- El Proyecto Piloto de Bibliotecas Rurales ciones en el Perú, con relación a la desarrollado en conjunto con la Biblioteca expansión y modernización de los ser- Nacional del Perú, está contribuyendo a vicios, incremento de la densidad telefó- elevar el nivel de vida en la zona alto nica, desarrollo de servicios básicos de andina del Departamento de Huanca- telecomunicaciones en zonas rurales, velica, beneficiando a 10 distritos rurales calidad de los servicios, opciones de en extrema pobreza, mediante el acceso elección para los usuarios en el ámbito a Internet y telefonía, promoviendo la nacional e internacional. Sin embargo, la producción y difusión de programas con densidad telefónica y conectividad a contenidos propios y acceso a un Portal Internet son aún muy bajos, debido Web. principalmente a la existencia de barreras de carácter económico, social y tecnoló- gico que impiden el acceso de grandes El programa Huascarán es un programa sectores de la población a las redes de estratégico especializado en el uso educa- información. tivo de las tecnologías de la información y Entre las barreras de carácter económico comunicación, contribuye a ampliar la podemos señalar: (a) Los altos costos que cobertura y a mejorar la calidad de los deben pagar los usuarios por el acceso a procesos de enseñanza y aprendizaje en Internet, especialmente cuando el costo todos sus niveles y modalidades, permi- está en función al tráfico cursado, y a tiendo su descentralización y democra- tarifas del servicio telefónico; (b) Los tización. Llegando a más personas en altos costos que se pagan por los enlaces cualquier lugar del territorio nacional, internacionales y (c) Los altos costos de usando todos los medios tecnológicos recursos informáticos (hardware y soft- como son la radio y televisión educativas, ware) necesarios para el acceso a la informática educativa, el Internet y Internet. otros medios digitales. Entre las barreras de carácter social se puede observar la falta de capacitación de El programa Huascarán ha iniciado la la población en cuanto al uso y beneficios atención a nivel nacional de los centros que ofrece el Internet necesario para un educativos estatales, rurales, urbanos y mejor aprovechamiento del mismo, así urbanos marginales donde docentes y como la falta de una cultura de auto- alumnos tienen acceso directo al uso de aprendizaje a distancia. equipos de informática. Los docentes son Entre las barreras de carácter tecnológico capacitados en la Integración, el aprove- se observa que para gran parte de la chamiento pedagógico, la apropiación, así población aún no están disponibles tecno- como la producción de material educativo logías alternativas para el acceso a con las tecnologías de información y Internet, que permitan una mayor capa- comunicación. Además, la implementa- cidad de transmisión y velocidad de ción de la plataforma satelital y tecnoló- respuesta, a costos accesibles para los gica y un centro de datos que constituirá usuarios, tal es el caso de las tecnologías la red de transmisión más grande del de línea digital de abonado. país, la creación del portal Huascarán con recursos educativos variados para niños, La existencia de tales barreras dificulta la jóvenes docentes y comunidad en ge- masificación del acceso a Internet, origi- neral. El programa se extenderá a nando que gran parte de la población aún 2353 centros educativos estatales, benefi- no tengan posibilidades reales de ciando a aproximadamente 1’808,000 participar de las ventajas de la era de la alumnos y 78,900 docentes. información.

188 Peru - 2

4 Medidas de política 2) Promover el uso de redes alternativas para el acceso a Internet, y una regulatoria competencia efectiva en el mercado de telecomunicaciones que beneficie El Estado Peruano conviene en convertir principalmente a los usuarios, con la llamada Brecha Digital en Oportunidad menores tarifas y mejor calidad de Digital, basándose en la formulación de servicios. propuestas para un Plan de Acción para el acceso democrático a la Sociedad de la 3) Propender en coordinación con los Información y Conocimiento, planteadas operadores de servicios de telecomu- por la comisión Multisectorial: «e- Perú». nicaciones, al establecimiento de es- El Estado es consciente de la importancia quemas tarifarios destinados a reducir de la Sociedad de la Información para el los costos de acceso a Internet en el futuro del Perú, especialmente en la más breve plazo. educación de la población, el aumento de la competitividad económica de las em- 4) Promover la expansión del acceso a presas, la cohesión social del país y su Internet a nivel nacional, a usuarios posición en el contexto internacional en domiciliarios, o a través de cabinas un entorno caracterizado por la globaliza- públicas de acceso a Internet y ción económica, la apertura de mercados Fortalecer los planes gubernamenta- y la continua innovación tecnológica. les que permitan el acceso a Internet en zonas rurales y de preferente En tal sentido, en le Perú se han dado una interés social. serie de dispositivos legales con el objeto de promover el uso masivo de Internet, 5) Las entidades gubernamentales según su expansión,| acceso, y aplicaciones. el ámbito de su competencia, deberán identificar y desarrollar proyectos pilotos regionales y nacionales basa- 5 Normas generales dos en tecnologías de la información, tales como teleducación, telemedi- • En agosto de 1998, mediante Decreto cina, teletrabajo, entre otros. Supremo, se aprueban los «Linea- mientos de Política de Apertura al Mercado de Telecomunicaciones en el 6) Las entidades de la administración Perú», que señala como una de las pública deberán incluir en sus planes principales metas del sector, el incre- sectoriales, así como en el desarrollo mentar sustancialmente el acceso a de sus actividades, metas relaciona- Internet en el Perú. das con el uso de Internet y el uso de herramientas informáticas, a fin de • En junio de 2001, mediante Decreto agilizar la prestación de servicios Supremo, se aprueban los «Linea- gubernamentales y propender a la mientos de Políticas Generales para prestación de servicios en línea promover la masificación del acceso a (gobierno electrónico) a través de Internet en el Perú». Dicho Decreto páginas web y servicios de consulta crea también una Comisión Multi- interactivo. sectorial encargada de la formulación de un Plan de Acción Nacional para 7) Las entidades de la administración Masificar el Uso de Internet. pública deberán crear una red inte- grada del Estado, sobre una platafor- Las acciones destinadas a lograr la ma tecnológica segura, que permita masificación del acceso a Internet en el optimizar los recursos asignados. Perú, deben considerar, entre otros, los lineamientos de política siguientes: 8) Las entidades gubernamentales invo- 1) Promover la masificación del acceso y lucradas y las organizaciones privadas uso de Internet y las tecnologías de la interesadas deberán realizar coordina- información, optimizando y desarro- ciones para desarrollar planes desti- llando la infraestructura de teleco- nados a aprovechar el potencial que municaciones existente a nivel ofrece el comercio electrónico y las nacional. tecnologías de la información para

Peru - 3 189

crear nuevas oportunidades comer- b) Gobierno en Línea ciales para nuestro país, en especial c) Comercio electrónico para las medianas, pequeñas y microempresas. d) Educación y Capacitación 9) El Ministerio de Educación en e) Organización y Gestión coordinación con los organismos correspondientes deberá entre otros, presentar planes para la dotación del • En junio de 2003, se crea la Comisión servicio de acceso a Internet y de Multisectorial para el Desarrollo de la herramientas informáticas en los Sociedad de la Información – CODESI centros educativos, bibliotecas públi- con el mandato de elaborar un Plan cas y universidades; establecer como para el desarrollo de la Sociedad de la parte de la currícula educativa, cursos Información (SI) en el Perú, el que de informática de carácter obligatorio deberá contener el diagnóstico de la para los estudiantes; promover una situación actual en el contexto de la cultura de auto aprendizaje y capa- Sociedad de la Información, las citación a distancia; difundir a través acciones necesarias a ejecutar y los de Internet, programas educativos, proyectos de normas y dispositivos recursos didácticos y material de para el desarrollo, implementación, y consulta desarrollados en base a la promoción de la Sociedad de la currícula educativa, a fin de promover Información en el Perú. su utilización masiva de los Asimismo, esta comisión tiene como educandos. función, la promoción y ejecución de 10) Promover la reducción de costos en programas que promuevan el uso todos los componentes que permitan seguro de Internet, de las telecomu- la conexión a Internet por parte de las nicaciones y de las tecnologías dela entidades competentes, en particular información por parte del Estado. de los que constituyen herramientas indispensables para la masificación del acceso a Internet. 6 Normas específicas 11) Promover la generación de contenidos de interés, de carácter institucional, Además de las ya señalados, se han ido educativo y cultural, entre otros, que dando en nuestro país, normas más estén disponibles en Internet en por específicas relacionadas a la Sociedad de lo menos dos idiomas. la Información. A continuación se detallan algunas de ellas: La Comisión Multisectorial a la que se hace referencia en el párrafo anterior, en – Ley de Firmas y Certificados virtud del encargo recibido, presento el Digitales y su Reglamento. documento denominado «e-PERÚ: Pro- – Ley que incorpora al Código Penal puestas para un Plan de Acción para el los delitos informáticos. Acceso Democrático a la Sociedad Global – Resolución Suprema que crea una de la Información y el Conocimiento». Comisión Multisectorial encargada El plan consiste en un conjunto estruc- de definir las «Políticas y Linea- turado de líneas de acción que mientos para la administración del contribuyan a impulsar eficazmente desde nombre de dominio ccTLD el Estado el desarrollo integral de la correspondiente al Perú». Sociedad de la Información en el Perú y – Decreto Supremo que crea el su acercamiento al sector privado y a la proyecto Huascarán como órgano ciudadanía en general. desconcentrado del Ministerio de Dicho documento contiene (i) Diagnóstico Educación y dependiente del Vice preliminar de la situación vigente a esa Ministerio de Gestión Pedagógica, fecha, (ii) Bases para la formulación de con el encargo de desarrollar, un plan de acción, y (iii) Propone líneas ejecutar, evaluar y supervisar con de acción para: fines educativos una red nacional a) Infraestructura moderna con acceso a todas las fuentes de información.

190 Peru - 4

– Resolución Suprema que consti- mento de Lima) manejen de manera tuye la Comisión Nacional de óptima, colectiva y organizada informa- Telesanidad encargada de elaborar ción agraria puesta a su disposición vía y proponer las acciones necesarias Internet en la gestión de sus unidades para el desarrollo de la Telesa- productivas. nidad en el Perú. El proyecto busca beneficiar de manera directa a 6,000 agricultores – a mayoría 7 Apoyo a las de pequeña propiedad y actualmente con una economía de subsistencia – del valle comunidades rurales de Chancay-Huaral, mediante la utili- I. En el ámbito de la sociedad civil se zación de modernas tecnologías de viene trabajando en el desarrollo de información y comunicación en la gestión proyectos específicos con la finalidad de de sus unidades productivas y de sus promover el crecimiento sostenible de los organizaciones. pueblos del Perú a través del uso de las Así el proyecto busca atacar dos tecnologías de la información y las comu- problemas: la desventajosa participación nicaciones. en el mercado de los pequeños agricul- Plan PUYHUAN, que tiene entre sus tores debido a la deficiente provisión de objetivos, generar el modelo integral de información a la que tienen acceso; y, las desarrollo rural sostenible aprovechando dificultades de gestión de las organiza- las Tecnologías de la Información y ciones de riego, debido a la deficiente Comunicación, e implementarlo en la Co- comunicación entre las diversas organiza- munidad Molinos, antiguamente Puyhuan, ciones y las entidades relacionadas con la ubicada en el distrito de Molinos, a gestión del agua. 7 Kms. de la ciudad de Jauja, Provincia de – Sistema de Información para el Jauja, Departamento de Junín así como Desarrollo Rural fomentar la relación empresa privada, Estado y Sociedad Civil para replicar el El objetivo del presente proyecto es modelo PUYHUAN otras comunidades, diseñar e instalar un sistema de provisión provincias y regiones del país. Planificado de información para pequeños produc- de arriba hacia abajo se busca el tores y autoridades locales mediante la desarrollo de abajo hacia arriba implementación de centros de infor- mación rurales (Infocentros), en seis El proyecto contempla la creación de un localidades de la Provincia de Cajamarca, centro de investigación de tecnología que integre al mismo tiempo servicios de informática para el modelo de desarrollo información no convencionales, servicios rural y la investigación de tecnología bibliotecarios tradicionales, rescate del aplicada, estudio de practicas de mer- conocimiento campesino y nuevas tecno- cado, desarrollo de productos y servicios, logías de la información, con el fin de difusión e intercambio, telecentros, entre tener un acceso rápido a la información otros, con una infraestructura que estará que les permita elevar su capacidad compuesta de dos centros de computo productiva y el nivel de gestión. Se con servidor central cada uno, diez instalará una línea de datos (acceso a estaciones de trabajo con sus terminales Internet) en cada uno de éstos. La línea de computo, licencias de Software y de datos, permitirá que el sistema de facilidades de comunicación satelital para información sea puesto en la web para acceso a Internet. una comunicación interactiva con el Centro de Información Coordinador ubi- II. Proyectos financiados con el Fondo de cado en el Ciudad de Cajamarca y la Inversión de Telecomunicaciones (FITEL) difusión de sus contenidos. Asimismo, se que administra el Organismo Supervisor instalará un teléfono público en dichos de Telecomunicaciones (OSIPTEL) centros, contribuyendo a la autosos- – Información Agraria Vía Internet tenibilidad de los mismos. El objetivo general del proyecto consiste ITDG ha llevado a cabo el proyecto en lograr que los agricultores de la Junta financiado por el Banco Mundial, a través de Usuarios del valle del Río Chancay- de Infodev, denominado INFODES, Huaral (Provincia de Huaral, Departa- mediante el cual se implementó un

Peru - 5 191

sistema de información dirigido a Comunal con la finalidad de llevar los pequeños productores rurales y gobiernos servicios de Televisión a más de 1000 locales, construyéndose una red de localidades rurales y comunidades centros de información, que brindan a su nativas. comunidad servicios básicos como biblioteca, preguntas y respuestas (preguntón), video club, asistencia técnica, etc. Este proyecto busca romper el aislamiento de localidades alejadas, llegar – Sistemas de Comunicaciones para a zonas deprimidas y apoyar la difusión Establecimientos Rurales de Salud de programas educativos y culturales, beneficiando a más de un millón de El proyecto consiste en la implementación pobladores. de un sistema de comunicación y acceso a información para el personal público sanitario en 40 Establecimientos de Salud La infraestructura existente de las rurales de la provincia de Alto Amazonas, estaciones de TVRO permite avanzar departamento de Loreto con la finalidad hacia el proyecto Internet Rural, comple- de contribuir a la mejora del sistema mentando las estaciones VSAT del público de asistencia sanitaria en las proyecto FITEL-OSIPTEL. zonas rurales del Perú.

Los Puestos de Salud (nodo terminal) se Fórmula que permite llevar estos servicios interconectarán mediante enlaces de a lugares donde no es rentable para la radio VHF (usados tanto para voz como inversión privada, logrando beneficios para datos) con los Centros de Salud tanto para el Gobierno Central, Regional y (nodo local), que servirán como pasarela Municipal, y que el ciudadano peruano de a Internet utilizando los sistemas de comunidades rurales y nativas pueda telefonía financiados por el OSIPTEL. acceder a la información, a contenidos y Cabe señalar que la participación de sea participe de la gestión del Estado. OSIPTEL consistirá en instalar siete líneas telefónicas con acceso a Internet en dichos nodos locales. Dependiendo del tipo de información, los establecimientos 8 Nuevas iniciativas del podrán acceder por Internet al Centro Coordinador Nacional (nodo nacional) o a estado la red MINSA (Hospital de Apoyo Yurimaguas o a cualquier otra dirección El Sistema de Información Agraria del electrónica), pasando previamente por el Ministerio de Agricultura, tiene como servidor de la Universidad Católica del objetivo mejorar la calidad y cobertura de Perú (actúa como ISP), que se encargará la información que requieren los produc- de enrutar las comunicaciones efectuadas tores rurales, priorizando la información entre los Establecimientos de Salud con el básica y de mayor impacto en la gestión MINSA y con la Universidad Cayetano de sistemas productivos y de Heredia o con la dirección correspondi- comercialización; ente.

III. Proyecto de Apoyo a la Comunicación La Red Nacional de Servicios Integrados, Comunal (PACC) desarrollado por el cuyos objetivos son contribuir a la Ministerio de Transportes y Comuni- equidad en el acceso y distribución de la caciones información, integrar las zonas rurales y A la fecha, se ha instalado en cada uno de apartadas del país. Utilizando la infraes- los Establecimientos de Salud de las tructura existente perteneciente a las 7 localidades involucradas en el Proyecto distintas instancias de gobierno (aproxi- Piloto, un teléfono fijo y un acceso a madamente 1,200 antenas instaladas a lo Internet, los cuales están siendo usado largo y ancho del territorio nacional) básicamente por el personal de salud. minimizar el costo de implementación de un sistema de telecomunicaciones en el Desde 1994, a pedido de los centros Perú con servicios de radiodifusión masiva poblados rurales se implementó el y acceso a las tecnologías de la proyecto de Apoyo a la Comunicación información.

192 Peru - 6

El Sistema Integrado de Administración información pública. Una Comisión Multi- Financiera para el Sector Publico, sectorial ha sido la encargada de emitir el mediante el cual se busca integrar a todos informe sobre los requerimientos técnicos los organismos del Estado y a los y funcionales del SEACE. gobiernos locales e instituciones de La Primera fase del proceso contempla el dependencia del Estado con un sistema desarrollo de del Módulo de Registros de de información única para el cargo y Procesos (MRP) y un Módulo de Compras abono de activos. y Contrataciones de menor Cuantía Sistema Electrónico de Adquisiciones y (MCM). Se ha establecido un programa de Contrataciones del Estado (SEACE) Pro- implementación piloto para ambos grama piloto a cargo de la Presidencia del módulos en 10 Entidades de Gobierno Consejo de Ministro, dentro de la Estrate- Nacional. gia Nacional de Gobierno Electrónico

El objetivo general del proyecto es desarrollar un sistema integral, compues- to por políticas, procedimientos, normas y 9 Comentarios finales software basado en el uso de Internet, Avanzamos hacia una sociedad basada en que permitirá a las Entidades Públicas las tecnologías de la información y Contratantes dar a conocer por medios comunicación, en la que sus ciudadanos electrónicos sus demandas y que los tengan igualdad de oportunidades a la proveedores puedan presentar sus ofertas educación el conocimiento y una mejor por el mismo sistema. Adicionalmente, el calidad de vida, conciente y orgullosa de SEACE permitirá que cualquier ciudadano su historia, cultura y capacidades para pueda conocer las contrataciones que el ofrecerla al mundo, en la que gobernan- Estado realiza. tes y gobernados mantengan relaciones El proyecto se enmarca dentro de las permanentes, armoniosas y de mutuo políticas de Gobierno de modernizar y entendimiento; en suma una sociedad mejorar la gestión pública, descentralizar plenamente participativa, justa, solidaria el Estado y la transparencia y acceso a la y democrática.

Sr Horario Ruiz Santos Sr Herbert Palma Cadenas Subdirector Subdirector Normas Técnicas y Homologación de Ministerio de Transportes y Equipos Comunicaciones Ministerio de Transportes y Av. 28 de Julio No. 800 Comunicaciones PE-LIMA 1 Av. 28 de Julio No. 800 Peru PE-LIMA 1 Peru Tel.: +51 1 332 4079 Fax: +51 1 332 4084 Tel.: +51 1 433 7800 E-mail: [email protected] Fax: +51 1 433 1450 E-mail: [email protected]

Peru - 7 193

Philippines

ICT for sustainable development

1 The Philippines: A In services, the Philippines continue to Profile reap the benefits of deregulation in the telecommunication sector, which robustly The Philippines stands at the crossroads grew at 8.9 per cent. Trade continues to of the developed western world and the benefit from strong consumer demand, as Orient. It lies at the heart of Southeast bigger local retailers opened up new malls Asia, stretching more than 1,840 kilome- in regions outside Metro Manila. ters. Composed of 7,107 islands with a population of approximately 80 million, Services sector is expected to grow from the Philippines is readily accessible to the 5.2 to 6.2 per cent, again led by telecom- different capitals of the world. Its three munications, trade and private services. main islands are Luzon, Visayas, and Policies to liberate air transportation and Mindanao. measures to boost housing are expected More than half (56 per cent) of the to further keep services healthy. Philippine population resides in Luzon. The remainder is almost equally distributed between Mindanao (23.7 per cent) 2 The Growth of and Visayas islands (20.3 per cent). The Telecommunications Philippines is divided into sixteen (14) regions with the National Capital Region in the Philippines (NCR) as the smallest region with a land area of 636 sq.km. and is the most Two decades ago the Philippines telecom- densely populated region with 13,617 munications industry was a virtual persons occupying a sq.km. of land. This monopoly. With the lack of competition man-land ratio is 61 times the national and limited capital, the industry hardly figure of 255 persons per sq.km. grew. In 1993, with the introduction of the interconnection policy and the In 2002, the Philippines Gross Domestic universal telephone service policy, the Product (GDP) rose at 4.6 per cent or development of the domestic telecommu- 1.03B from 3.2 per cent of 9.5M in 2001. nications industry was finally underway. The Gross National Product (GNP) was The privatization and liberalization of the pegged at 5.2 per cent or P1.1B in the Philippines telecommunication industry same calendar year compared to 3.4 per was sealed with the passage in 1995 of cent or P1.01B in FY2000. This was the Republic Act 7925 or what is known as strongest recorded economic performance the Philippines Telecommunications Policy of the country since the 1997 Asian Act. financial crisis, exceeding the high end of official forecasts. The passage of the law aimed at Growth of all production sectors sur- accelerating the development of the tele- passed expectations. This is accredited to communications infrastructure through policies that have created a stable increased private sector participation and macroeconomic environment in 2002, as liberalizing the sector. This paved the way well as structural and productivity to a more vibrant and thriving telecom- enhancing reforms. munications industry.

Philippines - 1 195

In 1997 alone, investments in telecom- The Information Technology and munication reached P307B and telephone Electronic Commerce Council (ITECC) was density increased from less than one in organized in 2000 pursuant to Executive 1993 to almost 10 per cent population in Order No. 264 and chaired by no less 1998. Monopoly was torn apart with the than Her Excellency, the President of the entry of more big players who established Philippines. The Council seeks to stream- strategic partnerships with foreign allies, line all ICT related government agencies creating and expanding the needed tele- to provide effective and focused communication infrastructure to address leadership in the implementation of the the growing demands of the public. nation’s ICT policy agenda. The vision of Telecommunications build up remains to ITECC is for an “enabled society where this day a priority of the Philippine empowered citizens have access to government, as it remains as the technologies that will provide quality Philippines principal top income earner. education, efficient government service, greater source of livelihood, and a better For this reason, Her Excellency, President life.” Gloria Macapagal Arroyo declared that Information and Communication Technol- ogy (ICT) should be the leading sector for economic growth and key to finding the country’s proper niche in the global 3.1 Philippine Telecommu- information economy in the 21st Century nications Policy and as a powerful weapon to eradicate hunger and poverty.

The Philippine telecommunications policy 3 Key Government as contained in RA 7925 states: Tele- Players in ICT communications is essential to the nation’s economic development, integrity The Department of Transportation and and security and shall be developed and Communications (DOTC) was created administered to safeguard, enrich and pursuant to Executive Order 125-A and is strengthen the economic, cultural, social the primary policy, planning, program- and political fabric of the country. ming, coordinating agency of government pertaining to transportation and communications. It is committed to the maintenance and expansion of viable, efficient, and dependable transportation and com- 3.2 The Philippine munications systems as effective instru- Telecommunications and ments for national recovery and economic Broadcast Services Today development. The National Telecommunications Commission (NTC) was created pursuant to Executive Order 546 and is the sole Philippine telecommunications today is government agency having jurisdiction highly liberalized, privatized, and com- over the supervision, regulation, and petitive. The sector is stimulated by in- control over all telecommunications and vestments, which accelerates its sus- broadcast services throughout the tained growth. Likewise, it has played a country. Although independent, as far as significant role in boosting our economy regulatory and quasi-judicial functions are with its revenue generation. The use of concerned, the NTC remains under the the mobile telephone service has become administrative supervision of the Depart- a way of life and has eliminated the ment of Transportation and Communi- waiting lists, reminiscent of the fixed lines cations as an attached agency. However, days. Mobile penetration in the Philippines with respect to NTC’s quasi-judicial is high, however affordability is still a big functions, its decisions are final unless barrier to universal access. The state of appealed to the Court of Appeals or the affairs of Philippines telecommunications Supreme Court of the Philippines. as presented in tables can be seen as Attachment A.

196 Philippines - 2

ATTACHMENT A

Table 1 Telecommunications/Broadcast Industry Structure

TELECOM SERVICE 1999 2000 2001 2002 Local Exchange Carrier Service 76 77 74 73 Inter-Exchange Carrier Service 12 12 14 14

International Gateway Facility 11 11 11 11 Radio Mobile • Cellular Mobile Telephone System 5577 • Public Trunk Repeater Service 10 10 11 11

Radio Paging Service 15 15 11 11 Coastal 12 12 12 13 Broadband 10 18 19 19 Broadcast Stations (AM,FM,TVD,DTU) 1032 1089 1143 1274 CATV Stations 1055 1162 1219 1373

Table 2 Regional Distribution of Telephone Lines

INSTALLED TELEDENSITY REGION POPULATION SUBSCRIBED LINES CAPACITY TELELINES SUBSCRIBED

CAR 1,461,529 94,144 35,503 6.44 2.43 NCR 10,758,840 2,847,516 1,698,365 26.47 15.79 I 4,276,974 182,076 108,760 4.26 2.54 II 2,922,220 39,602 30,667 1.36 1.05

III 7,982,573 406,583 236,490 5.09 2.96 IV 11,904,461 1,118,707 513,907 9.40 4.32 V 4,919,499 135,422 66,701 2.75 1.36 VI 6,548,108 443,763 112,023 6.78 1.71

VII 5,750,685 457,709 173,355 7.96 3.01 VIII 3,899,553 165,035 43,352 4.23 1.11 IX 3,300,211 166,000 29,740 5.03 0.90 X 2,984,121 199,566 51,529 6.69 1.73 XI 5,523,366 431,541 133,497 7.81 2.42 XII 2,784,797 84,744 32,876 3.04 1.18 XIII 2,171,985 100,648 36,153 4.63 1.66

ARMM 2,287,349 41,179 8,015 1.80 0.35

TOTAL 79,476,271 6,914,235 3,310,933 8.70 4.17

Philippines - 3 197

Table 3 Telephone Density Index

YEAR INSTALLED LINES SUBSCRIBED LINES

1998 9.08 3.44

1999 9.12 3.87

2000 9.05 4.01

2001 8.88 4.26

2002 8.70 4.17

10.00 9.08 9.12 9.05 8.88 8.70

5.00

3.44 3.87 4.01 4.26 4.17

0.00 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002

SUBSCRIBED LINES INSTALLED LINES

198 Philippines - 4

Table 4 Cellular Mobile Subscriber Distribution

OPERATOR 2000 2001 2002

Not yet operational. BAYANTEL DIGITEL Commercially launched in 2003

EXTELCOM 194 452 194 452 29 896

GLOBE 2 563 000 5 405 415 6 572 185

ISLACOM 181 614 181 614 181 614

PILTEL 656 814 1 483 838 1 773 620

SMART 2 858 479 4 893 844 6 825 686

TOTAL 6 454 359 12 159 163 15 383 001

CMTS DENSITY 8.46 15.61 19.36

POPULATION 76 320 141 77 898 196 79 476 271

GROWTH IN CMTS SUBSCRIPTION

2002 15,383,001

2001 12,159,163

2000 6,454,359

Philippines - 5 199

Table 5 Internet Service

YEAR No. of NTC-Registered ISPs Estimated No. of Subscribers

1996 24 100 000

1997 17 200 000

1998 23 300 000

1999 31 350 000

2000 34 400 000

2001 64 500 000

2002 53 800,000+

3.3 Strategic Roadmap for – Leverage overseas Filipino ICT profes- ICT sionals. Business Development The Information Technology and Elec- tronic Commerce Council (ITECC) has – Build the RP brand and image; developed a strategic roadmap in the – Focus on niches in the Foreign Market following directions: where the country has a sustainable E- Government implementation competitive advantage; – Make it easier to do business in the – Use a more targeted approach in sell- country (investor-friendly); ing and closing outsourcing opportunities. – Improve efficiency, accessibility, accountability and transparency in deliv- Legal and Regulatory Framework ering basic services; – Rationalize the institutional frame- – Spur the domestic ICT Market with work by creating a Department of the government as the largest cus- ICT; tomer; – Strengthen the legal and policy – Provide proper environment to enable framework to address critical issues and increase IT usage. arising from new technologies; Human Resource Development – Provide a support framework to ensure enforcement of laws, promote; – Increase the use of IT in delivering Basic Education; – e-commerce and facilitate ICT investments. – Improve the quality of IT knowledge/skills throughout the supply Information Infrastructure chain; – Consolidate existing government ICT – Accelerate the development of rele- resources to be shared by all vant IT knowledge/skills; government offices;

200 Philippines - 6

– Undertake the development of a fee and an annual fee for five years, Universal Service Program; payable at the time of registration for the full five years. A VAS registration could be – Update network performance service for any service and not necessarily standards to conform with acceptable Internet access. Global standards; A value added service (VAS) is one that is – Develop a National IT Security Pro- provided over existing telecommuni- gram. cations infrastructure. The definition as provided for by law (RA 7925) is 4 Recent Regulatory technically applied and no value added service provider is allowed to supply their incentives own infrastructure but must lease it from 1) Addressing the 3.8 million un- authorized carriers. Registration is valid subsribed landlines and as a govern- for a period of five (5) years. Public ment response to consumer needs telecommunications operators can also be and of the poor, the government has Value Added Service (VAS) providers allowed some pricing flexibility on provided that they seek prior approval of their local telephone service to allow the Commission to ensure that VAS the introduction of local measured offerings are not cross subsidized from service and prepaid service the proceeds of their utility operations; 2) MC 08-07-2002 – Small, medium other providers of VAS are not discrimi- and micro enterprises are allowed to nated against in rates nor denied invest in telecommunications through equitable access to their facilities; and the installation of public calling that separate books of accounts are stations and/or telecenters particu- maintained for the VAS. larly in the rural areas to help There is no Internet content control in the promote universal access using the Philippines. An Internet content provider facilities of enfranchised and certified can establish a web site without any operators; formal application. Nonetheless content is 3) MC 09-2002 – Guidelines for Com- a concern, particularly pornography and petitive Wholesale Charging for games that border on gambling. Interconnection Services. Over half of the country’s Internet users 4) MC 07-06-2002 – Sets the service are in Manila. It is estimated there are performance standards for Cellular more than 20 million potential Internet mobile telephone service. users in the country but only less than MC-05-5-2002 – Provide for high two millions are actually using it. The speed networks and connectivity to IT number of PCs is also low. Recent statis- hubs, namely: Pasig Ortigas Business tics show that out of 379 government District, Makati Global City Business units only six remain to have no website. District; Alabang – Paranaque Busi- ness District; Subic Clark Specific Economic Zones; Cebu Asia Town IT 6 E-Learning: A Project Park and University Belt. to Provide Personal Computers for Public 5 Internet for High School development A government program under the Depart- ment of Trade and Industry (DTI) to There is no official figure for the number bridge the digital divide between the of ISPs operating today. The NTC has public and private schools all over the registered for 2002, 53 ISPs with an country got a boost with the recent estimated number of more than 800,000 approval by the Japanese government subscribers. Internet access provision is under the Non-Project Grant Aid (NPGA2), considered a value-added service (VAS) in of a P584 million grant for the second the Philippines. ISPs need only to register phase of the PCs for Public High Schools with the NTC to be able to provide Project. service. There is a one time processing

Philippines - 7 201

Citing RA 8792 or the E-Commerce Act of schools (37 public and 3 private schools), 2000, which mandates the e-commerce representing both urban and rural areas, readiness of all government agencies, the this coming school year. Under the set acquisition of the PCs to be allotted for up, Ayala Foundation Inc, will oversee the local government was done to upgrade IT text2teach project locally for Bridgeit’s capabilities for local governance and in core group members – Nokia Corpo- the delivery of services. It is expected ration, the International Youth that local government units (LGUs) can Foundation, Pearson and the United utilize the computer technology in Nations Development Program. automating their key administrative systems such as business registration and A fast and easy to use service, Bridgeit licensing, real property, tax admini- combines existing mobile products and stration, treasury operations and man- satellite technologies to deliver digital, agement information. Only 170 of the multimedia materials to teachers and close to 1,500 LGUs have access to students who otherwise would not have computer technologies under existing access to them. Teachers will be able to government computerization for LGUs. use mobile phones supplied by Nokia to access a library of science videos The project is part of the Japanese gov- provided by Pearson, the world’s leading ernment's concrete steps to narrow the learning company. Once selected, videos International Digital Divide between are downloaded via satellite to a Nokia developed and developing countries. digital video recorder connected to a Through the project, the Philippines would television right in the classroom. Local be able to develop its human resource Philippines organizations have donated capital in the field of IT, and modernize their time and services to make this and automate key local governance project. systems. Bridgeit was developed locally under the While the first phase of the project leadership of the Ayala Foundation and expanded IT access in secondary schools with the commitment and involvement of from 28% to 54%, about 2,345 public the Philippines Ministry of Education, high schools remain without access to SEAMEO Innotech, Nokia, Globe Telecom, computer technologies. Under the second PMSI-Dream Broadcasting, and Chikka phase, another 10,000 computers will be Asia. The Philippines has been chosen as distributed to 900 public high schools the pilot site, primarily due to the and 250 municipalities. In addition to country’s comfort level for digital technol- the 200,000 students, another 18,9000 ogy, particularly the cell phone, and its teachers will be trained on IT base English proficiency. education while 1,250 municipal employees will be trained on automation of LGU The project has a developmental goal – to administrative systems. bringing kids to a broader range of information that’s more up to date, more Each of the recipient schools in this user friendly, and more exciting will not Phase 2 activity will receive 10 personal only keep them engaged, it will help keep computers equipped with essential them in school. computer peripherals. Each municipality will have 4 personal computers, a printer, (See Attachment B for additional features and a server. The government hopes to of the Project) build on the gains of this project to concretize the country’s vision of further 8 Community e-Centers developing the country’s IT human resources and making IT as the country’s (CEC): A Philippine engine of growth in the new economy. Model Citizens residing in small communities do 7 Text2Teach Project: not have basic services and need to travel Texting for Education long distances just to avail of e-centers (e.g. telephone services, internet access, Bridgeit is a global program which pilots e-learning). Existing telcos are not inter- the text2teach project in 40 Philippine ested in developing access to smaller

202 Philippines - 8

communities (barangays, barrios, towns, – Right to timely installation, resto- municipalities) and tend to concentrate on ration, and repair service – the more lucrative business. This project Consumers have the right to timely will augment the existing government installation of new services, and efforts on solving the “last mile problem” restoration and repair of existing with private sector and local community services. participation to improve bandwidth affordability in remote areas through sev- – Right to accurate, clearly worded eral deployment models. These e-centers and organized bills – Consumers can possibly establish a new channel for have the right to be accurately billed delivery of e-government services at a for services they received. Vendors of lower cost. telecommunication services shall pro- (See Attachment C for the Project Profile) vide clearly worded and organized bills.

9 Regulation and – Right to Prompt Investigation and Consumer Rights Action on complaints – The service providers shall endeavor to allow Under the Public Telecommunications complaints to be received over the Policy Act of 1995 (RA 7925), the National telephone and shall keep a record of Telecommunications Commission (NTC) all written or phone in complaints. as the principal administrator of the law is mandated to “promote the consumer’s – Right to Quality Service – Con- welfare by facilitating access to sumers have the right to quality telecommunications services whose services. Local telephone companies infrastructure and network must be must provide and list in their directory geared towards the needs of the a 24-hour repair service number. individuals and business users”. The same Consumers have the right to access law further mandates that consumers vendors’ annual quality of service must be protected “against misuse of a reports. telecommunications entity’s monopoly or quasi-monopolistic powers, but not – Right of Public Participation – limited to, the investigation of complaints Consumers have the right to and exacting compliance with standards participate in public policy proceed- from such entity.” ings through public notice. Likewise, under the Philippines Consumer Act (RA 7394), it is “the policy of the Right to Reasonable Accommo- State to protect the interests of the dations – Consumers with disabilities consumers, promote the general welfare have a right to reasonable accom- and establish standards of conduct for modations needed to understand business in industry.” consumer rights. Consumers with disabilities must have information to Consumers/users of telecommunications access disability related equipment, services have the following rights recog- services, or information needed for nized under the Telecom Policy and utilization of telecommunication Consumers Laws: devices and services. – Right to non-discriminatory utility service – Consumers have the right The One Stop Public Assistance to non-discriminatory, reliable ser- Center (OSPAC). Recognizing the need vice, which meets the minimum to provide consumers/clientele with service standards set by the accurate and relevant information as well Commission. as assistance regarding issues/concerns – Right to instant telephone access/ they may have on telecommunications, connection/service – Consumers the NTC has established at its Central and have the right to given the first single Regional Offices a One Stop Public line for telephone connection within Assistance Center (OSPAC) to address two months of application for service. specific needs or complaints, to include petty thievery of cellular phones.

Philippines - 9 203

10 Conclusion On the other hand, the argument that the environment is sufficiently competitive, Although the Philippines telecom industry that regulatory intervention is is considered as one of the fastest unnecessary, is also valid given the growing in Asia, a number of technical mandate to the regulator “to foster a and commercial issues must still be healthy competitive environment telecom- resolved within the sector. In an era of munications where carriers are free to privatization, liberalization, competition make business decisions and to interact and globalization, the issue of regulatory with one another in providing telecommu- intervention over the operations, espe- nications services with the end in view of cially on the commercial aspects in the encouraging their financial viability while midst of the many service providers come maintaining affordable rates.” to fore. Nonetheless, NTC continues to take a proactive approach and undertakes The fact that the Philippine government is continuing information dissemination the most committed advocate of ICT in campaigns as well as hold regular public the Philippines portends to a future where hearings and dialogues on issues and the Filipino can be competitive in a world concerns that require the participation of propelled by information and communi- all stakeholders. cation technologies. The potential of ICT as a reliable and powerful agent of Whether government intervenes or not progression and advancement for all peo- remains debatable, especially where no ples of the world, indeed, presents a specific law exists. One strong point of compelling raison d'être to build an regulation has the advantage of widening information society that will attain for all the choice of service providers, and peoples prosperity, harmony and peace – making more efficient use of the spec- ideals that have remained elusive to trum and stimulating more competition. humankind.

ATTACHMENT B

NOKIA

text2teach : The Concept

Frankie Naranjilla 30th of June 2003

204 Philippines - 10

Agenda and Objectives Agenda: 1. Corporate Citizenship. 2. Philippine Education in the global map. 3. Bridge IT – “Text 2 Teach” Providing a solution to the challenge. Objectives: 1. To be open with our valued business partners. 2. To share, exchange notes and seek high level advise. 3. To arrive at a solution in improving the condition of Philippine education – Nation Building.

Unleashing Human Potential Through Innovative Use of Digital Technology

Philippines - 11 205

The Challenge

Provide full access to learning in developing countries Build locally relevant programs meeting the community needs Build replicable and scalable programs Build on existing programs and share best practices Find unique and focused ways of implementation with strong local ownership

Our Strategic Intent & Vision ‘We enable young people to create their own place in the world’ We want to go beyond enabling young people to merely use technology – we want to enable young people to use technology for a purpose

Content, Connection & Curriculum

We will make an active and sustainable contribution to bridging the Digital Divide all over the world, by complementing the local curriculum with high quality educational content delivered through a high-speed digital connection and integrated teacher training

206 Philippines - 12

The Solution

Specific, yet universally replicable solution to help young people in developing countries to get full access to educational content and information Combines digital satellite broadcasting and media terminal technologies with the Internet and mobile connectivity (GSM/GPRS) in a future-proof solution Content will focus on natural sciences and will be provided and developed by both international and local content partners in co-operation with local educational authorities Teacher training as part of the program

General Technical Architecture

Satellite

Satellite Network Operator *) Service Provider Steps: 1 – SMS order to the GSM network 2 – System triggers request GSM/GPR via the servers S 3 - Request is picked up by Network the satellite system which then beams down the content 4 – Content is downloaded to the set top box 5 – Playback to view 7 © NOKIA BIT Primer Presentation.ppt/FNa/30 June,2003

Philippines - 13 207

Content Ordering

via SMS Converted to e-mailOrder for content is sent to PMSI

Text message CIMD Internet SMS SMSC Media Server Server 2222 Short ASCII code E-mail Nokia GSM Operator Approved e-mail addrs Environment Mail To prevent spamming Server [email protected]

Teacher Development work orders content VAS via SMS By: Developer Nokia and Blue dotted line for order process converts ASCII to e-mail Green for acknowledgement & vice versa Zenterio Red physical connection (DSL, lease line) Works in both GSM & GPRS environment tabtabtab 8 © NOKIA BIT Primer Presentation.ppt/FNa/30 June,2003

Clark - Makati Network Connections

Nokia, Makati Media Server

DSL / BB dsl/modem link firewall hub1

internet PMSI,Pampanga ftp server Video Server

broadcast system dsl/modem firewall hub2

208 Philippines - 14

Pilot Project

Assess validity of overall concept (technology, content, operational mode, sustainability) Provide learning for all partners through continuous monitoring and assessment Establish basis for possible replication Pilot project country - The Philippines: 40 schools in the Philippines Urban and rural areas Combination of public and private (not elite!) schools English language content viable

Pilot Project Organization

Global Program Support

Pearson NokiaIYF UNDP

Pilot Project Management

Content Specialist Program Manager Technical Manager Training Coordinator Program Engineer Program Assistant Evaluation Specialist

Local Program Implementation

PMSI Ayala Foundation Globe Telecom UNDP

Dept of Education SEAMEO Innotech Content Developers Chikka & Zenterio

Micro enterprises Technical Support Teachers Volunteers Schools

Philippines - 15 209

What Bridge IT Brings to the Corporate

Fulfills Corporate Citizenship functions to the community Corporate and Community role Nation building Builds positive image to the market thereby strengthens corporate branding Excellent publicity New technology learning Can also open new business opportunity of similar applications Increases competitive positioning in the market Adoption of best practices Keeps us ahead – Its a convergence project that combines terminal, GSM-GPRS, DSL and satellite solutions International exposure Possible business exposure outside of the country 12 © NOKIA BIT Primer Presentation.ppt/FNa/30 June,2003

In Summary

Social & Human Process & Organizational Increases student academic Establishes a replicable and scalable performance and motivation pilot project which can be Improves teacher motivation and skill expanded within the country and building around the world Positively impacts the communities The Department of Education will where the program is implemented view Bridge-IT as having significant supplemental Business educational value and will play a Drives digital convergence and the central role in scaling the Program mobile Internet to a larger percent of the Philippines Encourages content development by local and international content Reputation providers Increases the reputational capital of Opens new markets for technology the organizations involved focused educational tools

210 Philippines - 16

ATTACHMENT C

ATTACHMENT C-1

COMMUNITY E-CENTER PROGRAM (CECP) (ITECC Priority Program)

CECP Objectives

Bridge the digital divide between the information “have” and “have-not” communities

Provide universal access to ICT services particularly to unserved rural areas Link communities together Empower rural communities socially, economically and politically CEC to be used as vehicle in the electronic delivery of critical government services (national and local)

Philippines - 17 211

ATTACHMENT C-2 Updates: Development Activities

CECP OVERSIGHT COMMITTEE CREATED and OPERATIONAL INITIATIVES BATANGAS PILOT PROJECT TELOF’S COMMUNITY E-CENTER IN BUKIDNON E-PLDT PROPOSAL TO DEPLOY 6 TELECENTERS PLANNING AND STRATEGIES WORKSHOP (17 June 2003) DRAFT EXECUTIVE ORDER TO INSTITUTIONALIZE THE PROGRAM

CECP ESSENTIALS

Branding Efficient and effective partnership of public and private sectors Content an essential component of CECP and its sustainability. Content and applications must be adopted or developed to suit particular needs and conditions of local communities Cross-sectoral, multi-disciplinary efforts of community development in the introduction of CEC services

212 Philippines - 18

ATTACHMENT C-3

ACTION ITEMS Data gathering possibly at barangay (smallest political unit) levels Draft EO (Team Comprised of Members of Policy, Regulatory and Strategic Sector) Site Visits Draft Primer Identify and develop potential role models TELOF Public Schools with PC Deployment SMEs Barangay.net E-PLDT Philpost E-post shop

POSSIBLE INITIAL FUNDING

Open Window from banks ODA Government Incentives Adopt a barangay program Private sector funding BOT Telcos to adopt areas Budget insertions

Philippines - 19 213

ATTACHMENT C-4 POSSIBLE APPLICATIONS Distance Learning VOIP Agri Info (b2bpricenow) E-health E-LGU (business permits) E-government services (National Statistics Office [NSO]) Technology Livelihood Resource Center (TLRC) Business Center OFW contact centers Tourism and travel Job market Entertainment

Eng. Aurora A. Rubio Chief Telecom Policy and Planning Division Department of Transportation and Communications The Columbia Tower BRGY, Wack-Wack, Ortigas Avenue PH-MANDALUYONG CITY, 1653 Philippines

Tel.: +63 2 727 7139 Fax: +63 2 727 7984 E-mail: [email protected]

214 Philippines - 20

Sierra Leone

Telecommunication Development Country Report for Sierra Leone

A 2-Megabit VSAT system was installed as 4 The present state of additional bandwith to the Internet gateway to cater for the ever-growing Sierratel Network demand for this service. The present telecommunications infrastructure include the following: 1 Switches a) Six local exchanges in the Freetown multi exchange area. The following switch and Remote Sensing b) Three automatic exchanges in the Units (RSU) have been recently installed: main provincial area.

– Bo 2 000-line switch, c) Two gateway exchanges. A standard, an earth station and two VSAT links. – Lungi 1 500-line RSU, d) Trunk microwave network connecting – Kenema 1 500-line RSU. Freetown with the provincial towns.

They provide very modern switching e) Local distribution neworks in all areas facilities in some of our major provincial where automatic exchanges are towns and most importantly customers installed. are now benefiting from reliable dial up internet facilities. 5 Development plans to improve data 2 Network throughput and

Extensive rehabilitation work is been enhance Internet undertaken to our cable network. Old access cables are being replaced to handle higher date throughput and a substantial a) Introduction of ISDN service. expansion work is in progress. b) Installation of SS7 (No. 7 signaling).

c) Suitable wireless systems to take 3 Billing telephone and Internet services to the inaccessible areas.

To enhance our revenue collection and d) VSAT solution for linking rural and credit control we have installed a prepaid remote areas. platofrm to ensure that all mobile and international calls are connected through e) Replacing copper screened exchange this platform either as prepaid calls or junction cables with opitical fiber. with prearranged credit limits. f) Wirelesss local loop.

Sierra Leone - 1 215

6 Conclusion Our plans to attain a teledensity of one by the year 2005 has been adversely affected as a result of the significant drop in foreign The benefits of the Internet to our exchange earnings since the accounting socioeconomic development are fully rate system all but collapsed and the appreciated and the need to take this concept of tariff rebalancing has not proved service to the every area of the country is an effectual remedy. These situations now very paramount. The problem in combined with the granting of VSAT achieving this, is to get the right licenses to private operators to carry technology at affordable cost especially as international traffic have had a negative we are faced with a monumental impact on our projects. challenge of rebuilding and expanding the telephone network. The availability of We are in the process of forming a strate- cheap computers and effort to make the gic alliance with a reputable compagny to Internet more extensively used in schools set-up our mobile phone company. It is are also essential to complement our hoped this will build-up our customer base effort. and enhance our revenue base to realize our future plans.

Mr Cecil Patrick Farmer Mr Brima Sesay Commercial Manager Head of External Plans Sierra Leone Telecommunications Sierra Leone Telecommunications Company (SIERRATEL) Company (SIERRATEL) Tower Hall Tower Hall P.O. Box 80 P.O. Box 15 SL-FREETOWN SL-FREETOWN Sierra Leone Sierra Leone Tel.: +232 22 223 009 Tel.: +232 22 6705/29 0204 Fax: +232 22 8944 Fax: +232 22 0051 E-mail: [email protected]

216 Sierra Leone - 2

Somalia

Telecommunication Development Country Report for Somalia

Is the Internet a myth in Somalia? Since the optimism is to be retained for the 1999, the country of the horn of Africa future of the Internet in Somalia: for belongs to the society of information. If Somalia, telecommunications represent the sites on Somalia pullulate, often in an opportunity for the rebuilding of the local language, one very often questions country. the reality of the Net for the inhabitants of a country politically recovering the Connectivity is a key challenge for trauma of civil conflict. developing and least developed countries On 7 388 200 inhabitants, Somalia counts in particular. Until recently, the only 39 000 subscribers with Internet but question was how to provide quality nearly 134 000 people use it. The connec- phone services at affordable costs tion costs USD 0.80 cents per hour on throughout the entire country. In the average. Astonishing figures, with the coming years, we will have to address in sight of the infrastructures, settings with addition, the question of how to offer fully evil by several years of war in a country relevant Internet services to support used to call itself the rising country of development of local activities. Africa. It is a surprise for all which Somalia finds an economic dynamics and Main barriers to Internet penetration are which the sector of Telecommunications identified as: lack of efficient telecom develops as much, even more in infrastructure, income, inadequate content, comparison of neighboring countries who language, application, know-how and are stable politically. public awareness.

1 Somalia Internet, Real Internet diffusion on a large in the way towards developing world will only possible, if all above mentioned obstacles are resolved the rebuilding and make it available the disadvantage people in the least developed countries. Internet connection is accessible since In addition, as soon as relevant Internet 1999 but, as the majority of the countries services and applications are offered to are in the process of development, the address specific local needs and other computer ownership remains a product of concerns of potential end-users through luxury and one often connects in internet an innovative way of using Internet, then coffees or work. This is however not the we should be expecting the Internet only obstacle with the development of the penetration to improve. Internet in the country. The weak mastery of English, principal language used on the Web, or of French, is Somalia as being one of Least Developed another. Moreover, Somalia is a Moslem countries and countries recovering from country, a religious environment which prolonged civil conflict faces challenges always does not support the development similar to those that are in Rwanda, of unmonitored contents. Nevertheless, Bosnia and Afghanistan.

Somalia - 1 217

They need to strengthen and diversify 2 Conclusion their economies, educate and engage their young people, develop the infra- It is clear evidence that an urgent need structures that support economic growth, exists to develop ICT strategies and actions and lure back the educated professionals that bring marginalized social and economic and business-people who have fled to groups within reach of modern communica- other countries. tions technologies. Such strategies must take into account that the user may be ICT will be instrumental in meeting these someone living in a small village, a factory challenges, but recent history shows that worker controlling a robotic system on an Somalia and the other culture minded assembly line, or a government official. countries are often suspicious of, and Countries recovering from civil conflict face resistant to, technological change. If ICT the same problems as other developing or is to fulfill the role of building and Least Developed countries around the strengthening the economies of these world: low levels of education and literacy, countries, it must be adapted to the poor technology infrastructures, and a wide needs and cultures of its users. gap between the disposable income of the

relatively few “haves” and the more ICT strategies are often developed and numerous “have-nots”. Use of the Internet publicized mainly to attract external requires a fairly complex set of skills and investment to construct new infrastruc- technology. At the very least, one must tures or to market hardware and software have electricity, a communications line, a without giving sufficient attention to local terminal capable of interacting across the concerns and requirements. These strate- communications lines, and (in most cases) gies give too little consideration to the a reasonable fluency in English (80% of the plight of marginalized people and fail to material on the World Wide Web is written build upon existing strengths in the local in English; however, a movement to environment. The political and economic replace some English-language Web pages priorities of key decision makers often with Indigenous-language ones is gaining dictate the outcomes of these ICT momentum. All of these factors contribute strategies. to the digital divide.

218 Somalia - 2

Sri Lanka

Telecommunication Development Country Report for Sri Lanka

1 Consumer matters differently. Young and new consumers who will be demanding for Participation phones in near future are always seen In Sri Lanka more techniques are now mostly at public booths, countrywide post adopted ever before to bring about a offices, wayside communication centers, large population of active consumers or will bring multiple of important consumers correctly termed End-Users of basic tele- further. Well defined teledensity shows communication services to participate currently there are minimum of four people along with: as consumer for every hundred people in population. All services provide a maximum – Government policy makers, of ten people as consumers for every – Regulator/Administrator, hundred people in the country. They are now seriously accounted by regulator. – Service provider/Operator; Various steps are taken to integrate these to voice consumers: consumers in to the regulatory processes to better serve and address end-users – complaints, and needs. – interests; thereby, to bring: 3 Consumer information – solutions, and These consumers voices are propagated – integrate them to reform process, via: to have better serve, end-users needs for – mainly from three fix line operators & tomorrow. four cellular operators, It is the same successful story, when end- – at public hearing attendance visiting users were asked to voice other services or through on-line, such as radio & television, internet and e-commerce, spectrum as natural resource, – publishing questions and suggestions billing-specially the tariff on international on daily/periodic newspapers, calls, cellular incoming free, tariff of – writing such issues directly to computers connected to ADSL. regulator, – through elected representatives. 2 Consumer population Speaking of telecommunication, averagely 4 Ultimate Consumer there are 1,700,000 units available with Service consumers for telephone access. Comforta- bly this figure can be doubled to obtain an Every end-users’ final goal is to have the average consumers. Other services such as best price, quality of service, less interrup- paging, trunk radio, internet, etc will bring tion, comfortable access for additional another 100,000 to voice on regulatory options and new technology. For any short

Sri Lanka - 1 219

of above services, routes has been act with Telecommunication Informa- provided to “beat the drum” till regulator tion Communication Technology Act take appropriate action. They report (TICTA) to protect the interest of all through various paths as mentioned before and wider consumers and promote and fair policy and regulator decision is efficiency in the relevant industries. taken to integrate and absorb the findings – consumer awarness program by in the reform process. publishing the quality of service indicators for fixed access operators 5 Benefits currently periodically highlighting, call completion ratio, faults cleared within 24 hours, given to consumer faults cleared within 72 hours, faults – the government of Sri Lanka intends to per 100 exchange lines. revise the current legislation governing – opening “sunnivenda piyasa” in remote the spectrum and telecommunication areas to be in-line with “internet café to reflect international best practice in culture”. regulation, the national telecommunication policy and the ICT development road map. 6 Integrating – Sri Lankas’ commitment to universal consumers into access have taken a decision to the regulatory process expeditiously provide six hundred sub- post offices in off cities with telephone general comments/ service. conclusions inclusive – Regulator offering a subsidy scheme of Strength of for payphones operation for each incremental payphone installation and regional presence service to rural and remote consumer APT and other Broadcast Unions plays a in order to provide greater access. vital role, brings Sri Lankas’ commitment – providing of telephones for consumers to universal access in various ways. with special needs (for visually/ Rules, Laws, Technical support, Training, hearing/physically impaired persons) meetings and many more services bring Sri Lanka to have equal opportunity to – registration of communication outlets stand with rest of the world. When (BUREAUX) allowing them to be reforms are Introduced to suit with responsible and answerable for call consumer needs, World/Regional body services provided for consumers. and industry manufactures’ thoughts are – action to replace the Telecommuni- well consumed & best practiced whenever cation Regulatory Commission (TRC) and wherever possible.

Mr A. M. J. S. Roshan Goonewardene Mr Edirisinghege Nihal Pradeep Kumar Ratnapala Senior Technical Officer Telecommunication Assistant Director Telecommunications Regulatory Spectrum Management Commission of Sri Lanka Telecommunications Regulatory Commission of Sri Lanka 276, Elvitigala Mawatha LK-COLOMBO 8 276, Elvitigala Mawatha Sri Lanka LK-COLOMBO 08 Sri Lanka Tel.: +94 1 689 345 Fax: +94 1 689 341 Tel.: +94 1 683 840 E-mail: [email protected] Fax: +94 1 671 444 E-mail: [email protected]

220 Sri Lanka - 2

Sudan

Telecommunication Development Country Report for Sudan

1 Country Overview 2 Telecommunication Sudan, the largest country in Africa, is a Sector Profile multi-cultural, multi-ethnic and multi- lingual society, an Afro-Arab country occupying a remarkable position in the a) Pre-Privatization Era center of the African continent with a north – east coastline with the Red Sea. It Sudan has known telecommunication shares common borders with nine African services early 1897. Since that time, the countries. entity in charge of telecommunications Current estimates put the population of had undergone a number of organiza- Sudan in excess of 30 millions with an tional restructuring changes. The intent of annual growth rate estimated at 2.6%. these changes was to allow the entity in 65% of the population is rural, mostly charge to operate in a commercial, farmers. About 6% of the population business-manner, but it remained, for all resides in the capital, Greater Khartoum. practical purposes, a government department with little or no operational and Sudan enjoys an extremely diversified financial autonomy and with little real ecological system that provides extensive control over its own destiny. Despite stretches of fertile, cultivable lands and many development plans and efforts, the plains estimated at 200 million acres, state of telecommunication in the country huge livestock wealth estimated at remained extremely poor up to the year 130 million heads of cattle, sheep, goats 1993. By that time, Sudan had one of the and camels, some 250 million acres of lowest penetration rates even by regional forest, bushes and natural pastureland, standards. Its penetration rate was considerable water-supply reserves in 0.23% compared an average of 0.6% in forms of rainwater, rivers, streams, the region. surface and underground water reservoir and broad climatic zone that stretches from lush vegetation of the equatorial b) Privatization Era Southern Sudan to the arid deserts of the north. In addition to its agricultural and animal The Government of the Republic of the resources, Sudan abounds with potential Sudan, being aware of the constraints and mineral wealth such as oil, natural gas, conflicting forces facing the public sector gold, copper, manganese, mica, zinc, entities, and being convinced that these cobalt, granite, marble, nickel and tin. entities, in particular the telecommunication entity, be permitted to behave GDP growth has averaged around 6% more like commercial businesses under since the mid-1990s,the highest in the the conditions of competitive market region. GDP per capita is estimated at disciplines, adopted a Three-Year Eco- USD 8,500 million. nomic Salvation Programme (1990-1993).

Sudan - 1 221

The said Salvation Programme empha- a) The Ministry in charge of policies and sized the role of the telecommunications legislations, in the socio-economic development proc- b) The regulator (NTC) in charge of ess and called for the removal of the regulatory functions, monopolistic environment in the sector and for the involvement of the private c) Licensed operators and service pro- sector-whether local or foreign-in the viders in charge of operation of licensed telecommunication sector as well as in networks and provision of the services. other sectors of the economy in an endeavour to overcome the persistent The tables below show the main telecom- shortfalls in investment and performance. munication indicators in Sudan as at 31/12/2002. As an outcome of this programme, the structure of the telecommunication sector a) Capacities, customers and pene- in the country at present stands as tration rates follows:

1994 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 Fixed 74,000 154,000 198,000 280,000 415,000 790,000 1,224,600 (Exchange capacity) Mobile *** 2,600 7,810 18,200 45,000 100,000 256,000 (Subscribers) Internet *** 300 1,027 2,283 6,014 12,000 30,000 (Subscribers) Penetration Rates Fixed 0.24 0.48 0.62 0.85 1.24 2.47 3.82 Mobile *** 0.0078 0.024 0.055 0.132 0.285 0.800 Internet *** 0.001 0.004 0.004 0.017 0.034 0.094

b) Fixed Telephone Traffic Growth (Millions minutes)

1994 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 International 1/C 19.2 89.7 101.9 155.7 195.8 236.2 0/G 11.1 20.2 24.9 31.8 36.5 44.3 National 11.0 143.2 180.4 207.0 388.0 531.0 Local N,A 510.0 850.0 1 080.0 1 544.0 2 022.6

c) Licensed Operators on Board most modern in Africa, if not in the Middle East. It is, in fact, a remarkable transfor- One fixed services operator, one cellular mation considering the state of the sector mobile operator, twelve ISPs (six in just over ten years ago. operation and six not in operation yet), fifteen prepaid cards (fixed service) operators (eight in operation and seven not in operation yet) and three value – added 3 ICTs for Development services operators (voice mail, fax over e-mail, payphones). It goes without saying that the new information and communication technolo- A second cellular mobile license is due to gies (ICTs) offer immense opportunities for be awarded shortly. all societies and individuals for alternative, Currently, the telecommunication sector universal and often cheaper ways of in Sudan is widely held to be among the accessing and disseminating information.

222 Sudan - 2

The numerous new technologies and new agement of investments in the field, applications offered which, if harnessed, to ensure and diffuse free and can assist developing countries to acceler- constructive competition and lay down ate their development programmes in a plans, policies and regulations for the variety of sectors such as education, provision of the ICTs services and health, agriculture, rural development, their establishment on the national environment and emergency management, level with consideration to balanced governance, culture, mass media, libraries development and the service of the and archives, and scientific research. social and national objectives.

The key challenge for developing coun- d) Formulation of a national strategic tries in the Information Age remains to be plan for the build-up and promotion of the need to build the infrastructure an information society nationwide, necessary to capture the full benefits of (2001) galvanized by the political will the opportunities and applications of the at its highest level; the President of ICTs, in particular those of the Internet. the Republic.

Moreover, to foster the development of ICT e) An ICT-Fund which has recently been in developing countries, it is necessary to designed and concluded (May 2003);a create a pro-competitive environment that fund that will be implemented and attracts private investments and results in coordinated by the National Telecom- lower costs. munication Corporation, the Regulatory Policies such as broadband access, cost- Authority, under the auspices of the based capacity and fair local charges Ministry of Information and Commu- allow ICT service providers, ISPs in nications. This fund is planned to focus particular, to provide services and cus- ICTs on education (primary and high) tomers to access them at low prices with and rural development at length. improved speed and quality. Moreover, the National Telecommuni- cation Corporation is contemplating the Sudan, in its relentless efforts for the promotion of the implementation of progress towards an information society Multipurpose Community Telecentres in the country, has managed to liberalize as one of the most appropriate plat- and reform the telecommunication sector, forms for providing urban, rural and adopt market–oriented policies and finally remote areas, and businesses with formulate a national strategic plan for the ICTs services and applications. Such build-up and promotion of an Information telecentres can provide not only the Society nationwide with a mission to physical access, but also the necessary integrate country with the Global Infor- user support and training to help the mation Society and the Global Economy. addressed populations to effectively exploit and also develop useful ICTs The outcome of these policies adopted applications. and measures taken so far can be summarized as follows: The foregoing policies and measures are a) Liberalization and privatization of the part of the efforts that aim to realize the ICT sector in the country since the basic drivers for promoting the establish- beginning of 1990’s. ment of the necessary infrastructure upon which ICT applications thrive; namely, b) Establishment of an independent competition, investment and technological regulatory body, the National Tele- neutrality. communication Corporation (1996). c) Issuance of a telecommunication act, Sudan Telecommunication Act 2001; 4 Public Internet an act that aims to promote and regulate the telecommunication sector Access: Internet for All so as to conform to development and globalization, to provide an appropri- Currently the ICT sector in Sudan is ate stable and open commercial buzzing with achievements, activities and environment favourable to the promo- great expectations that keep all players tion of the services and the encour- quite busy.

Sudan - 3 223

The activities of the regulatory authority, granted to SUDATEL protecting it against the National Telecommunication Corpora- competition in the field of international tion (NTC), have witnessed the licensing of telecommunications up to the end of many service providers and operators as October 2005, all licensed ISPs are obliged narrated previously which led to the to lease the capacity necessary to develop emergence of various ICT services. their Internet networks from the said company. This seems to constitute a partial The incumbent operator, Sudan Telecom. constraint to the development of Internet Co. (SUDATEL) has managed, since its networks in the country which will ease inception in 1993, to establish a fully– when the ISPs have the right to own the digital telecommunication infrastructure capacity they require by the end of the said comprising: concession period. 1) Domestic telephone system based on Nevertheless, many measures have been fibre-optic cable backbone network implemented to establish the widest possi- extending for more than 6 500 km. ble Internet access. These measures 2) Domestic satellite systems with 50 include but not limited to the licensing of (VSAT and SUDOSAT) earth station. hundreds of Internet cafe’s and centers 3) International links provided by satellite throughout the country and the introduc- earth stations-Intelsat (Atlantic Ocean) tion of “Free Internet” which led immedi- and Arabsat. ately to the tripling of the users who only pay the telephone charges. The domestic fibre-optic backbone network is connected to Ethiopia via a microwave link and Saudi Arabia via a submarine 5 Conclusion fibre-optic cable across the Red Sea. The liberalization and privatization of the Afibre-optic land cable to Egypt is to be telecommunication sector, the policies, installed on both sides of the borders. the regulations and plans adopted by the Government of the Sudan has created a The regional connectivity is part of a capital –attracting, pro-competitive policy declared policy and objective of SUDATEL environment that has fostered the build– to be a regional carrier-a regional bridge up of a modern, fully–digital infrastruc- between Africa, the Arab Region and the ture in the country and furnished a world. climate suited to enhance ICTs develop- In addition, a GSM network, managed by ment nationwide. Sudan Mobile Telephone Co. (MOBITEL), The remarkable transformation and is fully operational in many of the major achievements witnessed in the Sudanese cities and various neghbouring rural areas Telecommunication sector coupled with and in interface with the international the growing and diversifying use of the (roaming) GSM network. ICT services including those of the SUDATEL and MOBITEL systems offer Internet and its applications have been a bseband and broadband access that is success story that made Sudan to be considered to be adequate for Internet and widely held among the most developed in its applications. But due to the concession Africa, if not in the Middle East.

Mr Murtada Gailany Idris Mr Awad Elkarim Widaa Tech. Manager Advisor to the Minister Sudan National Telecom Corporation Ministry of Information and PO Box 1130 Communication SD-KHARTOUM 11111 SD-KHARTOUM Sudan Sudan Tel.: +249 11 484 487 Tel.: +249 11 562 351 Fax: +249 11 483 202 Fax: +249 11 562 352 E-mail: [email protected] E-mail: [email protected]

224 Sudan - 4

Swaziland

ICTs for Development – Internet for all: Public Internet Access

1 Background 1.3 Essential Application Swaziland has identified that, in order for ICT has demonstrated enormous power to ICT to be of benefit to our communities, it change economic structures and contrib- is essential that various applications ute to economic prosperity and better should be developed – such as e-health, quality of life. However, disparities exist e-education, e-commerce, e-learning, etc. that separate those with easy access to These applications should be available for network resources (especially internet) both urban and rural residents. and those with no access. This is particularly the case in Swaziland, where the concept of a digital divide is a reality; it 2 Swaziland’s position exists across the entire social fibre, not just between urban and rural but also within institutions and families. Thus it is 2.1 Country Information critical for us to bridge the digital divide if Swaziland is a land-locked country in we are to enable everyone to reap the Southern Africa, about 17 000 square benefits of ICT. kilometers. The population is about one million. Three main challenges have been identified and these are: 2.2 Available resources 1.1 The need to enhance ICT The Telecommunications network is fully literacy digital. The Telecommunication infrastructure covers mainly the urban areas In order for everyone to have the basic with about 42 000 fixed lines and skills required to fully participate in the 80 000 mobile lines. For the fixed lines, information society, care must be taken the telecommunications density is 4.2 lines to ensure that there is an education per 100 people. component to enhance ICT literacy. In Rural areas, most communities already have commercial power. These include 1 1.2 Infrastructure schools and “Tinkhundla” centers. If telecommunication access points can be Steps should be taken towards developing the necessary information and communication infrastructure. This task requires private sector participation, which can be ______harnessed through the creation of 1 Centers within communities established for pur- transparent legal frameworks. poses of carrying out basic civil services.

Swaziland - 1 225

made available at these areas then a wide 3.2 Information & range of community members can have Broadcasting access. Such an arrangement would make • it convenient for government to make Developing a policy that merges infor- cross-subsidies. mation and its transport (communications). • 2.3 Financier Improving level of information sharing / communication among stake- A Financier/Sponsor is required in order holders. to roll out ICTs to the wider Swazi com- • Addressing issues of skills/capacity munity. building (HRD).

2.4 Education 3.3 ISP Industry

There is need to improve the computer There are five major ISPs with the literacy in the country. The print and Telecom’s company being one of them. electronic media has been identified as a The major objective of the Telecom’s critical stakeholder in promoting aware- Internet project was to spread Internet ness on e-business. access through out the country at an affordable price. Prior this project, Internet access was for the rich people in 2.5 Inventory the urban areas. In order for Swaziland to benefit from To spread Internet access, the postal structures (be it funding or other support) division has Internet cafés in some of it is necessary that regulation is intro- their post offices and they plan to roll out duced in Swaziland. the project even in the rural areas. The ISP sector relies heavily on other 2.6 ICT Priority stakeholders for service delivery, such as SPTC2 (for infrastructure) and the com- A large section of the population has pro- puter industry. Key areas to attend to blems meeting basic requirements such are: as access to clean water, electricity and • basic telephony. Consequently, this sec- Address issues of monopoly and tion of the population sees ICT only as a control, which have a direct influence dream. on enterprise, fair competition and pricing. • Removing or reducing the barrier of 3 Initiatives entry.

The initiatives currently being undertaken include: 4 Conclusion It is concluded that in order for ICT to 3.1 Telecommunications bear long-term benefits to the people of Industry Swaziland, efforts must be directed towards the following: Developing a clear policy on ICT rollout. • Introducing a Regulator to level the 4.1 ICT policy playing field and facilitate the liberalization process. Finalizing the ICT Policy and setting up of an independent regulatory function. The • Identifying and developing ICT com- policy must define all necessary parame- munity access points. ters associated with ICT. • Making ICT gadgets more affordable accompanied by low tariffs. To achieve this, it would be necessary for gov- ______

ernment to waive some taxes on ICT 2 Swaziland Posts and Telecommunications Corpo- related equipment. ration.

226 Swaziland - 2

4.2 Benchmarking must continue to be made to establish what SADC or other countries in the Through the Ministry of Tourism, Environ- region are doing, for comparison pur- ment and Communications, consultations poses.

Mr Amon Dlamini Ms Thembi Mkhonto Senior Manager Engineer Internet Strategic Planning & Works Control Swaziland Posts and Telecommunications Swaziland Posts and Telecommunications Corporation Corporation Phutfumani Blg. Warner St. 125 Phutfumani Blg. Warner St. 125 SZ-MBABANE SZ-MBABANE Swaziland Swaziland Tel.: +268 405 2337 Tel.: +268 405 2228 Fax: +268 405 2022 Fax: +268 405 2022 E-mail: [email protected] E-mail: [email protected]

Swaziland - 3 227

Tanzania

Information and Communication Technology Development in Tanzania

Abstract 816 million people in Africa in 2001, it is estimated that: The use of information and Communica- tions Technologies (ICTs) has grown – 1 in 4 have a radio (205 m) 25% relatively rapidly in most countries in – 1 in 13 have a TV (62 m) 8% Africa. Five to ten years ago, only a handful of countries have local Internet – 1 in 35 have a mobile phone access; now it is available in every capital (24 m) 3% city. In the same period, more mobile cell – 1 in 40 have a fixed line phones were deployed on the continent (20 m) 2.5% than the number of fixed lines laid in the – 1 in 130 have a PC (5.9 m) 0.7% last century. Hundreds of new local and community radio stations have been – 1 in 160 use the Internet (5 m) 0.6% licensed, and satellite TV is now also – 1 in 400 have pay–TV (2 m) 0.24% widely available. Set out in Table 1 are key statistics However, the digital divide is still at its indicators benchmarked at Tanzania’s most extreme in Africa, where the use of Independence, at the start of the major ICTs is still at a very early stage of reform process, in 1993 and 2002. The development compared to other regions progression has been remarkable since of the world. Of the approximately 1993.

Indicators 1961 1993 2002 Population (in millions) 12.3 26.7 33.6 Fixed line exchange capacity 11,300 125,703 234,640 Mobile operators 1 4 Mobile subscribers 1,500 800,000 Teledensity (lines per 100 people) 0.10 0.32 2.5 Data communications operators 16 Internet service providers 1 23 Internet subscribers (Dialup accounts and Wireless) 10 14,000 Internet capacity (total bandwidth Kbits) 64 44,000 Television licences 1 24 Radio broadcast licences 1 2 18

Tanzania - 1 229

1 What and why that would allow for the production of a critical man of professionals in Information and the use of ICTs, Communications – using ICT in identifying and exploiting Technologies (ICT) opportunities for trade, investment Development and finance through e-government, e-agriculture, e-commence, e-educa- in Tanzania tion, e-health, etc., Information and Communications Tech- – addressing issues on manpower skills nologies (ICTs) driven by the convergence management, knowledge sharing and of computers, telecommunication and information exchange in government, traditional media, are crucial for the private sector and public in general. knowledge based economy of the future. Rapid advances made in this technology and diminishing costs open up the new 3 Current Status of ICT window of opportunity for Tanzania and in Tanzania Africa as a whole continent to accelerate their economic growth and development. Tanzania is yet to fully realize benefits of Currently level of ICT and IT in the ICT due to a many factors mainly; the country is significantly influencing the lack of ICT Policy, poor or weak infra- formulation of policies and strategies structure, and lack of adequately skilled which shall guide investment in IT personnel. Other problems include lack of development in Tanzania. funds for buying modern working equipment, human resource development and for investing in local training and research 2 Objectives of ICT and development institution. Development in Tanzania 3.1 ICT Initiatives in Tanzania Tanzania like many other developing countries have embarked on ICT develop- ICT initiatives, in the past two or so ment as a means of enhancing socio- years, were being executed by various economic performance so as to achieve groups of public and private entities. The objectives set forth in the National fragmented initiatives were not effective Development Vision 2025. ICT is a vital in delivering services and in the coordi- tool for poverty reduction, fight against nation of ICT activities in Tanzania. The killer diseases such AIDS/HIV, and lack of proper coordination of ICT ignorance. It empowers people to be able initiatives associated with poor infra- to communicate and share knowledge structure and limited human resource in through exchange of information and this industry resulted into the need for experience on how best to improve their government intervention. living standards. ICT development in Tanzania is geared towards achieving the In April 2001 the Ministry of Communica- following objectives: tions and Transport (MCT) was appointed as the National ICT Coordinator and a – giving impetus to the democratiza- Focal Point for all matters related to ICT tion process and good governance, in the country. The intention was to have – facilitating the integration of proper coordination of ICT related activi- Tanzania, Africa and the world with ties, for effective planning process, the new information society, using resource mobilization, allocation and its cultural diversity as a leverage, utilization, monitoring implementation of ICT activities and evaluation. – using in a range of applications, environmental, agricultural and infrastructure planning, 3.2 Actions Taken by MCT – existing complementarities can be MCT supported by SIDA has been taking better utilized to provide training actions on ICT development process

230 Tanzania - 2

including the formulation of a friendly, groups and underserved areas, infra- flexible and implement able National ICT structure development, and the Univer- Policy. Currently the policy document sal access and local content development was ready as from March 2003 and issues, etc. implementation strategies being finalized and it is expected ready by end of this These Focus Areas are intended to year. Other tasks in pipeline include: achieve objectives below: – coordinate of the establishment of an – Establish an infrastructure network effective ICT national institution that that will enable ICT to provide will provide guidance for planning, services to other sectors, management and implementation of – Create a backbone from which make ICT projects for sustainable services other sectors share facilities thus to people and the economy in lowering costs and associated tariffs, general, – Promote connectivity program that – preparation of a National ICT imple- links the government, schools, hospi- mentation Master Plan. tals and health centers, training and As the Focal Point, MCT needs to ensure research institutions, travel and tour- that ICT development is based on a ism places to build up high level Public-Private partnership perspective. manpower, The private sector participation in the – Lower the costs and improve reliabil- establishment, development and invest- ity of services, ment in ICT is of crucial importance. The government including local government – Build up local capacity for the authority has to conduct a full awareness management of ICT, and sensitization campaign program at – Recruit own ICT experts at lower all levels on the role and importance of costs and for a sustainable develop- ICT to citizen and the national economy. ment, For ICT to be able to deliver sustainable – Create employment for Tanzanian services to the people and all sectors of people as a way for fighting against the economy there is a great need for poverty, making heavy investment in ICT infra- – Develop and produce a pool of ICT structure, human resource and other proficient youth and students, from enabling sectors of Telecommunications, which ICT professionals can be Postal, Education and Energy. Joint drawn, projects may be designed with the objective of attaining connectivity at – Develop local content software, optimal costs so as making end services based especially on African cultural affordable. In solving the problem of legacy, limited human resource, Tanzania has to – Promote innovation and creativity of invest adequately in training institutions our people using local resources to ranging from lower schools to higher meet local markets, learning ones in order to build up and expand their capacities to train ICT – Facilitate the implementation of the professionals. ongoing Public Sector Reform Pro- gramme. The draft National ICT Policy document outlines Ten Focus areas that can be implemented in order to fully realize ICT 3.3 Current Tanzania Plan of benefits. These areas include the Leader- Work ship that is aware, willing and committed – Coordinate computerization process to ICT development. Legal and Regula- in the public institutions particularly tory framework issues for enabling provi- in all the Ministries which will lead to sion of quality standard services, human harmonization process, resource development to meet the growing demands of knowledge economy – Networking (LAN and WAN systems) and information society – ICT for educa- in all Ministries and related depart- tion in rural areas, to disadvantaged ment,

Tanzania - 3 231

– Website design and development in – Conducting awareness and sensitiza- all Ministries, tion campaigns in the public sector – Internet and intranet connections in on the use of ICT services. all Ministries, – Coordination of ICT development – Design and development of a process – creation of a public –private National ICT Database system, sector partnership spirit through involvement of all the key stake- – Coordinate the establishment of ICT holders. sections or units to work as contact points in all Ministries and related – Facilitating local and overseas institutions, assistance and research related to ICT development. – Developing intranet for the Ministry to form a base of pilot project which will be shared between ministries and other interested institutions which Reference may lead to paperless communications. Train two graduate students – Ministry of Communications and to form an entry point in making Transport NTP 1997. government intelligent user of ICT, – Tanzania Communications Commis- – Intensive awareness and sensi- sion Papers. tization all over the country and – Tanzania ICT National Policy docu- content development. ment 2003. – Tanzania Transport Policy document 4 Recommendation 2003. – How can ERB be effective in – Information Communication Techno- implementation of the ICT policy. logies for African development. – Design and develop full intranet and – UNICT Task Force series 2. internet in MCT and later on services – National Information and Commu- extended to other Ministries in phases. nications Technology Policy 2003.

Mr August B. Kowero Mr Peter Rudolf Ulanga Assistant Director Principal Telecommunications Engineer Posts and Telecommunications Tanzania Communications Commission Ministry of Communications and P.O. Box 474 Transport TZ-Dar-es-Salaam P.O. Box 9144 Tanzania TZ-Dar es Salaam Tel.: +255 22 211 8947 Tanzania Fax: +255 22 211 6664 Tel.: +255 22 212 1530 E-mail: [email protected] Fax: +255 22 211 2751 E-mail: [email protected]

232 Tanzania - 4

Togo

Rapport national du Togo sur le développement des télécommunications

Présentation du secteur b) Libéralisation du secteur des télécommunications Des segments de marché ont été ouverts à et de Togo Telecom la concurrence notamment les services internationaux, la transmission de don- nées, la téléphonie mobile, les services 1 Introduction Internet. Le monopole étant toujours conservé pour le moment dans les faits sur Trois changements importants ont marqué les services téléphoniques fixes local et ces dernières années le secteur des télé- longue distance. communications sur le plan de la réforme: c) Octroi des licences – L'ouverture du capital des opérateurs historiques au secteur privé, Tous les services en dehors, de la trans- – L'ouverture du secteur à la concur- mission de données et de la fourniture de rence, services Internet sont soumis à licence.

– La création d'organes de réglementa- d) Concessions tion indépendants. L'opérateur historique Togo Telecom n'est Togo Telecom n'a pas échappé à la règle. pas encore privatisé mais une convention de concession avec l'Etat est en cours d'élaboration. Par ailleurs, un projet de 2 L'environnement concession pour la téléphonie rurale national du secteur englobant des zones urbaines est en cours de finalisation entre l'Etat et un des télécommuni- opérateur privé. cations 2.2 Le marché 2.1 L'état des réformes: le cadre réglementaire a) Etat de la demande a) Réforme institutionnelle du secteur – Les demandes en instances pour le téléphone sont estimés à environ Elle a été marquée par l'adoption d'une 30 000 à fin 2002. Environ 200 localités déclaration de politique sectorielle en 1996 rurales sont desservies par le télé- qui scinde le secteur des postes de celui phone fixe, sur plus d'un millier des télécommunications et par la promul- recensé. Même si les réseaux cellulai- gation de la loi sur les télécommunications res ont permis d'accroître le taux de le 11 février 1998 donnant naissance à couverture du territoire national, la l'Autorité de Réglementation des secteurs densité téléphonique reste faible des Postes et télécommunications. (environ 4% en fin 2002).

Togo - 1 233

– L'Internet n'est présent qu'à Lomé et que trois (3) opérateurs ont également dans quelques grandes villes de l'inté- obtenu la licence d'exploiter les services de rieur. Seul environ 1,07 pour 100 utili- VSAT; ces derniers sont de potentiels sateurs. fournisseurs d'accès. – Le RNIS (Réseau Numérique avec Intégration de Services) est disponible L'opérateur historique est relié au à Lomé et Kara. backbone mondial par un nœud de 6 Mbt/s en montée et 10 Mbts/s en descente, mis b) Les produits et services existants en service en 1997. Il s'est positionné – le téléphone fixe avec: comme un fournisseur d'accès exclusive- ment. Il fournit des liaisons spécialisées – le RNIS, dont le débit peut aller jusqu'à 256 kbts/s – la SDA (Sélection Directe à l'Arri- aux fournisseurs de service (ISP). Aujour- vée), d'hui, il dispose d'une dizaine de liaison intranet et d'une vingtaine d'ISP qui – les services conforts: la hot line, la exploitent leur activité par l'intermédiaire facturation détaillée, le transfert de cybercafés. Le nombre de cybercafés d'appel, … est d'environ 300 sur toute l'étendue du – le télex et télégramme, territoire dont plus de 90% se retrouvent à Lomé la capitale. Ils exercent leur activité à – la téléphonie mobile cellulaire, travers une liaison wireless ou à travers le – la transmission de données par RTCP. Beaucoup d'ISP ont délaissé l'accès paquets, par liaison spécialisée au profit de l'accès par ligne RNIS moins onéreux. C'est ainsi – l'Internet, que le parc RNIS en un an a été multiplié – la VoIP (Téléphonie des réseaux de par deux. type IP). Stratégie de base de l'opérateur historique: 2.2 La concurrence ayant décidé de se positionner en fournisseur d'accès, Togo Telecom avait initié dès Elle est introduite sur les segments et le départ une sensibilisation des opérateurs marchés suivants: privés afin de susciter chez eux l'intérêt – Le trafic local et interurbain avec la pour la fourniture et l'utilisation du service concession des zones rurales, internet. Etaient ciblés par cette sensibilisation, les opérateurs privés potentiels – Le trafic international (Togo Telecom, fournisseurs du service Internet, les écoles, Café Informatique, Telecel), les ONG, les institutions. Togo Telecom – La téléphonie mobile cellulaire (Togocel s'est proposé à leur apporter son assis- et Telecel), tance: logement de serveurs, abonnement ou création de comptes d'accès distant – L'Internet (l'accès: TGT et Café Infor- gratuit pendant près de six mois, organisa- matique/les services: les ISP), tion des sessions de formation pour les – La VoIP (les ISP). fournisseurs et pour les utilisateurs de l'Internet, assistance technique. Cette stra- tégie a été à la base du développement 2.4 Situation de l'Internet rapide de l'utilisation du service Internet au Togo dans le pays. a) Généralités b) Tarification Sur une superficie de 56 600 km², le Togo a une population de 4 675 000 habitants. Le marché des télécommunications a été L'opérateur historique, bien que n'étant ouvert à la concurrence depuis 1998. pas le seul fournisseur d'accès, essaie de proposer des tarifs plus ou moins accep- Le pays compte deux (2) fournisseurs tables pour les fournisseurs de service. d'accès Internet: l'opérateur historique et Les tarifs pratiques sont exposés dans le un exploitant de VSAT. Mais il faut signaler tableau suivant.

234 Togo - 2

Liaisons spécialisées Frais de mise en service (uniforme) 472 000 Franc CFA Tarifs d'abonnement mensuel (sont fonction du débit et de l'offre auxquels le client est abonné) 64 kbit/s 128 kbit/s 256 kbit/s ISP 590 000 1 003 000 1 534 000 Sociétés & 413 000 649 000 Entreprises Cybercafé & ONG 354 000 590 000 Institutions 295 000 531 000 d'enseignement

Lignes RNIS Frais de mise en service 109 000 Franc CFA Redevance mensuelle consommation + forfait de 13 000 Franc CFA

N.B: Il s'agit de prix TTC exprimés en phase de recherche de points de relais dans Francs CFA. ces localités pour le lancement de l'Internet (écoles, ONG, ...). Mais beaucoup, aussi Le second fournisseur d'accès, Café Infor- bien dans les zones urbaines que rurales, matique, est relié au backbone mondial par se font assister pour avoir accès ponctuelle- un VSAT à 1 Mbts/s. Il dessert environ une ment à l'Internet. quinzaine de cybercafés et quelques sociétés par des liaisons wireless. Son nœud national est desservi par une 2.5 Activités sous-régionale cinquantaine de lignes analogiques. et internationale dans le domaine des télécommu- c) Réglementation nications Une loi a été adoptée en 1998 soumettant Togo Telecom participe aux travaux de toute transmission de données à autorisa- certains organismes sous-régionaux et tion. Mais la fourniture du service VoIP fait internationaux tels: l'objet d'une réglementation particulière. – La Conférence des Télécommuni- d) Accès du public à Internet cations Ouest-Africaine (CTOA), – L'Union Internationale des Télécom- En ce qui concerne l'accès du public à ce munications (UIT), … nouveau service, aucune politique n'a été initiée par le gouvernement pour faciliter Togo Telecom est actionnaire dans: cet accès. A ce jour, ce sont les Organisa- – L'Organisation Régionale Africaine des tions non gouvernementales (ONG) finan- Communications par Satellite (RASCOM), cées par des bailleurs de fonds étrangers, – Intelsat, certaines organisations religieuses et les cybercafés (même si pour ces derniers le – Le Centre Régional de Maintenance des service est payant). Ce nouveau produit Télécommunications de Lomé (CMTL). est beaucoup consommé par les jeunes, les élèves, et les étudiants. C'est ainsi que surtout les mercredis soir et les samedis 3 L'état du réseau de (période de repos des jeunes), nous Togo Telecom constatons un afflux de ces jeunes dans les cybercafés. Les professionnels des sociétés 3.1 Le réseau téléphonique privées, étatiques et autres ont aussi un engouement certain pour l'Internet. Près A ce jour, Togo Telecom dispose d'un de deux cent localités rurales desservies réseau téléphonique commuté (RTC), entiè- par le téléphone sont de potentiels utilisa- rement numérique qui couvre 19 villes et teurs d'Internet. Togo Telecom est en 181 localités rurales.

Togo - 3 235

Au 30 juin 2003, le nombre d'abonnés 301 abonnés en 1995, il ne compte plus au téléphone fixe est de 55 968 dont que 51 abonnés en juin 2003. 43 280 à Lomé. Ce réseau est en déclin compte tenu des – Commutation évolutions technologiques mais il reste un des moyens de transmission de données Togo Telecom comporte deux (2) centres le plus sécurisant pour la plupart des de Transit international (CTI), deux (2) institutions bancaires. centres de Transit national (CTN) et deux commutateurs locaux. Ces centraux gèrent – Réseau TOGOPAC au total dix neuf (19) Unités de Raccorde- Mis en place en 1988, ce réseau utilise le ment d'Abonnés Distants (URAD). protocole X25. Il est axé autour de deux – Transmission (2) centraux situés à Lomé et à Kara. Sa capacité actuelle est de 88 ports. Sur ce La transmission est assurée par des réseau, il est offert des liaisons spécialisées liaisons en faisceaux hertziens et fibres point à point essentiellement aux entrepri- optiques. Sur le plan international deux (2) ses. On y compte aujourd'hui 50 abonnés. stations terriennes de standard A à Lomé et Kara assurent l'acheminement du trafic Avec l'avènement de l'Internet, la international. Ces deux infrastructures connexion X25 est également en régres- assurent largement les besoins du pays sion au profit de la connexion via des dans la mesure où elles sont actuellement réseaux types Internet. utilisées à 30% à peine de leur capacité. – Réseau Internet – Réseaux locaux Togo Telecom dispose d'un nœud Internet Les réseaux locaux sont constitués par les avec deux liaisons: une liaison à débit infrastructures aériennes et souterraines asymétrique de 10 Mbits/s à la descente de câbles permettant de raccorder les et 6 Mbits/s à la montée et une liaison à abonnés. La capacité globale de raccorde- débit symétrique de 2 Mbits/s pour le secours. ment est d'environ 140 000 paires, à l'issue d'importantes extensions en cours de A ce jour, Togo Telecom offre des liaisons finition à Lomé. spécialisées point à point par câble pour la transmission des données. Ce produit est – Téléphonie rurale essentiellement destiné aux entreprises et Les localités rurales sont essentiellement aux fournisseurs de services (ISP: Internet desservies par des équipements radio de Services Providers). Les ISP offrent égale- type IRT 2000. Certaines localités sont ment aux particuliers des accès par ligne desservies par câbles à partir d'une URAD téléphonique. Ce type d'accès présente des AXE 10. Au total 181 localités sont desser- contraintes aux utilisateurs à cause de la vies en téléphonie rurale. qualité et de la lenteur de la connexion. On compte à fin juin 2003, 46 liaisons spéciali- – Téléphonie rurale sées point à point sur le réseau dont Togo Telecom exploite ce segment de 16 ISP. marché par le biais de sa filiale Togo Le second accès proposé aux utilisateurs Cellulaire. est l'accès par ligne numérique RNIS (Réseau Numérique avec Intégration de 3.2 Réseau de transmission Services) beaucoup utilisé. de données Pour la transmission des données, Togo 4 Les projets en cours Telecom dispose de trois (3) types de réseau: le réseau X25 (TOGOPAC), le 4.1 L'artère en fibre optique réseau télex et le réseau Internet. Anèho – Lomé – Kara – – Réseau télex Cinkassé Le réseau initial d'une capacité de Le projet de fibre optique en cours va 1 500 lignes est aujourd'hui remplacé par créer un axe de transmission synchrone un concentrateur chez British Telecom. De entre Aného, Lomé, Kara et Cinkassé.

236 Togo - 4

Ce projet se situe dans le cadre du renfor- 4.4 Le projet de réseaux cement et de la modernisation des liai- locaux sons de transmission de Togo Telecom. D'importants travaux en réseaux locaux Cette liaison va desservir les centres sont prévus dans les villes de l'intérieur au d'Aného, Baguida, Lomé Port, Lomé centre, terme des extensions en commutation. Hedzranawoé, Caccavelli, Agoé, Tsévié, Notsé, Gléï, Atakpamé, Anié, Blitta, 4.5 Migrations informatiques Sotouboua, Sokodé, Kara, Niamtougou, Kanté, Mango, Dapaong, et Cinkassé ainsi La réalisation de ce projet permettra de que quelques bretelles. moderniser l'outil informatique de la société. Les applications suivantes seront La capacité de l'artère sera de 2,5 Gbit/s développées: comptabilité générale et bud- gétaire, gestion du personnel et paie, ges- soit l'équivalent de 30 000 communication commerciale des télécommunications. tions téléphoniques simultanées. 5 Bref aperçu du plan 4.2 Le projet d'extension en commutation, phase 2 quinquennal Dans le cadre du développement de son Le plan quinquennal 2004-2008 a pour réseau, Togo Telecom a eu à signer avec objectif d'élaborer des projets de dévelop- Ericsson, un contrat d'extension des cen- pement à la lumière des informations déte- traux téléphoniques à réaliser en 2 phases. nues sur la situation actuelle de la société. La première phase a permis l'installation et Ce plan s'est basé sur la projection de la la mise en service de 42 000 lignes. demande enregistrée en fin 2002 sur les Pour la seconde phase une capacité globale années à venir, l'hypothèse étant de satisfaire cette demande. Ce plan se propose de 14 900 lignes est prévue; seize localités rurales seront transformées en URAD et donc de déployer sur cinq ans 100 000 des extensions seront réalisées dans les lignes supplémentaires sans perdre de vue grandes villes. l'évolution des nouveaux services. Une analyse est faite de la situation 4.3 Installation des financière de la société permettant ainsi d'émettre les hypothèses de financement. équipements d'énergie électrique et solaire 6 Annexes Pour l'alimentation des équipements de télécommunications, l'installation des équi- 6.1 Evolution du service pements d'alimentation en énergie électri- Internet au Togo que et solaire est prévue.

1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 Juin 2003 Abonnés Internet 247 2 500 4 000 7 000 10 000 12 000 12 500 ISP facturés 10 15 20 26 37 24 17 Nombre d'Intranet 3 5 7 10 15 25 32 Réseaux connectés 13 20 27 36 52 49 49 Utilisateurs 10 000 15 000 30 000 100 000 150 000 200 000 250 000 estimés d'Internet Nombre de RNIS 18 61 61 108 136 238 facturés Serveurs Internet1 37 110 120 159 220 230 2502

1 Source: Internet Software Consortium. 2 La majorité des ISP sont sur lignes RNIS depuis un an.

Togo - 5 237

6.2 Indicateurs de base (au 30 juin 2003)

Installée En service Taux d'occupation Capacité installée en équipements téléphoniques (en %) National 86 412 55 968 65 Lomé 68 012 43 280 64 Capacité installée en équipements d'abonnés RNIS 1 712 315 18 Parc de publiphones de Togo Telecom 207 Nombre de cabines privées 12 103 Centres urbains desservis 19 Centres ruraux desservis 178 Effectif du personnel 883 Investissement annuel (2002) 18 400 millions de francs CFA Total des recettes de services téléphoniques (2002) 29 359 millions de francs CFA

M. Sewa Dzikpolanyuie Mensah Mme Tantoa Midaanga Chef Division Planification et Statistiques Chef Section Activités Statutaires des Togo Telecom Organisations Internationales de Télécommunications Avenue Nicolas Grunitzky Togo Telecom B.P. 333 TG-LOMÉ Avenue Nicolas Grunitzky Togo B.P. 333 TG-LOMÉ Tél.: +228 22 236/221 4401 Togo Fax: +228 22 10 915 E-mail: [email protected] Tél.: +228 22 21 904 Fax: +228 22 10 915 E-mail: [email protected]

238 Togo - 6

Vanuatu

ICTs for Education – Addressing the shortage through e-learning

Introduction 2 Goal/Forecasted Results The use of information and communication technologies (ICTs) for education is rapidly expanding in many countries From its planning stages in 1999, it has worldwide. In Vanuatu it is now seen as a been projected that by the end of the necessity and an opportunity for pupils as year 2001 there would be thirty (30) well as teachers to use this tool to en- schools accessing this Internet service. hance their conventional classroom black- This meant that there would at least be board/whiteboard and textbook learning. 2.5 schools per month provided with the service. Telecom Vanuatu thus, having realised the use of ICTs for learning, designed and launched a product specially geared for schools: L@goon School. Lagoon School was launched in 1999 as a specific Internet offer for schools with a very competitive rate (VT 135 an hour), during school hours only, from 07:30- 113:30 and 13:30-16:30. With the grow- 1 Objectives of the ing interest in the new service and as project more and more people were becoming aware of the product, TVL decided to • To promote access to the Internet to make Lagoon School totally free of charge schools throughout the country, in- to schools in March 2001 to facilitate cluding the outer islands. more schools to access the Internet. Free Lagoon School was rolled out after heavy advertising campaigns through the media • To expose and encourage school (press releases, Television Blong Vanuatu children on the use of advanced infor- reports & news). In April 2001, an agree- mation and communication tech- ment was signed formally between nology to advance their learning/ Telecom Vanuatu Limited and the Ministry academic developments. of Education to officiate the Free Internet Access for schools. At the same time donation of some computers, modems and other peripherals were made by TVL • To develop a positive image of for schools on Efate and the remote Telecom Vanuatu Limited (TVL) as a islands till the end of the school year and company, in caring and willing to help to enhance the impact of TVL assisting members of the community and the children in their academic developments. country as a whole.

Vanuatu - 1 239

TVL realises that in the years to come, 5 New ideas, new Internet will be omnipresent in all the fields of activities in which the actual changes generation of pupils will be working, thus New stage: The Commercial Department has decided to facilitate the access to has expanded its activity to enhance the the Internet to these young people, by increase of Internet usage (traffic), providing a special service for schools: through competitions such as “Best L@goon School. Lagoon Web Site” which was launched in June 2001.

The “Best Lagoon Web Site” was a competition involving schools aimed at generating interest in the Internet as an important tool for learning as well as creativity. School pupils had to design and create their schools’ web sites. Prizes were then presented to the best-designed Websites based on various criteria.

Telecom Vanuatu Limited has recently been contacted by Hawaii regarding a project call “Pacific Islands Network” (P.I.N.) aimed at interconnecting schools Figure 1 – A student at Ecole Française and universities around the Pacific region surfs the weg to facilitate the exchange of data between these institutions among the islands nations. TVL is therefore working closely

with Hawaii in the process for implementing that network and getting Vanuatu connected. The project includes provision of computers and on-site training. 4 Key factors to success

Internet access has become a priority for schools as Vanuatu is an isolated country. It is a very powerful tool, which can be 6 Project application utilised by both students and teachers methodology schools to search for documentation and information through the Web. With 1) Identifying the need to establishing Lagoon school, TVL is seen as playing a Free Internet Access in the schools for very vital role in preparing the youth for academic developments. the future. It is also seen as an important social obligation on the part of TVL to a 2) Signing of Agreement between TVL developing country such as Vanuatu by and the Ministry of Education. making Internet access free to schools and providing some of the necessary 3) Awareness programmes through equipment. heavy advertising campaigns carried out through the various medium of communication. Response from community schools requesting access to the Lagoon School 4) TVL Management makes the decision Internet service has been very positive. on the eligibility of the applicants. More and more educational institutions are realising the importance of accessing 5) Tests on the technical feasibility and the Internet for advance learning for their capability to install the Lagoon School pupils and teachers. Service.

240 Vanuatu - 2

6) Provide training to the schools (espe- puters and other equipment. External cially in the rural areas). These train- contributors are the Ministry of Education, ings are coordinated by the Ministry the Director of the Education and the of Education and Non-Government NGO’s to donating some computers, Organisations. modems, solar power equipment and 7) Follow up activities after 6 months of generators for schools in the rural and establishment to monitor progress on remote areas mainly. skills and knowledge. An application form must completed and signed. TVL decides whether the school is 10 Difficulties eligible or not before providing the login name and the password to the applicant. To introduce and promote a new technology in the rural areas is difficult and costly since in most cases the basic 7 Duration of the ingredients do not exist, such as a telephone line or power source. The majority project before if not all, of the remote schools in the realisation archipelago still do not have access to a telephone line, or a computer, no power This depends very much on the location (generators/solar power). Many rural of the project. If it is the Urban area it schoolteachers are not computer literate takes less time however, if it is in the and they do have the technical ability to rural areas, it takes more time. Average be ready for this service. The targeted time taken is approximately a month. TVL schools have to be provided with com- Technical Services has standard Service puters and other related equipment and Provision guidelines for new services – up resources for the project to become a to 30 days and up 60 days for urban and reality. rural respectively. The actual product, however, took at least 2 months for the actual preparation before launching. 11 Possible application in 8 Results obtained in other countries comparison with the It is possible to apply this project in any forecast: other countries in the hope of building the children to prepare for the future. It is a Since free Lagoon school was introduced, matter of identifying the external con- 57 schools have subscribed to the service. tributors who will be willing to be partners This number includes some schools in the in the project. remotest parts of Vanuatu such as the Banks Islands and Malekula. So far just over 50 % of the targeted annual forecast is in the process. This indicates huge 12 Solution proposed interest amongst the schools for the community. For the project’s progress into the future, TVL would like to see itself as providing the access or the service and, not nec- 9 Initiator and contri- essarily providing the necessary equip- butors of the product ment and the resource person for implementation of the service in schools. The initiator of the Lagoon School product However, TVL is the promoter to the solu- was TVL’s Managing Director, Mr Richard tions. TVL obtains assistance from the Hall. The original internal contributor was Government (Ministry of Education and only TVL, through its dedicated Com- the Director of Education) and the NGO’s. mercial Department staff, technicians It stimulates the companies to play their assisting in setting up equipment, wand role with in the areas to install computers also through its donation of some com- and providing the training.

Vanuatu - 3 241

13 General Comments in one way or another to the progress of ICTs both in the workplace and schools. and Conclusions However, there is still a large imbalance In just over a decade, TVL has modern- of ICT resources between the rural and ised the country’s Telecommunications urban areas of the island nations and network and introduced the Internet to its Vanuatu is no exception. citizens. It has also gone one step further by introducing Lagoon School, which is a free Internet service for schools. It now remains a collective obligation for every Mr Barnabas Boe Christian one else to work towards improving edu- Manager Radio Systems cation standards and increasing the ability Telecom Vanuatu Limited of young children by donating equipment P.O. Box 146 and introducing them to this important VU-PORT VILA Information and Communication Techno- Vanuatu logy tool. Tel.: +678 22 185

Fax: +678 22 628 E-mail: [email protected] 14 Strength of regional presence – ITU’s support and regional organizations' Mr Glen Kalchilia Korikalo activities International Roaming Coordinator Telecom Vanuatu Limited The on-going participation of regional and P.O. Box 146 International organisations, such as the VU-PORT VILA ITU, in providing training to Pacific Island Vanuatu countries has and will always be welcomed, especially in this fast changing Tel.: +678 22 185 information society. Many other regional Fax: +678 22 628 organisations no doubt, have contributed E-mail: [email protected]

242 Vanuatu - 4

Zambia

Telecommunication Development Country Report for Zambia

Zambia has a population of about ten easy for travelers to find access to million people out of which about 400,000 internet in airports, hotels malls and people are in formal employment. It is restaurants. Checking and sending emails worth noting that Zambia has a teledensity is fast becoming as easy as making a call of 0.9. There are currently five Internet at a public pay phone. Service Providers (ISPs) namely Zamtel Online, Zamnet, Uunet, Microlink and Internet is a research tool being a major Coppernet. Altogether they have a total of source of information for students and about 20,000 Internet customers. researchers and a media for messaging communication. However, there is a Almost all ISPs Offer the following disparity in access among the rural and Services: urban areas. – Dial-Up Internet Services, Zamtel Online has tried to go round this – Leased lines Access, problem by creating virtual Points of – E-Mail Services Only, Presence (POPs) in rural areas. In such cases the cost of accessing internet is – Virtual Private Networks (VPN), charged at local call rates. This has – Domain Name Services, drastically reduced the cost of surfing in – Web Designing, rural areas. The virtual POP strategy has been used to stimulate or promote the – Web Hosting, “Internet Café culture”. The Non Govern- – Advertising, mental Organizations (NGOs) and private – Internet Training and Demonstration. schools have taken full advantage of this facility. Further, several organizations Most customers hold Dial-up accounts. have lobbied government to reduce or The last three years has seen a steady scrap duty on equipment such as customer growth in this sector largely due computers that will enable internet to be the following reasons: accessible to the mass market. – High quality of internet services, The strategy in the urban areas has been – Good customer support, to open up more POPs whilst introducing – Low local charges. This especially true new products such as the wireless for Zamtel Online. internet and the Digital Subscriber Lines (DSL). Demand for high-speed Internet connections especially from corporate customers The following are some of the major has equally been high. Hence the increased problems facing the ISPs in Zambia: demand for dedicated leased lines. – Limited IP bandwidth, Public Internet Franchises otherwise – The high cost of procuring IP called Internet Cafes are springing up bandwidth from international vendors, quite rapidly especially in the urban areas. These Internet cafes are making it – Congestion,

Zambia - 1 243

– Low customer base considering the further stimulate customer growth. high population. This is largely due to Another planned project is the upgrade of the majority of the population not DOMSAT to TDMA technology. being able to afford the prerequisites of internet connection let alone In conclusion, ISPs should start research affording additional spending on and development (R&D) and offer value internet bills. added services, like development of portal – E-commerce platform not yet ready. in various areas. For example, a portal for Secure payment system not yet engineering students, having related edu- established. cational information and links. Similarly, portals for medical students, business com- It is projected that the internet customer munity, welfare organizations and social base could begin to increase exponentially services can be developed. This could as the bandwidth and congestion problems increase the number of people accessing are sorted out. The issue of procuring IP the Internet. ISPs could also deliberately bandwidth from cheaper but reliable make available computers with full Internet vendors is high on the agenda. The access to the disadvantaged groups at impending deployment of fibre in both the affordable rates. In this way Internet for all access network and the backbone could could be achieved.

Mr Kambani Ndhlovu Mr Wood Elias Simbeye Chief Engineer Regional Director Zamtel Ltd Zamtel Ltd Provident House Provident House Box 71660 Box 71660 ZM-NDOLA ZM-NDOLA Zambia Zambia Tel.: +260 2 61 7905 Tel.: +260 2 22 1799 Fax: +260 2 62 0833 Fax: +260 2 22 0299 E-mail: [email protected] E-mail: [email protected]

244 Zambia - 2

Zimbabwe

Integrating consumers into the regulatory process

1 Introduction The three companies above are wholly owned by the Government of Zimbabwe, The Posts and Telecommunications Regu- and operate under the Companies Act. latory Authority of Zimbabwe (POTRAZ) The government has plans to have a was established by an Act of Parliament, phased disposal of its stake in the Posts and Telecommunications Act Chap- companies. ter 12:05 of 2000. POTRAZ is an independent Regulatory The Act was the first step in the deregula- Authority that finances its activities from tion or liberalisation of postal and tele- revenues generated from various fees and communications services in Zimbabwe. fines. The POTRAZ Board is non-executive Before the Act the Posts and Telecom- and is appointed by the Minister of munications Corporation (PTC) was the Transport and Communications who is the sole player with dual responsibility of custodian of the Act. The day to day offering and regulating the sectors; i.e. activities of the Authority are run by the both player and referee. Director General who is an ex-officio member of the Board. The Posts and Telecommunications Act [12:05] of 2000 resulted in the split of the Posts and Telecommunications Corpo- 2 Consumer protection ration (PTC) into:

• Posts and Telecommunications Regu- The functions of the Authority as latory Authority of Zimbabwe espoused in Government Telecommu- (POTRAZ) – responsible for licensing nications Sector Policy and the Act and regulating the postal and tele- include: communications sectors. – to promote the interests of con- • TelOne (Private) Limited – deemed sumers, purchasers and other users, licensed and responsible for fixed in respect of the quality and variety of telephone, data and internet services. postal and telecommunications services provided and telecommunica- • NetOne (Private) Limited – deemed tions apparatus supplied; licensed and responsible for mobile services. – to promote the development of postal • Zimbabwe Posts (ZIMPOST) (Private) and telecommunications systems and Limited – deemed licensed and re- services in accordance with practica- sponsible for postal, philately and ble recognised international standards courier services. and consumer demands;

Zimbabwe - 1 245

– to maintain and promote effective POTRAZ plans to conduct a national competition between persons en- market survey, by the last quarter of gaged in the provision of postal and 2003, to gauge the consumers’ perception telecommunications services and any of the services offered by POTRAZ and the activities connected therewith; licensed public operators. – to monitor tariffs charged by postal and telecommunications licensees 4 ZIMTEL with a view to eliminating unfair business practices among such licensees. Zimbabwe Telecommunications (ZIMTEL) is an annual event that is supposed to Various stakeholders, including con- showcase the Zimbabwe consumers, sumers and consumer groups, were par- operators and suppliers the developments ticipants, through workshops and direct and the various products and services contributions, to the process of preparing available on the telecommunications the Posts and Telecommunications Act. market nationally and internationally. This is one of the activities organised by the It is apparent in both Sector Policy and Telephone Users Association. the Act that the Government of Zimbabwe fully embraces consumer protection. It is The event is scheduled for the month of therefore the role of POTRAZ to ensure September of each year. It is in two parts that consumers are integrated into the of Exhibitions and Panel discussions. The regulatory process. Exhibition is the platform for various operators and suppliers to display their products and services. The Panel discus- 3 Telephone users sions discuss topical issues pertaining to association (TUA) telecommunications in Zimbabwe.

Telephone Users Association (TUA) was POTRAZ has engaged itself to actively formed in 1994 as a pressure group to participate in the annual and successful push for the redress in the poor services hosting of ZIMTEL as a forum where offered by the PTC. The TUA is an affiliate various stakeholders can interact on com- of the Consumer Council of Zimbabwe munications issues. (CCZ).

The Telephone Users Association actively 5 Challenges lobbied the government and participated The Zimbabwe telecommunications marin the formulation of the Act that now ket is characterised by demand far sur- regulates the telecommunications sector. passing supply. There is a shortage of The TUA activities cover the whole com- both fixed and mobile network services munications sector in ensuring that the lines. interests of consumers are well articulated. Unfortunately the operations of the It is the outcry of consumers that the association are on a voluntary basis which telecommunication services are not easily has undermined its activities. available; where the service is available it is characterised by congestion, drop out POTRAZ has engaged TUA on several or generally poor quality of service and occasions in assessing and reviewing how regular “unjustified” increase in tariffs. best to deal with telecommunications consumer issues such as: POTRAZ is engaging the licensed public operators through the Telecommunica- – communication with consumers; tions Operators Association of Zimbabwe – support for TUA; (TOAZ) on how the current challenges can be addressed. A general understanding – support for ZIMTEL; was reached to tie operators’ tariff in- – possible review of the Act. crease to commensurate benefits to consumers in terms: TUA and operators are also active parti- – quality of service; cipants to the POTRAZ organised World Telecommunications Day. – availability and increase of capacity.

246 Zimbabwe - 2

6 Conclusion currency will be the key in meeting the needs and protection of the consumers. Zimbabwe is going through an economic Integrating consumers in the regulatory turbulence. However, the resilience of process will involve participation of Zimbabwe makes the challenges sur- various consumer associations and the mountable. Managing hyper inflation education of the consumers on their situation and availability of foreign rights.

Mr Cuthbert Chidoori Mr Gideon Magodo Director-General Director, Communications Postal and Telecommunications Postal and Telecommunications Regulatory Authority (POTRAZ) Regulatory Authority (POTRAZ) Block A, Emerald Park Block A. Emerald Park 30, The Chase – Mt Pleasant 30, The Chase – Mt Pleasant P.O. Box MP 843 P.O. Box MP 843 ZW-HARARE ZW-HARARE Zimbabwe Zimbabwe Tel.: +263 4 333 032 Tel.: +263 4 333 032 Fax.: +263 4 333 041 Fax: +263 4 333 041 E-mail: [email protected] E-mail: [email protected]

Zimbabwe - 3 247